FCC ID: PY7FAB1021011 Licensed Transmitter

 

P900 User Guide

a b c d e f g Letters Lowercase letters are written below the arrow and uppercase letters in line with the arrow. n o p q r s t u v w x 1 y z h i j k l m

2 1 2 1

2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. Accented letters Write the character as described above, then write the accent above the arrow. Other such characters, for example, and , follow the same principle. or Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.

, or

8 9

Numbers Numbers are written above the arrow. 0 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.

Contents OVERVIEW Introduction ................................................................. 8 Getting to know your P900......................................... 9 P900 package...................................................................... 9 P900 overview .................................................................. 10 SIM card ........................................................................... 11 Battery .............................................................................. 11 Care instructions............................................................... 12 First time startup............................................................... 13 Turning your P900 on and off .......................................... 13 Importing phone book entries........................................... 13 Operational modes............................................................ 14 Flip closed mode .............................................................. 15 Flip open mode ................................................................. 16 Flip removed..................................................................... 16 Screen areas ...................................................................... 17 Jog Dial ............................................................................ 18 Keypad functions ............................................................. 19 Indicators and status bar icons.......................................... 20 Memory Stick Duo .................................................... 21 Connecting the accessories............................................... 23 Services............................................................................. 24 Applications - overview.................................................... 24 General functions.............................................................. 27 Entering text..................................................................... 31 P900 locks........................................................................ 35 Phone.......................................................................... 38 Call handling with the Flip closed ................................... 38 Call handling with the Flip open...................................... 41 Handling two or more calls.............................................. 44 Call list and call log ......................................................... 45 Hints and smart functions ................................................ 46 Preferences....................................................................... 50 MEDIA CommuniCorder....................................................... 56 Recording video clips ...................................................... 56 Taking pictures ................................................................ 58 Camera settings................................................................ 59 Pictures and Image editor........................................ 61 Pictures ............................................................................ 61 Image editor ..................................................................... 63 Video player .............................................................. 65 Video clips ....................................................................... 65 Streaming ......................................................................... 67 Preferences....................................................................... 68 3 Music player............................................................... 69 Playing sound files............................................................ 69 Managing sound files........................................................ 70 Internet....................................................................... 73 Using the browser view .................................................... 74 Using the bookmark view................................................. 77 Preferences........................................................................ 79 Games ......................................................................... 81 Chess................................................................................. 81 Solitaire............................................................................. 81 BUSINESS Messaging................................................................... 83 Folders in Messaging........................................................ 84 The accounts in Messaging............................................... 85 Handling text messages .................................................... 85 Handling multimedia messages ........................................ 86 Handling emails................................................................ 89 More about messaging...................................................... 92 Contacts...................................................................... 95 Using Contacts with the Flip closed ................................. 95 Using Contacts with the Flip open.................................... 97 Creating and editing contacts............................................ 98 Managing contacts.......................................................... 100 Making an owner card .................................................... 100 Preferences...................................................................... 101 4 Calendar .................................................................. 102 Creating calendar entries................................................ 102 Managing calendar entries ............................................. 103 Sending and receiving calendar entries.......................... 104 Preferences..................................................................... 104 Tasks ........................................................................ 105 Creating task entries....................................................... 105 Managing task entries .................................................... 106 Moving task entries........................................................ 106 Sending and receiving task entries................................. 107 Preferences..................................................................... 107 Jotter ........................................................................ 108 Creating and editing notes ............................................. 108 Drawing pictures............................................................ 109 Managing notes.............................................................. 109 Sending and receiving notes .......................................... 109 TOOLS Sound recorder........................................................ 110 Making sound recordings............................................... 110 Using sound recordings as ringtones ............................. 111 Sending sound recordings.............................................. 111 Calculator ................................................................ 112 Time.......................................................................... 113 Setting time and date...................................................... 113 Specifying workdays...................................................... 114 Setting locations ............................................................. 114 Setting number formats .................................................. 114 Setting alarms ................................................................. 115 Viewer....................................................................... 116 Common viewer functions.............................................. 116 Viewing Word documents.............................................. 117 Viewing Excel spreadsheets ........................................... 117 Viewing PowerPoint presentations and PDFs................ 118 File manager ............................................................ 119 Online services......................................................... 121 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS PC Suite and multimedia for P900 ........................ 122 PC Suite for P900 ........................................................... 122 Multimedia for P900....................................................... 123 Installing applications............................................. 124 Installing applications on your P900 .............................. 124 Removing applications from your P900......................... 126 Connecting to other devices.................................... 127 Connection via SyncStation............................................ 127 Connection via the Infrared port..................................... 128 Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology .............. 129 Synchronization and backup.................................. 132 Local synchronization..................................................... 132 Remote synchronization ................................................. 133 Backing up data ............................................................. 134 Restoring data ................................................................ 135 SETTINGS Personalizing your P900......................................... 136 Themes........................................................................... 136 Changing your application shortcuts ............................. 136 Setting a wallpaper picture ............................................ 136 Setting a screensaver...................................................... 136 Adding images to your Contacts.................................... 137 Ringtones ....................................................................... 137 Alarm tones and sound notification ............................... 138 Control panel........................................................... 139 The Device tab Application shortcuts ..................................................... 139 Display ........................................................................... 139 Flight mode.................................................................... 140 International................................................................... 141 Locks.............................................................................. 141 Sounds and alerts ........................................................... 141 Text input....................................................................... 143 Themes........................................................................... 143 Time & date ................................................................... 143 User greeting.................................................................. 144 The Connections tab Bluetooth........................................................................ 145 Cable .............................................................................. 146 5 REFERENCE Troubleshooting ...................................................... 170 Guidelines for safe and efficient use...................... 174 Limited warranty............................................................ 176 FCC Statement............................................................... 178 Environmental information............................................ 178 Declaration of Conformity............................................. 178 Terms and definitions............................................. 179 Technical data ......................................................... 187 Index......................................................................... 190 GSM Networks ............................................................... 146 Infrared ........................................................................... 146 Internet accounts............................................................. 147 Messaging accounts........................................................ 151 WAP accounts ................................................................ 156 The Other tab Certificate manager......................................................... 157 Flip removed................................................................... 158 Format disk ..................................................................... 158 IP security manager ........................................................ 159 Language selection ......................................................... 159 Master reset..................................................................... 159 Secure tokens.................................................................. 160 Storage manager ............................................................. 160 WIM PIN settings........................................................... 161 Getting started with Internet and Messaging....... 163 Introduction..................................................................... 163 Automatically set up service provider and messaging ... 164 Manually set up the service provider.............................. 164 Manually set up Messaging ............................................ 165 Setting up WAP accounts ............................................... 166 Using your P900 as a modem ......................................... 166 GPRS - connection information...................................... 168 6 Sony Ericsson P900 User Guide Second edition (November 2003) This User Guide is published by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this User Guide necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB at any time and without notice. Such changes will, however, be incorporated into new editions of this User Guide. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 2003. All rights reserved. Publication number: AE/LZT 108 6634 R1B The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Sony Ericsson is under license. This product contain QuickView Plus and Outside In which are 1992-2002 Stellent Chicago Inc. All rights reserved. QuickView Plus and Outside In are trademarks or registered trademarks of Stellent Chicago Inc. Symbian and all Symbian-based marks and logos are trademarks of Symbian Limited. Memory Stick Duo is a trademark of Sony, its parent and/or its affiliates. Beatnik is a trademark of Beatnik, Inc. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Copyright SyncML initiative Ltd. (1999-2002). All rights reserved. Portions of software PacketVideo Corporation (USA) 1999, 2002. PacketVideo, pvPlayer and the PacketVideo logo are trademarks of PacketVideo Corporation. All rights reserved. This product contains software copyright Beatnik, Inc. 1996-2002. End-user license agreement for Sun Java J2ME:

1. Restrictions: Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to all copies is retained by Sun and/or its licensors. Customer shall not modify, decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, or otherwise reverse-engineer Software. Software may not be leased, assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in part. 2. Export Regulations: Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. The Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Software. Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise exported or re-

exported (i) into, or to a national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran, North Korea, Libya, Sudan, Syria (as such listing may be revised from time to time) or any country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Denial Orders. 3. Restricted Rights: Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR 52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable. Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved. Note Some of the services in this User Guide are not supported by all networks. This also applies to the GSM International Emergency Number 112. Please contact your network operator or service provider if you are in doubt whether you can use a particular service or not. Important Your cellphone has the capability to load, store and forward additional content, e.g. ring tone melodies. The use of such content may be restricted or prohibited by rights of third parties, including but not limited to restriction under applicable copyright laws. You, and not Sony Ericsson, are entirely responsible for additional content that you download to or forward from your cellphone. Prior to your use of any additional content, please verify that your intended use is properly licensed or is otherwise authorized. Sony Ericsson does not guarantee the accuracy, integrity or quality of any additional content or any other third-party content. Under no circumstances will Sony Ericsson be liable in any way for your improper use of additional content or other third party content. 7 OVERVIEW Introduction For ease of reference, the Getting to know your P900 chapter provides a quick overview of the main functions of the phone, shortcuts and general information. Your P900 combines advanced business and entertainment features in one intuitive device. Its integrated camera lets you take pictures and record video wherever you are and use them in a wide range of applications. The pictures can be used in the Picture Phone Book, where they can be used to identify callers. MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) allows you to send and receive messages that include pictures, sound, text and voice notes. The P900 features advanced entertainment functionality that offers high-quality MP3 music and widescreen format video clips and 3D games. New content can be downloaded quickly and easily from Web sites or transferred to the phone via Bluetooth Wireless Technology, an infrared port or a cable. Extra memory is available via the Memory Stick Duo, which also serves as a convenient way to exchange content and applications such as Java games. The P900 can be used as a corporate phone with Ericsson MD110 and Business Phone exchanges. The P900 also contains an organizer, which includes contacts, a calendar, notes and email, all of which can be quickly and efficiently synchronized with a PC. The email application supports attachments. Viewers let you read documents in various formats, such as Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint. The complete P900 documentation consists of the following parts:

Quick Guide User Guide Help texts in the P900 Complementary information on the Internet, refer to Instruction for removing the Flip www.SonyEricsson.com Information on the PC Suite for P900 CD 8 Introduction Getting to know your P900 P900 package L A P900 F B G J D K M H E C A P900 with stylus B Battery C Travel charger D SyncStation E Stereo headset F Protective bag and strap G Extra stylus H Cover and tool set - Flip replacement J Memory Stick Duo K Memory Stick Duo adapter L User documentation package M 2 CDs, PC Suite for P900 and Multimedia for P900 Note The design of the charger varies according to the market. Note If your package does not include all the listed items above, please contact your retailer. Note Before you can use your P900, you must insert the SIM card, and insert and charge the battery. Always detach the charger before inserting or removing the SIM card. Getting to know your P900 9 P900 overview D E F G A B C A B C D E F G H I A Indicator light for Bluetooth wireless technology (blue) B Screen C Flip (in open position) D Indicator light for network and battery (green/red) E CommuniCorder activation and shutter release F Internet button for activation of the browser G Slot for Sony Memory Stick Duo A Stylus B External antenna connector C CommuniCorder D Battery compartment E Connector for accessories and charger F Connector for stereo headset G Jog Dial H Infrared port I On/Off button 10 Getting to know your P900 SIM card When you register as a subscriber with a network operator, you receive a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card. The SIM card contains a computer chip that keeps track of your phone number, the services included in your subscription and your phone book information, among other things. A PIN (Personal Identity Number) code is supplied with the SIM card from your operator and must be entered when switching on your P900. Open the battery cover and insert the SIM card as shown in the picture. Some subscriptions are limited to call only predefined numbers, so-called Fixed Dialing Numbers

(FDN). To avoid problems when traveling abroad, these predefined numbers should be defined as international numbers starting with +, for example +4613244500. In order to speed up calling while at home, the same numbers can also be added in the national number format, for example 013244500. For more information. see Copying contacts to and from the SIM card on page 100. Battery Before using your P900 for the first time, charge the battery provided for at least 4 hours. Use the supplied charger. See Charging the battery on page 12. Insertion and removal To insert the battery 1. Ensure that the Flip is closed. 2. Remove the battery cover by sliding it downward. 3. Place the battery in the battery compartment and close the cover. To remove the battery 1. Ensure that your P900 is turned off. Note It is important to always turn off your P900 before removing the battery. Failure to do so can result in loss of information. 2. Remove the battery cover by sliding it downward. 3. Use your fingernail at the lower lefthand edge of the battery to gently lift the lower edge of the battery outward. 4. Remove the battery. Getting to know your P900 11 Charging the battery When the battery needs to be charged, the phone beeps. The indicator light (on the top of your P900) flashes red and a battery low message appears on the screen. The battery can be charged at any time. The P900's performance is not affected. However, using your P900 while charging increases the charging time. To charge the battery The P900 can be charged either when it is switched on or off. 1. Make sure the battery is inserted in your P900 and the cover is closed. Tip You can also use other battery chargers that have been supplied with other Sony Ericsson phones using the same connector plug, for example, T68i or T300. Note When the battery is completely discharged, or new, it may take up to 30 minutes before the battery charging icon appears on the screen. 4. Wait approximately 4 hours or until the battery meter on the screen is full and the indicator on the top of the P900 shows a steady green light. 5. Remove the charger by tilting the plug upward. 2. Connect the charger to the P900 at the base of the phone by the flash symbol. The charger plug flash symbol must face upward. 3. Connect the charger to the mains. Charging is indicated by the battery meter on the screen pulsing continuously, and the indicator at the top of the P900 showing a steady red light (or green, if the P900 is switched on). See also Battery Use and Care on page 176. Care instructions Your P900 is a highly sophisticated electronic device. To get the most out of it, please ensure that you follow this advice:

Keep the P900 in its protective bag when not using it. Only clean the screen using a commercial glass screen cleaner sprayed on a cloth. Only tap the screen using the stylus provided. 12 Getting to know your P900 First time startup Please read Guidelines for safe and efficient use on page 174 before you start using your P900. When you start your P900 for the first time 1. Press the On/Off button to turn on your P900, keeping the Flip closed. The language selection dialog opens. 2. Select a language from the list. Read more about selecting a language in Language selection on page 159. 3. When you have selected a language, the phone turns off. 4. Open the Flip. Press the On/Off button again. The Setup Wizard starts automatically and guides you through the essential settings. These include date and time settings, and information on Jog Dial, text entry, and the status bar. Follow the onscreen instructions. 5. The Power menu opens. Select Phone on. 6. When the dialog box appears, enter your PIN and press

. Press to delete a digit. Turning your P900 on and off By default, the Power menu prompts you to choose normal operation or Flight mode every time you press the On/Off button. These settings can be turned off. See To use the Power menu on page 47. In Flight mode the phone and Bluetooth functions are switched off, but you can still use the other functions. Set your P900 to Flight mode in locations where the use of cellphones is prohibited. You can also use Flight mode if you want to use the other functions but do not want to receive incoming calls. Importing phone book entries You may want to import existing contact information from another phone into your P900. This can be done in several ways:

Beam the phone book entries from the other phone by infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology and save the set to Contacts. See Creating and editing contacts on page 98. Synchronize the SIM and the internal memory on the other phone with one of the PC PIM applications supported by your P900. Then you can synchronize this information with Contacts. Contacts with your PC PIM Note When you synchronize application, the SIM information will not be synchronized. You might get two versions of the same contact. See Synchronization and backup on page 132. Phone book entries stored on your SIM card are accessible Contacts. Select SIM in the folders menu to the through right in the menu bar to see the list of entries in your SIM Getting to know your P900 13 Flip removed The Flip can also be removed, which makes the organizer applications easier to access. When the Flip is removed, the P900 works in Flip open operational mode. Note Turn off the P900 before you remove the flip to avoid damaging your phone. phone book. These entries can be imported to See Copying contacts to and from the SIM card on page 100. Contacts. Operational modes The P900 works in different operational modes:

Flip closed With the keypad Flip closed, the P900 can be used like a conventional cellphone using the keypad to dial and Jog Dial to navigate. For more information, please see Jog Dial on page 18 and Keypad functions on page 19. You can open the Flip at any time to continue working. Many more functions are available when the Flip is open. Flip open When the Flip is open, the large touchscreen is revealed. You use the stylus to tap the screen to navigate and enter data. There is also a handwriting recognition feature, so you can use the stylus to write on the screen. Jog Dial provides further navigation and selection capabilities. Closing the Flip generally ends an activity and saves the data. Multimedia phone calls and data sessions will, however, continue. 14 Getting to know your P900 Flip closed mode C B A Sony Ericsson Sony Ericsson D E 11:20am 21/06/2004 11:20am 21/06/2004 Call list Call list OK C A Shortcut to Messaging application B Shortcut to Contacts application C Shortcut to Call list application D Shortcut to Calendar application E Shows all applications available in Flip closed mode Standby view The standby view shows shortcuts to the most commonly used applications. Choose which shortcuts you want to use in standby. See Personalizing your P900 on page 136. Selecting and starting applications Rotate Jog Dial to select an application. Press Jog Dial or to start the application. Applications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CommuniCorder Music player Messages Contacts Calendar Tasks Jotter Sound recorder Connections Applications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CommuniCorder Music player Messaging Contacts Calendar Tasks Jotter Sound recorder OK C Tip When application by pressing its specific number. view is selected, it is also possible to start an Closing applications The current application automatically closes and the data is saved when you return to the standby view or switch to another application. To return to standby, press and hold or press Jog Dial backward. Options menu Press options menu to get access to keylock, battery status, missed calls and more. or press Jog Dial forward to open the standby Getting to know your P900 15 Flip open mode C D E F B A Applications View All CommuniCorder Pictures Video Music player Internet Messages Contacts Phone Calendar Tasks Jotter Control panel Calculator CommuniCorder Pictures Video Music player Internet Messages Contacts Phone Calendar Tasks Jotter Control panel Calculator Sound recorder Time Viewer File manager Remote Sync Online services Demo GPRS data log Chess Solitaire i A Shortcut to Messaging application B Shortcut to Contacts application C Shortcut to Phone application D Shortcut to Calendar application E Shortcut to Internet application F Shows all applications available in Flip open mode You can change the shortcuts A-E. See Changing your application shortcuts on page 136. Navigation When the Flip is open, the application shortcut icons shown in the Flip closed mode move to the top row in the Flip open screen. You navigate by using the stylus and tapping selected items and by using Jog Dial, see Jog Dial on page 18. Flip removed You can use your P900 without the physical Flip. When the Flip is removed, the P900 works in Flip open mode. To remove and attach the Flip, refer to the separate instructions. Note Please note that Sony Ericsson does not accept any liability for lost parts or product defects resulting from any disassembly or modification of the product. 16 Getting to know your P900 is shown on the status bar Virtual flip When the virtual flip is enabled, when the virtual flip is open. Select flip. When the virtual flip is closed, the virtual flip keypad is shown. Select You must activate the virtual flip, when you have removed the Flip keypad, by tapping the Enable virtual flip checkbox in to open the virtual flip. to close the virtual Control Panel > Device > Flip removed. Screen areas When the Flip is closed, you use the keyboard and Jog Dial. When the Flip is open, the screen is touch-sensitive. The screen is divided into a number of areas: see the figure and table below. E F C B 11:03 John Smith

+4613244500 (h) End call Chat Edit Internet E dit Sony Ericsson Sony Ericsson P900 A B C D E picker Item A Application Description Displays six icons for quick and easy access to the most common applications. These can be customized. B Menu bar Usually contains two menus on the left, and a folder menu on the right. The two lefthand menus contain:

the application menu, whose name is always the same as the application. It contains the system services used by most applications, such as Find, Send as, and Delete. The edit menus contain editing items such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Zoom, Preferences and Help. In Flip open, the menu bar shows the function of the key. C Application area Applications use this central area of the screen to display the essential information. Many of the built-in applications are based on two standard view layouts: a list view and a detail view. E Status bar D Button bar An application view displays a button bar that contains useful controls and shortcuts. Not all application views require a button bar. Displays device status information such as: signal strength, battery and device information, settings for sounds and time, onscreen keyboard, as well as temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread messages. Displays the name of the active application. F Title bar Getting to know your P900 17 Jog Dial Action Rotate Jog Dial (up) Rotate Jog Dial (down) Press Jog Dial (inward) Press Jog Dial (backward) Press Jog Dial (forward) Function Scrolls items in a list up / to the left, increases volume during a call, moves back a page when playing a multimedia message. Scrolls items in a list down / to the right, decreases volume during a call, moves forward a page when playing a multimedia message. Selects a highlighted item, dials selected phone numbers. Generally the same action as Goes back to the previous screen, dismisses dialogs, and sends a busy signal to the calling party when you receive a call. It will not end a call. Always the same action as closed and Flip closed: brings up the Options menu. Press and hold takes you to the Applications list. Flip open: toggles the Application, Edit and Category menus. Press and hold takes you to the Application launcher. in Flip closed. in Flip open. in Flip Up Down Inward Backward Forward 18 Getting to know your P900 Keypad functions Key Key Function OK Enter selected function, indicated on the display above the key. BACK Return to previous menu. Reject an incoming call. Press and hold to return to Standby. CLEAR Delete entered characters/digits from the screen Press and hold to delete an entire row of entered one by one. characters/digits. Delete an entry from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Sound Recorder, and Messaging. Press and hold to disconnect the microphone

(mute function) when a call is in progress. Mute the ring signal during an incoming call. Pause/play the ringtone when the Music player is open. Press and hold to put the P900 into silent mode, when in the standby view. OPTIONS Open the menu with different options for different applications. Press and hold to open Applications. Function STAR Enter the character *. Press and hold to enter a p (pause) character. Press to switch between different input modes

(Abc, 123 ... ). This is useful when writing SMS messages or similar texts. Press and hold to toggle between T9 and multitap. HASH Enter the character #. Press and hold to see a list with special characters. Terminate the input of PIN and security codes. Retrieve a phone number from the SIM card phone book. Enter the number of the memory position and then press

. NUMERIC KEYS Enter the digits 0 to 9. Enter associated characters or perform associated functions. See Shortcuts on page 40. Press and hold digits 1 to 9 to open Contacts.

Getting to know your P900 19 Indicators and status bar icons These icons appear in the Flip closed standby screen or in the status bar when the Flip is open. When the Flip is open, you can often tap the icons to get more detailed information or start an application. Icon Function Signal strength, GPRS status Icon Battery strength Bluetooth on Bluetooth discoverable Infrared on GPRS active GPRS data transfer in progress Ongoing data call Ongoing call Missed call Forward all calls notification Calls screened Function SMS notification MMS notification Email notification SMS overflow Time Time, alarm set Keylock Magic word Keyboard Multimedia volume Speakerphone Muted microphone Silent mode Home network Voicemail notification 20 Getting to know your P900 Memory Stick Duo The Memory Stick Duo provides a convenient way of increasing the storage space in your P900. You can save still images, video clips, music, and voice recordings as well as computer data and applications on a Memory Stick Duo and use it to store or transfer the contents for many different purposes. These include:

Storing backup copies of important files. Storing media for personalizing your P900. Storing media for use when composing MMS messages. Storing installation files for new applications. Transferring data between the P900 and a PC or Mac. Providing storage for third-party applications. To insert the Memory Stick Duo 1. Open the cover for the Memory Stick Duo slot. 2. Insert the Memory Stick Duo in the slot, with the connector side toward the back (see picture). Make sure it is securely inserted. A click should be heard. Note Insert the Memory Stick Duo correctly to avoid damaging your P900 or the Memory Stick Duo. Getting to know your P900 The Memory Stick Duo supplied with the P900 may or may not be a version that contains the lock function. Remember, you can overwrite existing files without the lock function. To remove the Memory Stick Duo Press the edge of the Memory Stick Duo using your fingernail or the stylus to release it. You hear a click as it jumps out of the slot. Note Be careful when removing the Memory Stick Duo to avoid dropping it. Renaming a Memory Stick Duo You can rename a Memory Stick Duo to give it a name that is meaningful to you. The name you set will be shown in the divider between internal and external storage in the folder menu. See Folders on page 27. There are two ways to rename a Memory Stick Duo:

Select Control Panel > Other > Format disk and tap Rename. See Format disk on page 158. SONY Memory Stick Duo 8MB File manager > File > Format disk and tap Rename. Select Renaming will not erase any data. Copying and moving data For information on how to copy and move data to and from the Memory Stick Duo, refer to Folders on page 27. 21 Reformatting a Memory Stick Duo If you need to reformat a Memory Stick Duo, select Panel > Other > Format disk, or select disk. When you reformat a disk, you delete all the information on it, including any applications that you may have installed. Control File manager > File > Format Sharing data with other devices Your P900 uses the shorter memory stick variant, Memory Stick Duo. Memory Stick Duo Adapter Use the Memory Stick Duo adapter when using your Memory Stick Duo in a device equipped with a regular-sized Memory Stick, for example a personal computer. Insert your Memory Stick Duo according to the picture on the adapter. Warning! Do not insert a Memory Stick Duo adapter without a Memory Stick Duo into a Memory Stick slot. This may damage the product. Always insert the adapter in the slot with the connector end (marked with a triangle) first. Compatibility The P900 defines its own folder structure on a Memory Stick. Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in one application is not visible in another. Other devices must access the same folder structure to interact with the P900 files. If you are using a PC, this is easily done by browsing to the required folder on the Memory Stick. Memory Stick-enabled devices which do not allow you to browse and manage a folder structure may not be able to share data directly with the applications in your P900 (for example, Memory Stick-enabled digital cameras). However, the File Manager can access these files and move them into the correct folders for use by the applications. When your P900 is connected to your PC, you also have access to the P900 folder structure as well as other Memory Stick Duo content in My P900. Personal computer support Both PCs and Apple computers may be enabled for Memory Stick use via built-in Memory Stick slots, Floppy Disk adapters, PC card adapters, and Memory Stick-enabled mouses. (Memory Stick Duo Adapter required.) For more information about the Sony Memory Stick, visit www.memorystick.com. 22 Getting to know your P900 Connecting the accessories E B A A The travel charger is connected to the desk stand or to the P900. Note The design of the charger varies according to the market. B The USB connector from the desk stand is connected to a PC. C The headset is connected to the P900. D Other accessories can be connected to the connector at the base of the P900. E A car holder can be connected to the antenna connector at the rear. Note Remove the plastic plug before connecting the P900 to the car holder. The wrist strap is threaded through the holes next to the connector at the bottom of the P900. Getting to know your P900 23 Services You need the following services to use the P900 functions:

You need... GSM subscription GSM subscription To use... phone services text messaging (SMS) multimedia messaging (MMS) MMS account, GSM data subscription email email account, GSM data subscription Internet account, WAP account (only Internet for WAP 1.x services), GSM data subscription GSM data subscription data communication Please consult your network operator and Internet service provider for more information about the services available to you. Applications - overview You can start applications in different ways. Select icons in the standby view (Flip closed) and in the application picker (Flip open) to start the most important ones. Select applications. to list all Demo application The Demo application shows some of the most common functions in your P900. You can uninstall the demo application and also reinstall it from the Multimedia for P900 CD. See Removing applications from your P900 on page 126 for how to uninstall the demo application and Installing applications on your P900 on page 124 for how to reinstall it. To start the demo 1. Select the Applications icon 2. Select the Demo icon

. The demo starts. To stop the demo Tap the screen or rotate Jog Dial to stop the demo. The demo also stops when any other dialog is opened. Note When the Flip is open, an incoming text or MMS message will not stop the demo. The Demo application can be launched also when the P900 is started without a SIM card inserted. When the P900 asks you to insert the SIM card, just press OK. If the Flip is closed, open it. Phone This is the cellphone application. When the Flip is opened, select to start it. 24 Getting to know your P900 Call list The call list displays the most recent calls, either outgoing, incoming or missed. In Flip closed, press Jog Dial or call the selected entry. To view the call list when the Flip is open, open Phone and select the call list view by tapping the icon. to CommuniCorder For taking video clips and still pictures. In CommuniCorder view, the screen becomes a viewfinder. Press the CommuniCorder button or Jog Dial to start recording or take a photo. Alternatively tap the red button at the bottom of the screen. Pictures (Flip open only) Manages your pictures. You can take pictures with CommuniCorder, or receive them via email, Bluetooth wireless technology and infrared communication. Download via the Internet browser, or transfer them from your PC. With the image editor, you can also edit your pictures. Video (Flip open only) Plays video clips. You can record video with CommuniCorder, download them from the Web or transfer them from your PC. You can stream video and audio from the Web Music player Plays music tracks and other audio files. You can download them from the Web or transfer them from your PC. The player supports the most common sound formats. You can save music tracks on the Memory Stick Duo. Internet (Flip open only) The Internet browser can access both Web and WAP pages. It can also download images, video clips, audio files, and Java applications. Messaging You can read, create, send and delete text (SMS), multimedia

(MMS) and email messages in this view. Contacts Displays a list of your contacts. Select a contact to view associated contact data. Calendar The Calendar view displays entries for the current day. Use Jog Dial to get more information about a selected entry or to change days. Tasks Keeps track of your tasks. Set due date, alarm, priority, and so on, for all your tasks and let your P900 remind you in time. Getting to know your P900 25 Jotter File manager (Flip open only) Displays a list of stored entries. In detailed view, the complete entry is displayed. You can handle the content and organization of media, both in the P900 and on the Memory Stick Duo Control panel (Flip open only) Contains all settings that are systemwide and affect more than one application. This is the main view to use when initially setting up your P900. Note Settings for Flight mode and P900 locks are located under Control panel > Device Calculator (Flip open only) A standard 10-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages. Sound recorder You can use your P900 as a sound recorder. Time (Flip open only) Shows time and date. You can set your current location and another. You can also set different alarms. Viewer (Flip open only) Use it to view various types of documents: for example, Microsoft Word, Excel, Power Point, Adobe Acrobat

(PDF files). Remote Sync (Flip open only) Performs over-the-air synchronization. Using GPRS, the P900 can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization server. Remote Sync works equally well over CSD or HSCSD. Online services i Your service provider may offer different services, for example, weather forecasts, financial information or newsletters. Contact your service provider for more information. GPRS data log (Flip open only) A list of GPRS Internet accounts. Open an account to view your logged GPRS traffic, including your costs. The P900 creates a new data log when a connection to an account is created. Connections (Flip closed only) Configure the way you communicate with your PC or other devices. Select between infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology and cable. In the cable menu, you can also select whether the P900 synchronizes with a PC or acts as a wireless modem. 26 Getting to know your P900 General functions Application launcher views In Flip open, the P900 can present the applications in two ways:

List view (small icons appear in one column) Icon view (large icons appear in two columns) Folders Folders are used to organize information, for example contacts, jotter entries, or task lists. You might want to organize your contacts in business and personal folders. Folders are also used when managing files of different types on your P900 and Memory Stick Duo. You might want to move or copy sound files into a sound track folder to store on a Memory Stick Duo. As you may notice, if you connect your P900 to a PC and view the contents of your P900 in My P900, it is easier to get an overview of a folder and file structure on a large screen than on a handheld device. If you make it a habit to set up specific folders to suit your needs and use them to categorize all your information, working with it becomes easy. Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in one application is not visible in another. For each application there is a default Unfiled folder. Since there is no way of seeing on your P900 whether a file in an Unfiled folder is located on your P900 or on a Memory Stick, we recommend that you move files to your own folders as soon as possible. Every item created in an application is always assigned to a single folder, by default the same folder as displayed in the list view. In list view, the folder menu is used to organize your entries. In detail view, the folder menu allows you to change the folder of the current item. Using the folder menu In the applications that use folders, you can see the folder menu to the right in the menu bar. When a Memory Stick Duo is available in the P900, the folders on it are shown in the folder menu under the divider. If you rename the disk (see Renaming a Memory Stick Duo on page 21), the divider will show the new name. In list view, there is a superfolder called All, which, when Contacts, the All selected, displays items from all folders (in folder does not display the entries in the SIM phone book). All is the default value in list views and when an application is first launched. Getting to know your P900 27 Use the Edit Folders menu item to:

Rename a folder, or move a folder to or from Memory Stick Duo. Select the folder you want to move or rename, tap Edit, type the name of the new folder, and select a Location from the list. Tap Done. To Add a new folder. Tap Add, enter a folder Name and select a Location from the list. Tap Done. To Delete a folder. Select the folder you want to delete and tap Delete. A folder can only be deleted if it is empty. Not all folders can be deleted. To copy all the files in a folder to another folder 1. Open the folder in list view, and select Copy to in the main application menu; for example Audio or Image. 2. Select the destination Folder from the list and select Copy. To move a file from one folder to another Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the destination folder. To copy a file to another folder 1. Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the destination folder. Select Copy to in the main application menu; for example Audio or Image. 2. Select the destination Folder from the list and tap Copy. Tip To delete multiple files in an application, you can use Storage manager. See Deleting or copying general files on page 161. Managing your files Using the File Manager, you can handle the content and organization of media, both in the P900 and on the Memory Stick Duo. See File manager on page 119. You can also use the Storage Manager in the Control Panel. See Storage manager on page 160. Zooming You can change the size of the screen fonts. Choose between Small, Medium or Large. From the menu bar, tap Edit > Zoom. Automatic saving When you work in an application and leave it, your work is automatically saved. Find The Find function searches through all the items stored in an application. The standard Find dialog contains a single text edit box with two buttons, Find and Cancel. Selecting Find starts the search, while Cancel closes the Find dialog. 28 Getting to know your P900 In some applications, for example Messaging, Find may be more complicated:

The size of each message is so large that you may want to restrict the search to the current message only. Folders are potentially more significant, so you may want to restrict the search to the current folder only. Sorting your files You can sort the files you have stored in your P900. By sorting your files, you choose in which order you want the files to be displayed on the screen. You can choose between sorting by, for example, type, size, date, or name. Note Sort is not included in all applications. Sending and receiving items From many applications, it is possible to exchange items like appointments, contacts and images. To send an item using Send as 1. Enter the Send as menu in the specific application. 2. Depending on the application and item, you can choose between the following transfer methods:

Text message (using SMS): The P900 will create a new text message. Add the phone number of the recipient and tap Send. Email: the P900 will create a new message with the item included as an attachment. Complete with address and subject, and tap Send. Multimedia message (using MMS): the P900 will create a new message with the item included as an attachment. Complete the message and tap Send. Infrared: align the infrared port of the P900 with the infrared port of the other device. Select Send. Progress messages on screen will tell you when the information has been transferred. Bluetooth wireless technology: the P900 will search the local area for paired devices. These will be presented in a list. Select a device to which the item is to be sent and select Send. Progress messages will tell you when the information has been transferred. Tip The other devices must have Bluetooth wireless technology enabled. You can select Refresh to perform a new search if, for example, a destination device was not enabled at first. To handle items received in email and multimedia messages 1. Tap the notification icon

, or open Messaging and select MMS or an email inbox. Getting to know your P900 29 2. Open the message. 3. Select the attachments tab. 4. Select the required attachment. The attachment or a summary of the attachment will be displayed. 5. Select Save to save the item. You may optionally display the received item within the related application. See Messaging on page 83 for more information. To receive beamed items 1. Ensure that infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology is activated. 2. For infrared, ensure that the infrared ports are aligned. 3. The received item will be notified by a dialog box listing the item(s) received. 4. Select View to view and save the item to the related application. Select Done and any unsaved items will be automatically saved for you in the Beamed inbox in Messaging. Methods for storing data Your P900 can store data in different ways:

Internal memory. Up to 16 MB of capacity for storing pictures, messages, music, applications, and so on, depending on applications in use. Memory Stick Duo (expansion memory). Several other expansion memory alternatives on the market. Pictures on Sony Image Station on the Web:

For Europe: http://www.sonystyle-imaging.com For Japan: http://www.imagestation.jp For USA: http://www.imagestation.com SIM card, for phone numbers and associated names. See Copying contacts to and from the SIM card on page 100. Getting help From the menu bar tap Edit > Help to get to the P900 help system. The help system uses two views:

The Topics view shows all available topics, for example both specific application topics and general topics. The Detail view presents the title and text of a single topic. The Topics view allows you to select a topic, which opens the detail view/text view and displays the selected topic. You can also set the zoom level and exit the Help system. In many dialog boxes you can select the Help icon upper right corner. in the 30 Getting to know your P900 Settings For settings that are application-specific, tap Edit > Preferences in the application menu bar. For generic settings, go to Control Panel. Entering text Entering text with the Flip closed With the Flip closed, you use the keypad keys to enter text, for example, when writing a text message. When you press a key, a pre-edit box with the different characters on that key is shown in the title area:

If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-

edit box will be selected. The continuously pressed, the then whole words. key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. If key deletes several characters and Types of text input There are four text input types:

Abc initial uppercase letter, the rest lowercase. Default for each new text edit field. 123 numeric entry only abc lowercase entry ABC uppercase entry When you are editing text you can:

Press input type. and select Text options > Input type to select text Press mode. to switch between the input types in text edit Inserting symbols When you are editing text you can press on the application, choose Add symbol or Text > Add symbol to select an item from the symbol selector table. Use Jog Dial to

. Then scroll within the row to select the row and press select a symbol and press

. and, depending T9 text input You can use T9 text input when writing, for example text messages and email. The T9 text input method uses a built-in dictionary to recognize the most commonly used word for each sequence of key presses. This way, you press each key only once, even when the letter you want is not the first letter on the key. Press and hold The following example shows how to start writing a text. to change input method. To enter letters using T9 text input 1. Select, for example, Messaging > Create SMS. Getting to know your P900 31 2. For example, if you want to write the word Jane, press

. During text entry, a suggestion list with word candidates are presented. The most frequently used word is highlighted. 3. If the word is the word you want:

Press to accept and add a space.

(To accept a word without adding a space, press

.) If the word is not the one you want:

Scroll up or down with Jog Dial to view alternative words to accept the word and add a

(candidates). Press space. If you do not find the word you want:

Press to go to a list of options. Select Text options > Spell word. Edit the word using multitap text input and press Yes.The word is added to the user dictionary. The next time you enter the word, it will appear as one of the alternative words. Spell word, to edit the entered word. My words, to view the user dictionary. Language, to change language. Show suggestion list / Hide suggestion list, to switch the candidates window on and off. Use T9 / Use multitap, to switch between T9 text input and multitap text input Add symbol, adds symbols and punctuation marks. Input type, changes the text input type between Abc, abc, ABC and 123. Copy all / Paste, to copy all text to the clipboard, and for pasting the copied text to the place of the text cursor. Entering text with the Flip open There are two ways of entering text with the Flip open:

Use the onscreen keyboard located at the bottom of the screen. Write directly on the screen using the stylus. to enter a full stop. To enter other punctuation 4. Continue writing your message. Press marks, press If you press list of options:

and use Jog Dial. and select Text options when writing, you get a 32 Getting to know your P900 Onscreen keyboard When you need to edit text, tap the keyboard icon in the status bar and then select characters. Tap Done when ready. At the bottom left of the keyboard you can choose between three keyboard layouts with different character sets. abc - standard characters

- international characters 123 - numeric characters and currencies Chat Edit Calendar Edit Unfiled Weekly meeting Type Appointment Description Done The agenda for... Weekly meeting t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 q w e r y u i o p l cap s d f g h j a k z x c v b n m . aeo 123 abc

The current input field is shown to the left in the top bar of the keyboard. Tap the arrows or rotate Jog Dial to change the input field. The keyboard top bar also contains a drop-down menu with Cut, Copy and Paste. When copying or cutting, the text must be selected first. Jane Jones Job title Phone (h) Phone (w) Mobile (w) Last name First name Graphic Desig Chat Edit Contacts Edit Unfiled Handwriting recognition Handwriting recognition translates stylus gestures into letters, digits or other characters, and displays these characters as text. Handwriting recognition is only active in places where text can be input. The text mode screen is split into an upper and a lower part, by an arrow in the middle of the right edge. Write lowercase letters below the arrow and uppercase letters in line with it. Write digits above the arrow. Mark text by putting the stylus on the text, wait a moment, and drag the stylus over the text. Note Most letters can be written using different stroke styles. See the tables below. The style does not determine case. The position on the screen decides case. Default Rin... Ring tone Email (w) Fax (w) Web Getting to know your P900 33 Letters Lowercase letters are written below the arrow and uppercase letters in line with the arrow.

1 2 a b c d e f g h i j k l m 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 n o p q r s t u v w x 1 y z 2 1 2 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. Accented letters Write the character as described above, then write the accent above the arrow. Other such characters, for example, and , follow the same principle. or Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.

, or

8 9

Numbers Numbers are written above the arrow. 0 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.

34 Getting to know your P900 Extended characters To write symbols and characters that are not shown in these tables, please consult the Extended characters section of the Handwriting recognition help topic in your phone. P900 locks Use the SIM card lock and the device lock to protect your SIM card and your P900 from unauthorized use. Use the keylock to prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed. Note You can usually make an emergency call without unlocking the P900. SIM card lock The SIM card lock protects your SIM card, not the P900, against unauthorized use. It is unlocked by the PIN and PUK codes which you receive from your service provider. You can choose to have to unlock the SIM card every time you turn the P900 on, or to have the SIM card unlocked. Your PIN (Personal Identification Number) code consists of four to eight digits. If you activate the SIM card lock, the P900 will ask for the PIN code every time you turn it on. You unlock the SIM card by entering the PIN code. Control panel > Device > Locks. To activate the SIM card lock 1. Select 2. Select a lock option. 3. Select Done. An error message informs you if a wrong PIN code has been entered. Usually, the SIM card will be blocked after three wrong attempts (the number of attempts is SIM card-dependent), and you need to enter the PUK code to unblock it. The PUK code consists of eight digits. When you have entered the right PUK code you must enter a new PIN code. You have ten attempts to enter the PUK code. If all ten attempts fail, the SIM card will be disabled and you need to contact your network operator. You cannot change the PUK code. PIN2 Some functions on the SIM card can be protected by a secondary code feature. Some SIM cards do not have a PIN2 lock. The PIN2 lock cannot be deactivated. The code can be changed by a user who knows the old code. Device lock The device lock protects your P900 and the data in it against unauthorized use. Getting to know your P900 35 If the device lock is set to When SIM changed, it means that the P900 is not normally locked. However, if the SIM has been changed, the P900 asks you to enter the code to unlock the P900 before you can use it. This means that if someone steals your P900 and puts another SIM card into it, they will not be able to use it. Note Your operator can block your SIM, if you report that your phone has been stolen. The device lock is not on when you buy your P900. You can change the device lock code to any four to eight digit personal code. The default device lock code is 0000. Control panel > Device > Locks. To activate the device lock 1. Select 2. Select a lock option. 3. Select Done. You can choose to have the P900 locked every time you turn it on, locked when the SIM card has been changed, or unlocked. It is also possible to use the device lock in combination with the screen saver. Just mark the checkbox Control panel > Device >

Display > Screen > Screen saver device lock to have the device lock activated when the screen saver goes on. Note When using the screen saving device lock, make sure you have set the device lock to activate at Power on. Otherwise your P900 will be unprotected after Power on, until the screen saver goes on. Change code Control panel > Device > Locks. To change a code 1. Select 2. Select Change Codes. 3. Select the code you want to change. 4. First enter the old code, then the new one. (To ensure that you have typed the new code correctly you have to enter it twice.) Automatic keylock This option locks the keys on your P900. This is to protect the device if the keys are accidentally pressed. When this setting is active, the Flip closed keypad will automatically lock after a period of inactivity. To activate or change the keylock Select Control panel > Device > Locks. To unlock the keys Select

. 36 Getting to know your P900 Screen lock This option locks the screen of your P900. This is to protect the device if the screen is accidentally pressed in Flip open mode or with the Flip removed. When this setting is active, the screen will automatically become locked after a period of inactivity. To activate or change the screen lock 1. Select 2. Select a lock time or Off.

> Settings. To lock the screen Select

> Lock screen. To unlock the screen Push Jog Dial Forward > Inward or Backward > Inward. Getting to know your P900 37 Phone The P900 is a fully featured cellphone with complete integration with the other functions of the device, including applications from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called third-party applications. The phone includes useful features such as:

personalized ringtones. Picture phone book Quick access back to the entry in Contacts, making it easy to try an alternative number or send an email if the contact is unavailable or busy. Voice dialing make a call by speaking the contacts name. Voice answer an incoming call may be answered or sent a busy signal, using the words recorded for answer and busy. Access to other applications while talking on the phone. Office hands-free (speakerphone) which is enabled when the Flip is open, making it easy to access applications such as Calendar and Jotter while talking. Flight mode, which enables the P900 to be used as a PDA in situations where radio transmitters may not be used. The GSM and Bluetooth transmitters (and receivers) are switched off. With the Flip closed, you can access most of the functions using Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced tasks, such as handling conference calls or using other applications during a call, are best handled with the Flip open. The P900 supports Customer Service Profile (CSP). This means that some options may be hidden, depending on your subscription. Call handling with the Flip closed With the Flip closed, you can use either the keypad or Jog Dial to handle calls. Outgoing calls To make a call Enter the phone number on the keypad and press Jog Dial or press Press to delete a typed character. Press and hold

. to delete all characters. Press and hold to insert the international call prefix +. 38 Phone Press and select Hide my number, if you do not want to reveal your phone number to the party you are calling. Select Show my number, if you want to show it. If a call is not successfully connected, the P900 can be set to automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is successful, the P900 alerts you with a single ringtone. To make an emergency call Enter the emergency number on the keypad and press Jog Dial or press Usually, but not always, no SIM card or PIN code is required for emergency calls and you are able to make the call as long as the available network allows and you have coverage from a GSM network. Check with your local provider to find out if emergency calls are possible without a SIM card, and which emergency call numbers are supported. To make a call using Speed dial Speed dial is a fast way to call one of your special speed dial numbers. See Set up speed dial numbers on page 46. 1. Select the key corresponding to the number of the speed dial contact. The speed dial name is shown above the picture is attached to the speed dial, the picture is also shown. key. If a 2. Press

. Phone on the standby screen. To make a call using the Call list 1. Select 2. Press Jog Dial or 3. Scroll the list by rotating Jog Dial and select an entry. 4. Press Jog Dial or

. To make a call using the Contact list 1. Select on the standby screen. 2. Press Jog Dial or 3. Scroll the list by rotating Jog Dial and select a contact. 4. Scroll by rotating Jog Dial and select the desired number. 5. Press Jog Dial or For more information, see Contacts on page 95. To make a call using voice control 1. There are three ways to use the voice recognition function. Press and hold Jog Dial. Press and hold

. Say the Magic word. Press the call button on the headset. When the Magic word function is activated, the appears on the status bar. icon 39 2. When you hear a short tone, speak the voice command linked to the number you want to call. See To record a voice command on page 51. The P900 connects you with the matching contact. You can use voice control when the P900 is handheld, used with a hands-free set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. Magic word cannot be used together with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. For more information, see Voice control on page 50. To end a call Press

, or press Jog Dial. Shortcuts Press and hold to dial your voicemail. With the Flip open, select Phone > Call voicemail. See Voicemail on page 53 on how to set up voicemail. Press any of the keys from to to call a speed dial number. followed by Press Press and hold any of the keys from twice to call the last dialed number. to your Contact list. Press again to reach the next letter. Additional key presses add letters to your search. to open Press for the last dialed number. Incoming calls When you receive a call, the name of the caller is displayed if the calling party is in Contacts. If there is an associated picture, it is also shown in a small or large version. See Incoming call picture on page 50. to silence the to answer the call or answer by voice To handle an incoming call You can press control, see Voice control on page 50. You can press ringtone. An incoming call brings up the following options:

to reject a call and press 1 Answer Answer the call. 2 Send Busy Reject the call. The calling party hears a busy signal and the call is logged as a rejected call. 3 Mute Silence the ringtone. The calling party will not notice that you have silenced the call. The call is logged as a missed call. If a large picture of the caller fills the screen, you can use Jog Dial to get the menu with the options above. Press any digit followed by in the SIM phone book. to reach a phone number 40 Phone to get a list of call handling options. The list varies Options during or after a call Use Jog Dial to change the phone volume during a call. Press according to the situation. Options that concern two or more active calls are described in Handling two or more calls on page 44. End call End the active call. Hold call/retrieve call Put the active call on hold /retrieve the held call. This is useful if you want to make a new call during a call. Add to contacts Create a new Contacts entry if the phone number of the active call is known, and not already stored in Contacts. Show contact Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that corresponds to the phone number of the active call. Transfer sound Transfer the call to a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. Turn On/Off tones You can send DTMF tones with the keypad, Controlling tone-based services on page 47. Microphone mute On/Off Turn the microphone on or off. Copy number Copy a phone number for exchange with other text fields or applications. Paste number Paste a copied number into a field. Speakerphone On/Off You can use the P900 as a speakerphone. See Speakerphone on page 46. Applications Open another application, and, for example, paste a copied phone number into a Jotter entry. to mute the microphone. Press Press and hold reactivate the microphone. again to Call handling with the Flip open You use the stylus and the virtual keypad to handle calls with the Flip open. Outgoing calls To make a call 1. Select opened. in the application picker. The Speed dial view is on the button bar. 2. Tap 3. Enter the digits with the virtual keypad and tap on the right of the keypad, or press Jog Dial inward. To delete a typed character - select

. If you do not want to show your phone number to the party you are calling, select Phone > Hide my number after you have entered the digits. Select Show my number, if you want to show it. Phone 41 If a call is not successfully connected, the P900 can be set to automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is successful, the P900 alerts you with a single ringtone. To make a call using Speed dial Speed dial is a fast way to call one of your special speed dial numbers. See Set up speed dial numbers on page 46. This is the default phone view. 1. Select on the button bar. 2. Use Jog Dial or tap with the stylus to select an entry. To make a call using the Call list 1. Select from the button bar. Chat Edit Phone Edit Sony Ericsson Sony Ericsson 1 2 3 John Sandra Susan(w) 4 5 6 Mike Julia(h) Robert 7 8 9 Elizabeth Empty Empty 2. Select an entry by rotating Jog Dial and pressing it inward. You can also tap the entry using the stylus. 3. Select Note Calling from the Call list is only possible in Compact mode, Edit > Compact mode. To make a call using the Contact list 1. Select in the application picker. 2. Select an entry by rotating Jog Dial and pressing it inward. 3. Select a phone number by rotating Jog Dial. 4. Press Jog Dial inward. You can also tap the contact and/or number using the stylus. To make a call using voice control 1. There are three ways to use the voice recognition function. Press and hold Jog Dial. Speak the Magic word. Press the call button on the headset. When the Magic word function is activated, the appears on the status bar. icon 2. When you hear a short tone, speak the voice command connected to the number you want to call. See To record a voice command on page 51. The P900 connects you with the matching contact. You can use voice control when the P900 is handheld, used with a hands-free set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. The magic word cannot be used together with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. For more information, see Voice control on page 50. 42 Phone To end a call Select End call, or press Jog Dial. Incoming calls When you receive a call, if the calling party is found in Contacts, the name of the caller is displayed. If there is a picture, it is also shown in a small or large version. See Incoming call picture on page 50. To handle an incoming call Use the screen buttons to select what to do. Answer Answer the call. Send Busy Reject the call. The calling party hears a busy signal, and the call is logged as a rejected call. Mute Silence the ringtone. The calling party will not notice that you have silenced the call. The call is logged as a missed call. You can also answer by voice control, see Voice control on page 50. Options during or after a call There are several options available, depending on the situation. You can access some of them using the screen buttons, by tapping the field with the calling party details, or on the menus. Options that concern two or more active calls are described in Handling two or more calls on page 44. End call End the active call. Hold call/retrieve call Put the active call on hold/retrieve the held call. Add to contacts Create a new Contacts entry. This option appears automatically after a call if the phone number of the call is known, and not already stored in Contacts. See Add to contacts on page 51. Show contact Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that corresponds to the phone number of the active call. Zoom in/out Enlarge/reduce the view. Copy number Copy a phone number for exchange with other text fields or applications. Paste number Paste a copied number into a field Tap Call volume Adjust the volume in the phone. This is easier to to make the following adjustments:

do with Jog Dial. Silent mode All audible ringtones are turned off. Speakerphone Activate the P900 as a speakerphone. Mute microphone Turn the microphone on or off. Phone 43 Handling two or more calls During a call, you can make a second call, or answer an incoming call. The ongoing call is put on hold and the new call becomes active. The held call is shown with a grey background. If someone calls when a call is on hold, you will be asked if you want to release the held call and answer the incoming call. When an active call is finished, you are asked to retrieve the held call. If you do not respond within a few seconds, the held call is also finished. To make and handle a new call during a call 1. During a call, make a second call, or answer an incoming call. 2. Press Chat Edit Phone Edit 11:03 John Smith 0123456789012(h) 0123456789012(h) to get a list of call handling options with the Flip closed. With the Flip open, choose options by tapping the screen buttons, by tapping the field with the calling party details, or selecting from the menus. End active call End the active call, the held call becomes active. Anne Jones (w) End active call Switch calls Join calls Switch calls Switch between the active and held call. Join calls Join the two calls for a conference call. Transfer calls Connect the held call to the active call and disconnect yourself from the call. Release all End both calls. Show contact Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that corresponds to the phone number of the active call. Conference calls A conference call can be started when you have an active call and a held call. The conference call view is automatically displayed whenever a party has been added to the conference. If an incoming call is answered during a conference call, the conference call is put on hold. Note Conference calls are only available if they are supported by your subscription. Chat Edit Phone Edit 1 2 3 John Smith

(w) Tom Clark

(w) Ann Jones

(h) 11:03 End conference Hold conference Hide parties 44 Phone To start a conference call With one active call and one held call, tap the Join calls button, or select Phone > Join calls from the menu. To add a new conference party 1. During a conference call, tap a new call. 2. Select Join calls. on the button bar and make To manage a conference call Use the screen buttons:

End conference End the conference for all parties. Hold conference Put the conference on hold. The other parties can still talk to each other. Show / Hide parties Switch between the standard call control view and conference call view. To speak privately to a specific conference party Tap a party in the list to get the following options:

Extract Make the selected party the active call, the rest of the parties are put on hold. Release End the conference call for the selected party. Call list and call log The Call list shows calls made, received, rejected, or missed. The log keeps track of date, time, length, and cost information

(if available) for each call. The List view of the call log shows the calls in order with the most recent call at the top. To view the Call list with the Flip closed:

1. Press

. 2. Select Call list. or 1. Select 2. Press display. on the standby screen to open the Call list. and select which calls in the list you want to The currently selected view is not shown in the options menu. Tip With the Flip closed you can press once to view the call list. Press twice to call the last number used in the P900. To view the Call list with the Flip open:

1. In the Phone application, select 2. Select a listed call to see more detailed information about it. from the button bar. Phone 45 To delete calls from the Call list To delete all calls, select Phone > Delete all calls. To delete old calls, select Phone > Delete entries older than >

Enter a date > Delete To delete one call, open the detailed view on the call > Phone

> Delete this entry. Hints and smart functions Speakerphone If you open the Flip during a call, the speakerphone function is activated and the volume increases. This lets you continue the conversation while using other functions of the P900. Close the Flip or tap Note The speakerphone does not work while the phone is in silent mode. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure to excessive volume may damage hearing. to switch off the speakerphone. Silent mode In silent mode, all sound ringtones and sound alarm signals are and select Turn turned off. When the Flip is closed, press on silent to put the phone in silent mode. Press and select Turn off silent to turn off silent mode. When the Flip is open, tap the sounds icon on the status bar to open a dialog where you can toggle silent mode on or off. The vibrating alert still works in silent mode if not deactivated. Set up speed dial numbers Speed dial is a fast way to call one of nine selected phone numbers. The view contains nine speed dial positions. Each speed dial entry consists of a picture or an icon, and a name or a number. The names, numbers and pictures shown in the Speed dial view are derived from the Contacts application, see Contacts on page 95. If the contact has a picture stored then this picture is used. A default icon is used if the contact does not have a stored picture. from the button bar. To set a Speed dial number 1. Select 2. Select an empty position. 3. Select the desired contact. 4. Select Done. 46 Phone

, on the button bar. To edit or delete a Speed dial number 1. Select 2. Select Edit > Edit speed dial. 3. Select the contact to edit or delete. 4. To change the name, enter the new name. To delete a contact, tap Delete. 5. Select Done. Flight mode In flight mode, the radio function is turned off so that it does not disturb sensitive equipment, for instance in an airplane hospital. You cannot make and receive calls, but most of the other functions in the P900 are available. Note The phone and other communication functions must never be used in an aircraft unless otherwise instructed by the aircraft personnel. If the use of equipment without a radio transmitter is permitted, you can turn on the flight mode on the product. Doing so turns off the radio function. You can set a Power menu to ask you if you want to start the P900 in normal mode or flight mode each time you turn on the P900. See Flight mode on page 140 on how to activate this function. To use the Power menu The Power menu has the following options:

Phone on Start the P900 in the normal way. Flight mode Start the P900 in flight mode. Power off Turn the P900 off. To toggle flight mode on and off when Power menu is selected 1. Press the On/Off button. 2. On the Power menu, select the option you want. 3. Press Jog Dial,

, or tap Done. To toggle flight mode on or off 1. Select Control panel > Device > Flight mode. 2. Select Flight mode. 3. Select Flight mode now / Phone on now. 4. Tap Done. Controlling tone-based services You can use your P900 to control phone banking services or other tone-based services that use DTMF (Dual-Tone Multifrequency). The P900 provides different ways of sending tones during a call:

Pressing keypad keys during an active call. Phone 47 Including a tone sequence in the call setup. After the phone number, but before the digits, press and hold to insert a pause, represented by the character p. Then press your digits. Finally make the call by pressing

+4613244500 p1#1234567890 p10#0#34#56789 (w) Chat Edit Contacts Edit Unfiled Bank p30#1234#56 (w) Program digit sequences into a Contact card for the service. Each digit sequence to be sent as tones must begin with pc. Once your call to the service has been established and you want to send one of your preprogrammed digit sequences, choose Show contact on the Phone menu to get to the Contact card with the tone sequences. Note It is not advisable to program any personal codes into your P900, in case your phone is stolen or lost. p10#1#567890123 (w) p20#123456789 (w) Support for TTY Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is an aid for people with speech impairments. To use the TTY device together with the P900 1. Connect the TTY device to the accessories connector at the base of the P900. 2. In Phone, go to Edit > Preferences > TTY Accessory and select the checkbox to set the P900 into TTY mode. Refer to the TTY device user manual to find out how to use the device. It may be necessary to use an adapter between the TTY device and the P900. You can still make normal calls with the P900 in TTY mode, but other accessories such as hands-free will not work properly. Do not open the Flip during a TTY call. This will impair the quality of the connection. Note Support for voice carryover (VCO) and hearing carryover

(HCO) is handled through the TTY device and not through the phone. Support for ALS Alternate line service (ALS) allows you to have more than one line, and more than one phone number, to one SIM subscription. If you are not subscribed to ALS, these dialogs and settings are hidden. Using ALS, you can select the line to be used for outgoing calls. You can use the first line for any function, while the second line may be used for speech only. 48 Phone If you know what numbers and codes your PBX accepts, you can send these without the phone manipulating them. Start any number or command with a p. This is done by pressing and holding the key. When storing such a number on a Contact card, it should be stored with a leading p, and a command (to the PBX or for example to a phone bank) with a leading pc. When using it at home, the call is still dialed as an internal call via the PBX. Note When traveling abroad, use your phone as a normal GSM phone, by clicking the PBX status bar icon and set the calling card to Off. Incoming calls can be received on both lines at any time. The name of the line is shown and the ringtone defined for the line is used. To select a line for outgoing calls The preset line is shown by the icon on the status bar. If you want to use the other line:

With the Flip closed, press and select Switch to line 1 or Switch to line 2 depending on the previously preset line. With the Flip open, tap and select Switch to line 1 or Switch 2 to line 2 depending on the previously preset line. Corporate phone services in P900 The P900 can be used as a corporate phone in an Ericsson MD110 or Business Phone PBX, if this is equipped for mobile extensions. To place calls to colleagues, use the internal extension numbers. When dialing an external number, you do not need to dial the external line prefix; it is added automatically. Dial the switchboard operator or corporate voicemail as from any other corporate phone. It is recommended that when storing numbers in Contacts you use the international number format, starting with +. This also allows you to use the Contact card when you do not use the PBX, when you are abroad, and when you are sending SMS or MMS messages. Phone 49 02:00 PBX call Chat Edit Phone Edit John Smith

+44274555140 (w) Incoming calls via the PBX may be routed to the P900 as well as to your fixed extension, and you can answer with either phone. During a call, the P900 can activate PBX features, such as making a new call, conference calls, inquiry calls, and callback. When the phone is idle, click the status bar PBX icon Command to send other commands to the PBX, such as In meeting until..., Course, or Business trip. Your PBX administrator controls call routing, feature buttons and commands in your phone via the settings file. Conference Call back New call End call

PBX PBX PBX PBX

... Preferences In this menu, you can change the settings for the phone options.

(Settings on your P900 that are systemwide and affect more than one application are made from the Control panel, see Control panel on page 139). To set the phone preferences 1. Select Phone > Edit > Preferences. 50 2. Select the item to set up. Incoming call picture If an incoming caller has a picture stored in contacts, it is displayed on the screen. Select the checkbox to show a large version of the picture over the whole screen. Voice control The voice control option lets you manage calls using your voice. With Voice answer you can use words recorded for answer and busy to answer or send a busy signal to an incoming call. With Voice dialing, you can make a call by speaking the contacts name. Speak a magic word and then the name of the person you want to call, and the P900 attempts to call the person. Instead of the magic word, you can also press and hold Jog Dial or press the hands-free set call button. Note The magic word is not supported by the Bluetooth headset/car kit in the P900. Instead of the magic word, push the button on the Bluetooth headset. After a confirmation tone, you should speak the name. The magic word ensures that the P900 will not call somebody whose name has just been mentioned by chance. Voice dialing Select On or Off. Phone Magic word Select the cases where you want to use the magic word when you use voice dialing. You must, however, record a magic word before you can decide to use it. Using the magic word increases battery drain. Voice answer Select On or Off. Tap On if you want to answer or reject incoming calls by voice commands. You must first record voice commands for Answer and Busy. Play caller name If you have recorded a name for a person in Contacts, the P900 will tell you the persons name when he or she calls you. This is useful when using your P900 together with a hands-free. Voice commands A list of the voice commands. A balloon means that a voice command is recorded for the command. To record a voice command 1. Select one of the options, Magic word, Answer, or Busy and tap Record. 2. Speak the magic word, the answer command or the busy command after the tone. If you are recording a magic word, make sure that you choose a long unusual word, which can easily be distinguished from ordinary background speech. 3. Select Play to check the quality of your recording. 4. Select Done to exit. You are advised to record voice commands in a quiet environment to maximize recognition.You must also select voice commands carefully, so they are not activated by mistake by environment sounds. To record voice commands for individual contacts, see Creating and editing contacts on page 98. Add to contacts This is a function for adding called and calling parties to Contacts. After a call has ended, if the phone number is not already stored in the Contacts, you are asked if you would like to add it. Set the function On or Off. Hands-free Specify how to manage calls when the P900 is used with a hands-free kit connected. Answering mode Select the option you want. Normal Answer calls as normal. Any key Press any key (except answer.

) on the keypad to After 5 seconds P900 answers automatically after five seconds. Phone 51 You can also select to use a Bluetooth headset as the preferred sound device. See Pairing on page 129 for information on how to establish connection with the headset. Bluetooth: Preferred sound device Select the option you want. Phone Use the keypad to manage incoming and outgoing calls. Headset Use the headset or the keypad to manage incoming and outgoing calls. Forward calls You can forward incoming calls to another number if for any reason you are unable to answer them. To forward calls 1. Select the type of call you want to forward. 2. Specify the phone number you want to forward to. 3. Select Done. The settings are stored in the network. Tap Refresh to receive the current settings. Tip Normally the data/fax options should not be changed. Accepted callers You can specify who should be able to call you. All other callers will be rejected. Your options are:

All callers Everybody can phone you. Listed callers only Only people on the Accepted callers list can phone you. Contacts Only people in your Contacts address book can phone you. Speed dial list Only people in your Speed dial list can phone you. No one No one can phone you. To add a contact to the Accepted Caller list 1. Select Add new. 2. Select Lookup and chose a contact, or write the name and number of the contact. 3. Select Done. Call waiting Use these setting to control how the P900 handles incoming calls during an already ongoing call. On You will be alerted by incoming calls. Off The P900 sends a busy signal to the calling party. 52 Phone Restrict calls You can set restrictions for calls made from or to your P900. You can, for example, prevent it from being used for long-

distance calls. To restrict incoming calls 1. Select the Incoming tab. 2. Set restrictions for:

All incoming calls. Incoming calls when roaming. Use this to avoid costs for incoming calls when traveling abroad. To restrict outgoing calls 1. Select the Outgoing tab. 2. Set restrictions for:

All outgoing calls. Outgoing international calls. Outgoing international calls except to your home country. Voicemail For easy voicemail access, enter the number of the voicemail of your operator. With the Flip closed, press and hold With the Flip open, select Phone > Call voicemail. to call this number. Calling cards Calling cards are used together with some phone services. These settings specify how P900 handles calling cards. Most Calling card settings are protected by the Device lock, see Device lock on page 35. Calling card mode Select how to use calling cards. Calling cards A list of your calling cards. Selected card Select which of your calling cards you want to use. Please consult your calling card operator for more details. To create a new calling card account Select New and enter the account information. Access tab:

Name Enter a name for the calling card account. Access number Enter the phone number of the calling card server. Verification code Enter the verification code. International prefix Enter the international prefix used in your country. Set up tab:

Phone 53 Sending order Number then code means that the P900 first sends the phone number you have started to call, and then sends the verification number. Code then number means the opposite order. Delay for number/code Set a time delay between the moment the calling card answers the call and the P900 starts sending tones. Some international calling card services instruct their users to select a language by pressing a digit. When using the P900 calling card feature, you can insert such a digit in one of these places:

Immediately after the access number, but preceded by a pause sign, p. In the verification code. In the phone number that is dialed. Corporate phone services Corporate phone services are set up using the calling cards setting. To set up corporate phone services You set up corporate phone services by importing a .pbx type settings file. This file can be received via email, stored on the Memory Stick or downloaded from the Internet. Note Make sure the file is authentic before you import it. 1. Place the file in the Document > Unfiled area of the P900 or the Memory Stick. 2. Select Edit > Preferences > Calling cards. 3. Tap Import. 4. Select the settings file and tap Import. 5. Select the card among the imported cards in the Selected card control. 6. Activate the card by setting the Calling Card Mode to either Always use calling card or Prompt before call. TTY Accessory Select the checkbox when you want to use the P900 together with a TTY accessory. Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is an aid for deaf and speech-impaired people. AoC - Call meter settings Advice of Charge allows you to keep track of the cost of calls and to stop the P900 from making chargeable calls when a certain credit limit has been exceeded. The Advice of Charge option only appears in the list if it is supported by your current subscription. If the credit is limited, a Low credit warning is displayed, when there are approximately thirty seconds of credit left. 54 Phone To set the line tags 1. Select the ALS settings dialog. 2. Edit the names for line 1 and 2. 3. Tap Done. When the credit runs out, Credit expired is displayed and ongoing, chargeable calls are stopped. Please refer to the onboard help for detailed information about Call meter settings. Note PIN2 is required from your network operator for storing any changes you make to the Call meter settings. Not all networks provide charging information to the phone during a call. If your network provides this service and your subscription is for Advice of Charge Charging, you cannot make or receive any chargeable calls if you are roaming in a network that does not provide charging information. This restriction does not apply when your subscription is for Advice of Charge Information. You cannot change the type of subscription from your phone settings. Please consult your operator for more details. ALS settings If the user is not subscribed to ALS, these dialogs and settings are hidden. Some of the phone settings are used on a per-line basis. In most cases, the settings displayed apply to the selected line. This is then indicated in the dialog title bar. In other cases, the lines correspond to separate settings or tabs in the dialogs. Phone 55 MEDIACommuniCorder With the built-in CommuniCorder camera, you can record video clips and take pictures, view them on your phone screen and send them directly to friends or colleagues via multimedia messaging. You can also send the video clips and pictures you have saved in your P900 via messaging, infrared communication or Bluetooth wireless technology, for example to a PC. It is also possible to exchange video clips and pictures between the P900 and the Web. The pictures in your P900 can be set as wallpaper or they can be added to the contacts in your phone book. See Personalizing your P900 on page 136 to find out more about using pictures. A button CommuniCorder application and acts as the shutter release when taking pictures. Jog Dial is used to set the CommuniCorder working mode:

on the camera activates the Video camera Video Automatic setting Still camera Auto Automatic setting Still camera Night Set for dark environment Still camera Indoor Set for indoor light Still camera Outdoor Set for outdoor light Still camera Message picture Video camera Message video Set for picture size 160x120 pixels Set for video clips to be appended to messages Recording video clips You can record a video clip with the Flip open as well as closed. To record a video clip 1. Press the camera button application. to activate the CommuniCorder 2. If required, rotate Jog Dial to the Video mode or Message video if the video clip is to be sent in an MMS. 3. Press again to start recording. The status indicator flashes red during the recording. 4. Press Jog Dial to stop recording. The video clip is automatically saved in Video. You can also press Jog Dial, or, when the Flip is open, tap the capture button video clip. at the bottom of the screen to record a 56 CommuniCorder By default, the video clips you record are stored internally in the Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to change the storage location to another location, for example, on a Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27 for more information on using folders. To send a video clip you have just recorded in Flip closed, select Send as MMS from the Flip closed context menu. In Flip open, tap

. Note Most operators only accept video clips of 10 seconds length or 95 KB size.Use the Message video mode, or the Video limit setting in Video mode to limit the file size. Open the Flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder settings. With the Flip open, the CommuniCorder is activated by selecting

. To delete the last video clip 1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete clip. 2. Confirm the delete operation. To delete a video clip you have just recorded in Flip closed, select Delete from the Flip closed context menu. To manage video clips, tap Video player on page 65 for more information. to go directly to Video player. See Delay timer The CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds. The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the shutter release and the moment when the recording starts. To set the delay time 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences. 2. Tap and set the desired delay time To record video with delay timer 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer. 2. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and a timer icon is shown before the recording is started. When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon

. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer. Video status Above the viewfinder, you will find the video status. Icons show whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, video quality, and audio quality. A number indicates how much time you have left. The calculation is based on the current settings plus available space on the storage location you have selected (internal or the Memory Stick Duo). CommuniCorder 57 Taking pictures You can take a picture with the Flip open as well as closed. To take a picture 1. Press the camera button application. to activate the CommuniCorder 2. If required, rotate Jog Dial to the desired mode. 3. Press again to capture the image on the screen. The picture is automatically saved in Pictures. button, or when the Flip at the bottom of the screen You can also press Jog Dial, the is open, tap the capture button to take a picture. By default the pictures you take are stored internally in the Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to change the storage location to another location, for example, on a Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27 for more information on using folders. To send a picture you have just taken in Flip closed, select Send as MMS from the Flip closed context menu. In Flip open, tap

. Open the Flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder settings. With the Flip open, you activate the CommuniCorder by selecting or pressing the camera button

. To view the last picture 1. Select CommuniCorder > View picture. 2. Select Done to return. To delete the last picture 1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete picture. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Delete to delete the picture. To delete a picture you have just taken in Flip closed, select Delete from the Flip closed context menu. To manage or edit the picture, tap See also Pictures and Image editor on page 61. to go directly to Pictures. Delay timer The CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds. The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the shutter release and the moment when the picture is taken. To set the delay time and the picture freeze time 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences. 2. Tap and set the desired delay time. 58 CommuniCorder In this dialog box, you can also set the picture freeze time. This specifies the time the picture stays unchanged on the screen after you have taken it. To take a picture with delay timer 1. Select 2. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer. 3. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and

. a timer icon is shown before the picture is taken. When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon

. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer. Image status Above the viewfinder, you will find the image status. Icons show whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, delay timer status, picture size and picture quality. A number indicates how many pictures you have left. The calculation is based on the current settings plus available space on the storage location you have selected (internal or the Memory Stick Duo). Camera settings You may want to change some of these settings, if, for example, you are taking a picture in daylight or in dark surroundings. You can also select what resolution, size and quality, you want for the pictures you take. Note Depending on the mode you are using, some settings may be fixed (and not user-adjustable). To change preferences for the camera 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences. 2. Select the setting you want to change:

Move the slider to change the brightness of the picture. Move the slider to change the contrast. Turn the backlight On when the light behind the subject is brighter than the light in front of the subject. Turn the flicker-free function On to reduce the effects of flicker, for example from fluorescent light. Choose white balance according to the lighting conditions you are in when taking the picture. For pictures, select quality and size. The picture sizes, 640x480, 320x240 and 160x120, are displayed in pixels. For video, select quality for video and audio. Larger size and higher quality require more memory. Choose delay time and freeze time for the still camera, and delay time and Video limit for video. The icons in the upper right corner of the main view reflects the quality and size settings of the pictures and video clips and also the sound quality of video clips. CommuniCorder 59 To restore the default CommuniCorder preferences 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences. 2. Tap Default. 3. Tap Yes. 60 CommuniCorder Pictures and Image editor In Pictures, you can manage all of the pictures saved on your P900. The pictures can be taken using the CommuniCorder, received via email, Bluetooth wireless technology or infrared communication, downloaded via the browser or transferred from your PC via a cable. Your P900 supports JPEG, GIF, PNG, WBMP and BMP picture formats. In the Image editor, you can perform basic editing of your pictures. Pictures The pictures can be sent in multimedia messages, added to the contacts in your phone book, or used as a wallpaper image and screensaver. Chat Edit Pictures Edit All Brioney At home Thumbnail view The thumbnail view provides an overview of all the pictures stored on your P900. You can search for specific pictures and sort your pictures by name, date, size or type. Move between the pictures with the arrow buttons or Jog Dial. 12 pictures (890Kb) Mont Blanc 309F0003

. or Change between a thumbnail view and a list view of the pictures by tapping At the bottom of the screen, you can see how many pictures you have saved in your P900. Tip To take a new picture, tap to go to the CommuniCorder. To sort the pictures Tap Edit to choose how to sort the pictures in your folders. Detail view Tap a picture to go to Detail view. In Detail view, you can rename your pictures and sort them into folders. This makes it easier for you to keep track of your pictures. To rename a picture 1. Select Pictures > Rename picture. 2. Enter a picture name > Done. Note Two or more pictures cannot have the same name. Chat Edit Pictures Edit Photos Snow 10:15am,21/06/04 Pictures and Image editor 61 Tip Use the Folder function to organize your pictures. Read more about organizing files in Folders on page 27. At the bottom of the screen, you can see the picture information, for example, the size of the picture and the date the picture was taken. Actual size means each pixel of the image is displayed on one pixel of the screen, so a 640x480 image will be displayed with scroll bars as it is larger than the display area. Use current folder. or Jog Dial to move between the pictures in the takes you back to the thumbnail or list view. and Sending and receiving pictures You can send pictures to other phones or to a PC via multimedia messaging, IR or Bluetooth use Pictures > Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. You can also save pictures that you have received via email and in multimedia messages. See Incoming multimedia messages on page 86 and Receiving attachments on page 91. Note Pictures with Forward lock cannot be sent further. Zooming pictures, widescreen and full screen From the detail view of the picture, you can:

Tap to zoom in. Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in the picture. to zoom out. Tap Select Edit > Preferences and specify the picture orientation in widescreen. Tap a picture to display it over the whole screen. Tap it again to go back. Rotate Jog Dial to browse the pictures in widescreen and full screen views. Deleting, moving, and copying From the detail view of the picture you can:

Select Pictures > Delete picture to delete it. Select Pictures > Copy picture to copy the picture to a clipboard so that you can paste it into an item in another application. Select Pictures > Copy to to copy the picture to another folder

(internal or on a Memory Stick Duo). See Folders on page 27 for more information. Use the folders menu to move a picture to another folder

(internal or on a Memory Stick Duo). See Folders on page 27 for more information. 62 Pictures and Image editor To copy, delete or move multiple pictures In the thumbnail and list views, select the pictures you want to delete, move or copy, by selecting the checkboxes beside the picture names. Then select Pictures > the command you want. To delete, you can also use the Storage Manager found in the Control panel. For more information, refer to Folders on page 27. Image editor Edit Image editor Using the Image editor, you can edit your pictures. You can crop and resize the pictures. You can also rotate the pictures by 90 at a time. You can also write and draw on them, using different colors. To start the Image editor From a picture opened in Pictures, select Edit > Edit picture. Editing pictures Editing is controlled from the toolbar below the picture. Tapping the tool icons will bring up a palette with choices:

Zoom in Zoom out Select color Select one of the 16 colors Select pen Select one of the 4 pen sizes Select drawing tool Select one of the tools:

- Pen for freehand drawing

- Undo last action

- Undo all actions

- Add text

- Crop picture

- Resize picture Select rotation Select rotation counter-clockwise or clockwise You can save the edited image by selecting Image editor > Done. You can copy and paste by selecting Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste. You can only copy and paste whole pictures. If you make an error when editing the picture, you can undo the last by Edit > Undo. You can also undo all actions since the picture was saved, by selecting Edit > Undo all. Pictures and Image editor 63 To zoom in and out Tap Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in to zoom in. the picture. to zoom out. Tap Select Edit > Zoom, and select between Fit to screen and Full size. To draw on a picture 1. If desired, tap 2. If desired, tap 3. Tap 4. Draw with the stylus on the picture. and select the pen tool

. and select the desired color. and select the desired pen size. and select the text tool To add text to a picture 1. Tap 2. Tap the place where the text should be put on the picture. 3. Enter the text in the text field. 4. If required, change the text properties, using the choices on

. the text, style and colors tabs. 5. Tap Done to place the text on the picture. You can move the text on the picture by tapping and dragging on the text. You can return to the text editor by tapping on the text item. Note As soon as you tap outside the text item, the text is merged with the picture and cannot be edited or moved. To crop a picture 1. Tap and select the cropping tool

. A frame with 8 handles is placed around the picture. 2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define how the picture should be cropped. 3. Tap anywhere, except on the handles, to crop the picture. To resize a picture 1. Tap and select the resizing tool

. A frame with 4 handles is placed around the picture. 2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define the new size of the picture. When you lift the stylus, the picture will be resized. Sony Image Station You can exchange pictures between your P900 and Sony Image Station on the Web. Use the browser in your P900 to go to the relevant Web site and sign up:

For Europe: http://www.sonystyle-imaging.com For Japan: http://www.imagestation.jp For USA: http://www.imagestation.com 64 Pictures and Image editor Video player You can play video content that is recorded with the CommuniCorder, stored in your P900 or streamed. You can also play audio-only material encapsulated within an MPEG file or streamed. You can download video clips from a Web site or transfer from a PC via a cable, or from a Memory Stick Duo. You can also exchange video clips with other phones or PCs via infrared communication, Bluetooth wireless technology or multimedia messaging. You do not have to download a complete video clip to be able to view it. You can use the streaming function and view the video clip from the Web site where it is located. The video clip is played with only a short time delay. The video player supports files in the MPEG-4 file format, for example name.mp4. You can store video clips both internally and externally. You can also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27. To adjust the volume Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to decrease the volume. Video clips A video clip is a short video sequence. Playing video clips The Video player opens in the list view. In this view, you get an overview of all the MPEG-4 video clips in your P900. You can search for specific video clips, zoom the video clip names and sort them by name, date, or size. At the bottom of the screen, you can see how many video clips you have saved in your P900.

To view a video clip

. 1. Select 2. Select a video clip in the list. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume levels may damage hearing. While a video clip plays, tap the screen to display the video clip in widescreen. Tap the screen again to go back. Specify the screen orientation in Edit > Preferences > Display. Video player 65 To copy, delete or move multiple video clips In the list view, select the video clips you want to delete, move or copy, by selecting the checkboxes beside the picture names. Then select Video > the command you want. To delete you can also use the Storage manager located in the Control panel. For more information, refer to Folders on page 27. To sort the video clips Select Edit and choose how you want to sort the video clips in the current folder. To record a clip using the CommuniCorder Press the camera button CommuniCorder application. view. or select to activate the takes you back to the list Managing video clips The detail view is intended for managing one clip at a time. You can play and pause the clip by tapping

, and stop by tapping The slider under the video area shows the current play position within the clip. Tap and drag the slider to move to another position in the clip. and

. In this view you can send, rename, delete or move your video clips. Only the video clips saved in your P900 or on the Memory Stick Duo

(that is not streamed) can be handled in the detail view. To rename a video clip 1. Select Video > Rename clip. 2. Enter a video clip name >

Done. Two or more video clips cannot have the same name. Chat Edit Video Edit All Diving in the ocean Playing 0:09 Tip Use the Folder function to organize all your video clips. To copy the current video clip to another folder, select Video >

Copy to, then select a folder from the list. To view the video clip information Select Video > Info. To delete a video clip 1. Select the video clip you want to delete. 2. Select Video > Delete clip. 66 Video player Saving video clips When you play video clips you have received via email or multimedia messaging, or downloaded to your P900 from the Web, the viewer detail view is automatically launched. From the viewer detail view, you can then save the video clip to your P900. To save a video clip from another application 1. Select the video clip you want to save. 2. Select Video > Save clip. 3. Select the folder you want to save the video clip in > Save. Sending and receiving video clips You can send and receive video clips using Video > Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Streaming Streaming is a data transfer method making multimedia available in real time. You can, for example, listen to audio and watch video almost at the same time as it is sent. The data in the file is divided into small packets that are sent in a continuous flow, a stream.You can then begin viewing the file from the beginning as the rest of the packets are sent. The short delay at the start is to enable a small amount of data to be buffered. Your P900 can receive streaming multimedia. Applications Streaming applications can be classified into on-demand and live applications. Examples of on-demand applications are:

Streaming of music. Streaming of news (video and audio). Streaming of movie trailers. Streaming and download of video. Live streaming of music or video (broadcast). If you know the URL of the streaming service:

How to connect to a streaming service 1. Select Video > Open location. 2. Enter the URL of the streaming service, or select a service from the drop-down list. Video player 67 3. Tap Done. If you do not know the URL of the streaming service:

1. Open Internet and browse to the site where the service is. 2. Select the item you want to play, for example a video. The site server will download part of the video to the P900 buffer memory. This will take a short while. When the buffer memory is filled, the Video player will open the detail view, described above, and play the video seamlessly. Preferences When you view a video clip in full-screen mode, you can select the orientation of the picture To change the orientation of the picture in full-screen mode 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Display tab. 3. Tap Left handed or Right handed orientation > Done. When you view a video clip from a Web site, using the streaming function, a media buffer is used to provide a steady flow of data. Increasing the size of the media buffer may improve the playback of the video clip. To change the media buffer size 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Buffering tab. 68 3. Select Custom setting and move the slider left or right > Done. When you download a video clip to your P900, it is saved in the download cache memory. When this memory is full, you have to empty it to be able to download new video clips to your P900. To clear the download cache 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Buffering tab. 3. Select Clear cache > Done. When you view a video clip from a Web site, you may have to set the proxy settings. To change the proxy settings 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Proxy tab. If the proxy settings configured in the control panel are to be used, tap Automatic configuration. If manual settings are to be used, enter the relevant information. Video player Music player Your P900 has mobile music in the form of a stereo music player. With the music player you can listen to single music tracks or entire folders containing tracks. You can download tracks to your P900 from a PC, the Web or a Memory Stick Duo, and create different folders with tracks. Your P900 supports a number of different sound files, including the popular MP3 format. See Technical data on page 187 for more information on supported file types. You can store sound files both internally and on the Memory Stick Duo. You can also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27. When you receive a phone call while listening, playback will be paused. When you end the call, you must navigate back to the Music application to restart playing. Tip To listen to more music, you can store music on several Memory Stick Duos and carry them with you. to pause. Press it again to play. If you navigate to the standby screen while you play music, you can press If you launch another application, the music will still play. If this application requires dedicated audio, playback will be paused. Jog Dial control Rotate Jog Dial to select a sound track. Press it inward to play. Press it again to stop. To adjust the volume Rotate Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to decrease the volume. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume levels may damage hearing. Playing sound files You can play MP3 music both in Flip closed and in Flip open. In Flip closed, with Jog Dial, select select the track you want to play. Press commands.

, select Music player, and to find other Music player 69 Track-folder view This view is intended for playing entire folders of MP3 files. In the track folder view, you can Pause, and Stop the playback of the current folder, and see the duration of the track. Selecting a track and tapping Play, will play the selected track and all the following tracks in the folder. Use the slider to move forward and backward in the track. Select Music > Manage tracks to move to the file list view. Music Edit All Sony Ericsson 0:00/3:35 Aeroplane Beautiful Night Rooster Song for you Sony Ericsson theme Standing Still Loop and random With the loop function you can decide if you want to listen to the tracks in the current folder only once, or if you want to loop them until you manually stop the playback. Select the random function to play the tracks randomly. To loop a list Select Music > Loop. 70 To play a list randomly Select Music > Random. Managing sound files Music Edit All Aeroplane Beautiful Night Rooster Song for you Sony Ericsson theme Standing Still Stuck with You... Walk on File list view In the file list view, you can see how many tracks are in the current folder. Tapping a filename will open the detail view, and allow you to play and manage that file. To copy, delete or move multiple files, select the files you want to delete, move or copy, by selecting the checkboxes beside the filenames. Then select Music >

the command you want. To delete you can also use the Storage manager found in the Control panel. For more information, refer to Folders on page 27. Tap to move directly to the track folder view. 8 tracks (6806 KB) Music player

. and Detail view The detail view is intended for managing one file at a time. Tap a filename to open the detail view. You can also play and pause the file by tapping In the detail view you can move tracks between your different folders using the folder function, or rename or delete them. The detail view displays the name of the track, the artists name, the album title, the track number, the copyright year, the sound file type and the duration of the track. Note The amount of information displayed depends on how much information is available on the sound file. Move between the tracks in the current folder using the Filename:

Aeroplane Date and Size:

6:02pm, 21/06/04 2107KB Duration:

3:35 Music Edit Unfiled Aeroplane Artist:

Album:

and buttons. 0:00 To rename a track 1. Select Music > Rename track. 2. Enter a track name and tap Done. Two or more tracks cannot have the same name. To delete a track from the P900 1. Select Music > Delete track. 2. Select Yes. Viewer If you play sound tracks remotely, for example music on an Internet site, a view similar to the Detail view displays. The commands you find in this view are similar to those in the Detail view. Managing track folders In the track folder view, the Music player plays the MP3 files of the selected folder. (With one exception, the All folder. If you select this folder, all MP3 files in all music folders will be played.) Using the folder function you can create new folders for sound tracks. You can create folders on the Memory Stick Duo. You can also use several Memory Stick Duos for your music, for example. In any Music player view, you can create a new folder using the Edit Folders command in the Folder Menu. Then you move or copy your sound files to the new folder. You can add more folders with sounds as long as there is memory available. You can also sort the files using commands in the Edit menu. Music player 71 Note You can send WAV and AMR sound files in multimedia messages, and MP3 and AU sound files as attachments to multimedia messages. Preferences You can select whether you want all types of sound files to be displayed in the file list view, or if you want to display only a certain type of sound file. To select sound file types 1. Select Edit > Preferences from the file list view. 2. Check the boxes next to the sound files you want to include in the track folders and tap Done. Saving sound files When you receive sound files in other applications, such as email and multimedia messages, you activate the viewer in your P900. From the viewer, you can then save the sound file to your P900. To save a track from another application 1. Tap Save or select Music and tap Save. 2. Select the folder you want to save the track in and tap Save. Sending and receiving sound files You can send and receive sound files using Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. 72 Music player Internet Internet, the P900 browser, to:

You use Connect to the Internet to view and access Web and WAP pages. Receive and view Push messages from your WAP service provider. Download Java applications, images and audio. The browser can open Web pages that use Javascript or frames, but functions that use Javascript in the Web page will not work properly. You can save bookmarks to viewed pages, to be able to access them easily. You can also save pages in the P900 for offline viewing. The browser uses folders for categorizing information. The folders used are bookmarks, saved pages, signed documents, and Push messages. Push messages is a service that gives you notifications about, for example, weather forecasts, sport results, and stock quotes. The notification is sent to you as a message that contains a WAP link to the site with the information you subscribe to. Before you can use Internet, you need to set up an Internet account in the Control panel. If you intend to use certain WAP services, it might be necessary to set up a WAP account in the Control panel as well. See Getting started with Internet and Messaging on page 163. To start the browser Start the browser by:

pressing the Internet button. selecting selecting selecting a URL in another application. in the application picker. in the application launcher

. Note If required, you must enter your username and password to log into your Internet account. While opening a page, the P900 might not receive incoming calls. However, when the page is properly opened you can receive a call and the page will still be open. The application has two views:

Browser view The base view of the application, where you can Bookmarks view view Web and WAP pages. A list view where you can save shortcuts:

to Web and WAP sites on the Internet to locally stored pages to documents digitally signed by you. Internet 73 0:03 Using the browser view The P900 can display the Web page in normal view or full-screen view. Use the Internet button to change between the views. In full-screen view, press Jog Dial short forward to display a menu with the most frequently used commands. Chat Edit Internet Edit A B C Sony Ericsson D Sony Ericsson P900 F E A Internet menu. B Edit menu. C Go to the next page. D Go to the previous page. E Shift between the browser view and the bookmarks view. F Disconnect or get information about the connection. G Go to the home page. H Stop loading the page. J A secure connection is established. K Progress bar, shows the loading progress. Browser view options Internet menu Open page Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down list. K J H G Add to bookmarks Enter the name of the bookmark and select the folder to save it in. Save page Enter the name of the page and select the folder to save it in. Send as Send the current URL via text or multimedia message, email, Infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology. Find Enter text and search for the text in the page. Find next Search for the next occurrence of the search text. Scan text Go to the area populated with the greatest amount of text. Reload page Reload the page. Load all images Load all images of the page. Page information Show the page information. Bookmarks Open the bookmark view. Edit menu Cut Cut out the marked information from an input field. Copy Copy the marked information. Copy all Copy all information on the page. Paste Paste the copied text into the selected field. 74 Internet Full screen Expand the browser view. Zoom Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large. Preferences Set the preferences of the browser. Help View help on Internet. Internet button Full screen When you have opened an Internet page, press the Internet button to display the page in full screen. Normal browser view Press the Internet button again to go back. Handles on the screen The browser will outline a Web page as you are used to seeing it on your PC. Use the handles on the screen to scroll:

Scroll up and down Tap the handle to the right of the screen and drag it up or down. Scroll left and right Tap the handle at the bottom of the screen and drag it to the left or to the right. Jog Dial Scroll up and down When you have opened an Internet page, rotate Jog Dial to scroll up and down. Short forward In Normal view, change between the Internet and the Edit menus. In full screen view, show a menu with the most frequently used commands. Scan text function Press Jog Dial inward to scan the page for text. The screen will navigate to the area populated with the greatest amount of text. Repeat the operation to find the next most populated area. Context-sensitive menus The context-sensitive menu is opened when you keep the stylus pressed on a link or a picture. Text link and picture link Open link Open the active link. Link information Show information on the link. Add to bookmarks Add the active link URL to the bookmark list. Loaded picture (with or without link) Save image Save the picture in the P900. Copy image Copy the picture to the clipboard. View image View the picture adapted to the screen

(enlarged or reduced). Send image as Send the picture as text or multimedia message, email, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology. Not loaded picture (with or without link) Load image Load the picture. Voice call link Call Place a call according to the link. Internet 75 New SMS Send an SMS message according to the link. New MMS Send an MMS message according to the link. New contact Create a contact with the link information. Mail to link New email Send an email according to the link. New MMS Send an MMS message according to the link. New contact Create a contact with the link information. Icons within a page Picture not loaded (can be loaded manually). Damaged picture (not possible to load). Note If images are not loaded, select the picture icons or select Internet > Load all images. To open a specific Web page 1. Select Internet > Open page. 2. Enter the page URL or select a previously viewed page from the drop-down list. 3. Select Open. To navigate through recently opened pages 1. Select 2. Select to move back to previously viewed pages. to move forward again. To save a page for offline browsing 1. Select Internet > Save page. 2. Change the page name, if required, and select a folder to save it in. 3. Select Done. To create a bookmark to the open page 1. Select Internet > Add to bookmarks. 2. Change the bookmark name, if required, and select a folder to save it in. 3. Select Done. To download and upload files, for example, applications When you select a link to a downloadable file, for example, applications, images and so on, information on the file is displayed. Select Yes to start the download. When you select a link for uploading a file, a form for submitting the file is displayed. Select the file, then select Yes to start the upload. To view information on the open page 1. Select Internet > Page information. 2. Select the Content tab to view the page information. 76 Internet 3. Select the Connection tab to view information on the connection. 4. Select the Certificates button to view the information on:

Server User To disconnect from the Internet 1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD in the status bar. or GPRS

) 2. Select Disconnect from the popup menu 3. The dialog Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears. 4. Select Yes. WIM Access When the browser requires access to the WIM card, for example, when establishing a secure connection, you have to enter the correct PIN. For more information, please contact your service provider or IT department. Signing documents You have to enter the signing PIN each time a signing operation is going to be performed. User authentication request Whenever a user authentication is requested, you have the possibility either to select a certificate and confirm the user authentication, to select to continue anonymously or to cancel the connection. If Connect anonymously has been set, the browser will instead automatically try to connect anonymously. Chat Edit Internet Edit All Using the bookmark view A Folder menu. B Edit menu. C Internet menu. D Select an icon to view A B C D Search Internet My home page SonyEricsson News information on the bookmark. E Checked bookmarks can be deleted from the Internet menu. F Select the bookmark text to open the page. G Select to go to the home page. H Shift between browser and bookmarks views. Webmail Project home 711 time table CSS fonts E F G H Internet 77 Bookmark view options Internet menu Open page Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down list. New bookmark Enter the URL, the name of the bookmark and select the folder to save it in. Delete Delete the selected bookmark. Edit menu Edit Edit the selected bookmark. Sort on date / name Sort the entries. (Available for Push messages and Signed documents only.) Zoom Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large. Preferences Set the preferences of the browser. Help Open the help for Internet. Folders menu All Show all contacts in the list. Bookmarks Show all bookmarks. Saved pages Show all saved pages. Unfiled Show the bookmarks that are not in a folder. Edit folders Categorize your contacts into folders

(business, personal and so on). The contents in the Folders menu can change depending on the pages and bookmarks stored in the P900. Icons Bookmark Saved page Push message from the WAP service provider Signed document To open a bookmark 1. Select the bookmark text. 2. The bookmarked item is opened. To view bookmark information 1. Select the checkbox of the preferred bookmark. 2. Select Edit > Edit. Information on the bookmark is shown. From the information screen you can:

Edit the bookmark. Delete the bookmark. Send the bookmark as email, SMS message, Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared, or MMS message. To delete several bookmarks 1. Select the checkbox of the bookmarks to delete. 2. Select Internet > Delete. 3. Select Yes to confirm. 78 Internet Preferences The browser is initially set up to work, but you have to set up your own account. A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to use the Web configurator at www.SonyEricsson.com. See also Internet accounts on page 147 for more information. The easiest way to set up Internet and WAP accounts is to ask your Internet service provider to send you an auto setup message containing the required setup information. The accounts will then be set up automatically on your P900. To guarantee the integrity of the settings, a PIN may be used. For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular WAP account. See WAP accounts on page 156 for more information. Note Proxy settings for MMS messages, and for a WAP gateway should be set in the WAP account. Other proxy settings should be set in the Internet account. To set up the browser 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Perform the setup according to the following:

Basic settings Enter the URL for the page to be shown when the browser is started from the Internet button; either a page stored in the P900 or a page on the Internet. Select the WAP account to be used when the home page is loaded. The accounts are set up in the control panel. Select whether a new page should be displayed over the whole screen. Select whether you want to use a vertical scroll bar to scroll the pages up and down. Otherwise you can use Jog Dial. Select whether images should be loaded. If images are not loaded, the page will be loaded faster. Nonloaded images can be loaded manually when viewing the page. Select whether sounds should be played when the page is opened. Select whether animations should be played when the page is opened. Security settings Select whether you want to save signed documents. Select whether you want to connect without giving away your identity. Select whether you want to connect using the WIM card. Select whether you want to allow cookies. Internet 79 Advanced settings Select whether you want to be able to receive messages from your WAP service provider. Select whether you want to automatically open the URL in WAP Push messages. Select whether you want to remove out-of-date messages automatically. Select a sound that notifies you when a Push message arrives. Set the size of the cache memory. The cache is the part of the memory where viewed pages are stored. Stored pages will load faster when you visit them again. Select Clear history to empty the list of pages visited and cookies stored. Select Clear cache to empty the cache memory. 80 Internet Games There are two preinstalled games in your P900. Traditional Chess and the card game Solitaire. More games are available on the Multimedia for P900 CD in your original P900 box. You can also install games from other developers, see Installing applications on page 124. Chess You can play Chess against the P900, or against another P900 user via SMS. Please read the help texts for detailed information on how to set up and play Chess. To start a new game 1. Select Chess > New game to initiate a game. 2. Enter details as desired in the New game dialog. You can return to these details later. Name Give the game a name so you can return to it later if you have to interrupt it. Notes Write a note about the game. You play Choose to play white or black. Against Select the skill level of your opponent. Played Select whether you want to play locally against your P900 or against another P900 user. 3. Tap Play to start the game. To play Chess 1. Select the piece you want to move. The square where it is standing is now marked with a triangle. 2. Select the square you want to move the piece to, and the piece will move to it. Closing the Flip closes the game temporarily and saves the session status. Your opponent will be sent an end-of-game text message. Solitaire Solitaire is a card game played with a standard deck of 52 cards and up to 4 Jokers. The purpose of Solitaire is to remove all the cards from the piles to the layout card whilst scoring as many points as possible. Games 81 The game will either start with a new game or with the layout for an earlier, interrupted game. (The game data are saved on return to desktop, when the Flip is closed or when the battery is low.) 2. Select the card you want to move and it will be highlighted. 3. Select the card to which you would like to move the higlighted card. To restart the game during a game Select Solitaire > New game. To undo/redo a move Select Edit > Undo move / Redo move. Points are awarded for playing pile cards and bonus points are awarded for unbroken, ascending or descending runs of four or more rank cards. When you cannot play any more cards and cards still remain in the piles, the game is over. If all the pile cards are removed, bonus points are awarded, and the hand is won. You are then challenged to play a Hi/Low game to acquire more bonus points. After the challenge, the game continues and a new hand is dealt with one less Joker. Rules When the game starts, 35 cards are dealt from the deck into 7 piles of 5 cards. A further card is then dealt face up from the layout card. Cards can only be played from the bottom of the piles. To play a pile card, it must have a face value of one more or one less than the layout card. Aces are low and may not be played onto kings. Jokers can be played onto any card, and any card can be played onto a joker. Play Solitaire Solitaire is only available with the Flip open. 1. Select the icon for Solitaire. 82 Games BUSINESSMessaging With types of messages:

Messaging, you can create, send, and receive different SMS (Short Message Service) messages are text messages sent and received via the network operator's message center. When a text message has pictures, sounds, ringtones and animations inserted, it becomes an EMS (Enhanced Message Service). MMS (Multimedia Message Service) messages. A multimedia message can contain text, graphics, animations, photographic images, audio clips and ringtones. Email messages. Your P900s mail client supports POP3 and IMAP4 mail servers, MIME attachments and SMTP for sending mail. You also use Messaging to receive:

Area Information messages.These are text messages broadcast to all subscribers in a network area, for example, local road reports or local taxi phone numbers. (Area Information services are not available from all operators). BIO (Bearer-Independent Object) messages. There are different types of messages:

Setup (email, Internet, WAP accounts). Email notifications. Files for exchanging electronic business cards (vCard) and calendar information (vCal). Auto setup files for OTA (Over-The-Air) configuration. Beamed messages. These are files received via infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. Control panel > Connections >

The different types of messages are handled by separate messaging accounts. Select Messaging accounts to see the details of the messaging accounts on your P900. You can have any number of email accounts - a typical configuration will be one business and one personal account. When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for synchronized emails is automatically created on your P900. With the Flip closed, text and multimedia messages can be sent and received using Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced tasks, however, are best handled with the Flip open. Messaging 83 Before using Messaging Before you can send and receive any messages (except for SMS), you need to set up the necessary accounts. A simple way of setting up an Internet or email account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your P900. You can also use the Web configurator on www.SonyEricsson.com. Received auto-configuration messages are stored in the Auto setup inbox. See Getting started with Internet and Messaging on page 163. Folders in Messaging Messaging accounts can have the following folders: Inbox, Outbox, Draft and Sent. Inbox The Inbox contains received messages. You can reply to, forward, and delete messages, but not edit them. Outbox Outbox contains messages that are ready to be sent. If you are creating several emails, and not using GPRS, you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and send them all at the same time. To save an email message to the Outbox 1. After composing your message, select Send. 2. Select Save to outbox. Messages that you send from an email synchronization account are always saved to Outbox and sent from your PC after your next synchronization. Draft Draft contains messages that are not ready to be sent. To store a new message in Draft Create the message and exit without selecting Send. To move a message from the Outbox to Draft Open the Outbox message list and select Message > Move to Draft. Sent Sent contains messages you have sent from your P900. Tip Regularly delete old messages from your Sent folder, especially those with attachments, to clear storage space. 84 Messaging The accounts in Messaging When you open Messaging, a list of your accounts appears. The top items in the list, Create SMS, and Create MMS, are shortcuts for directly creating new text messages (SMS or EMS). An asterisk next to an account indicates that a message has arrived since you last opened the accounts inbox. Handling text messages A text message is sent via SMS (Short Message Service). It can contain up to 160 characters (70 characters if you use non-Latin characters). If you create a longer message, it will be sent as two

(or more) separate messages (concatenated), but usually received as one message. If you add pictures, sounds and other items to your message, it becomes an EMS message. Text messages can be sent to one or more people, and you can request a delivery report when your text messages have been delivered to the recipients. The delivery report arrives on your P900 as a text message. If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which was already located in the Outbox). To write and send a text message 1. In Messaging select Create SMS. (You can also select SMS >

tap Message > New.) 2. Enter the recipients number or select To and select recipient or recipients from your contact list and select Done. 3. Write your message. 4. Go to the address tab delivery report or not. 5. Tap Send. and specify whether you want a To add an EMS item to your text message Use the icons at the bottom of the screen to select the type of item you wish to add. Tap Tap to insert one of the smileys that appears. to insert a picture or an animation. The last used picture or animation appears. Tap More to get more animations to use. Tap New to draw a picture of your own. Tap to insert a sound. The last used sounds appear. Tap More to get more sounds to use. Tap Tap aa AA to write bold text. to change the size of the text you write. Messaging 85 To format the text in the message using EMS features 1. Highlight the text you want to format. 2. Tap Edit > Format text. 3. Tap General tab to change the Alignment and Font. 4. Tap Style tab to check the character style checkboxes: bold, italic, underline, or strikethrough. 5. Select Done. You can also use the icons aa and AA described above. To save a received EMS item 1. Tap the item. 2. Select Edit > Save object. Handling multimedia messages MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) messages can include real pictures, animations and sound, organized like a slide presentation with time-based playback control. Composing a multimedia message is like building a small slide presentation. A typical page will consist of a picture, some text and sound. Refer to Technical data, section MMS on page 189 for supported file types that you can add. You can take a picture with the CommuniCorder and send it as a multimedia message using the Send as command from Pictures. Multimedia messages can be sent to a phone or an email account. How a recipient receives an MMS you send depends on your MMS service and how the receiving phone complies with MMS specifications:

Compliant and conformant phones can receive pictures of size 160x120 pixels. Compliant and nonconformant phones can receive pictures of almost any size. Partly compliant phones can read the message on the Internet, using WAP. Noncompliant phones will receive an SMS notification. Incoming multimedia messages To play a received multimedia message Open the MMS inbox and select the new message. The first time a multimedia message is opened, it plays automatically. The next time you open the message, you can play it by pressing the Play Button (Flip open) or by selecting Play from the menu (Flip closed). 86 Messaging To forward an MMS 1. Open the message. 2. From the Message menu, select Forward. 3. On the phone number or email address. address tab, select To and enter the recipients 4. Select Send. To store a received MMS item, for example a picture 1. Open the message. 2. Select the picture you want to save. 3. Select Save picture or select Edit > Save picture. 4. Select the storage location. 5. Select Save. You can store items both internally and externally. You can also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27. Creating and sending multimedia messages To create a new multimedia message 1. In Messaging select Create MMS. (You can also select MMS

> Message > New. or open an existing message and select Message > New ). 2. From the Select template dialog, tap the name of the template you want and tap Select. The Blank template will open a blank message. 3. The first page of the new message is now displayed. Select an item from the menu that appears. Tap to open the menu if it does not open automatically. If you select Add scribble the Image editor presents a white background onto which manual graphics can be added. This includes controls for pen, crop, color, scale, rotate and pen width. 4. Tap again to add text, audio or voice to the page. Tap the page to return to it. Chat Edit Message Edit Draft 1/1 2 5. Tap if you want to change the time this page should be shown. The default time is 5 seconds. 6. Select Edit > background color to give the message a background color. 7. Tap to add a new page to the multimedia message in which you can insert items. 8. Select Edit > Page order to change the page order in the message. Add image Add scribble Add text Add audio Add voice Paste Send Messaging 87 To enter the recipients phone number 1. Select the 2. Select To and select the recipient from Contacts. address tab. or:

Select the line beside To and enter the recipients phone number or email address. To insert an attachment 1. While creating your multimedia message, select the attachment tab, select Add. 2. Select the type of attachment you want to add. 3. Select the attachment. To send the multimedia message Tap Send. Preferences to a multimedia message Select Edit > Preferences to set the preferences to a multimedia message. The following settings are available:

Hide number Prevent your phone number from being displayed on the recipients phone. Read report Request a receipt when the recipient has open your message. Delivery report Request a receipt when the message has been delivered to the recipients phone. Editing multimedia messages Here you can see the first page with an inserted picture. Chat Edit Message Edit Draft To delete, replace or edit an inserted item Select the inserted item and select an action. While editing an image you can add scribble, resize, crop or rotate your image. To undo your changes, select Edit >

Undo all. Note If you have accepted changes by selecting Done, you will not be able to undo them. 1/1 5 Edit image Edit time Delete Copy Send To edit item time For each item in a page, it is possible to set the time when the item appears and how long it is displayed or played. 1. Select the item so it is highlighted 2. Select Edit time 88 Messaging 3. Set the Start time, which is the number of seconds before the item appears after the start of the page. The default is 0, meaning show or play immediately. 4. The default Duration is for the item to continue for the remaining duration of the page. To change this, uncheck Page time and change the duration to the required value in seconds. Start time + duration cannot exceed total page time.

, or select Edit > Page time to see the time You can also tap settings for all items in a page. Tap the time bar to adjust the time settings for each item. To add or delete a template To make a template from a message, select Save as template, give the template a name, and tap Done. To delete a template, tap the name of the template you want in the Select template dialog and tap Delete. To set the download method for receiving multimedia messages, manual or automatic Control panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >

In MMS > Automatic. Off means that only headers will be downloaded and can be viewed. Home only means the same as for On below, but is only valid in your home country. On means that the multimedia message is downloaded and can be read like any other message. There is no intermediate step. Handling emails Writing emails To write a new email Select an email account and select Message > New. If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which was already located in the Outbox). To mark an email as urgent On the address tab, select High in the Priority list. To enter addresses from Contacts when writing an email 1. Select To:

2. In the Select contact dialog select the checkbox for each entry you want to send the email to. 3. Select Done. Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:

enter a comma between each address. Messaging 89 Sending email To send an email message Select Send > Send immediately. If your P900 is connected to the Internet when you send an email, it will be sent immediately, and your P900 will remain connected to the Internet. If not, your P900 will connect to the Internet and then send the email. Tip If you are creating several emails, and not using GPRS, you can reduce the connection time by saving them to the Outbox and then connecting and sending them all at the same time. To save an email message and send it later Select Send > Save to Outbox. To move an email message from Outbox to Draft In your list of Outbox messages, tap to the left of the email (a tick appears), and select Message > Move to draft. If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically be stored in the Draft folder (unless it was created in the Outbox). Adding attachments To attach an entry to an email message 1. On the attachment tab, select Add. 2. Select the type of attachment you want to add, and select the item. Send as email You can send the entry you are viewing as an attachment to a new email from the following applications:

Music player, Contacts, Calendar, Viewer, Jotter, Internet, Sound recorder, and Video, Tasks, Pictures. To attach a Calendar entry to an email message 1. Open the entry in Calendar and select Calendar > Send As. 2. Select Email > Done. 3. Complete the email message and select Send. To attach a Contact to an email message 1. Open the contact details for the contact you wish to send and select Contacts > Send as. 2. Select Email > Done. 3. Complete the email message and select Send. Receiving email Emails must be retrieved from the email server on the Internet or at your office. This can be done manually using the Get & send function or automatically by requesting the P900 to check for new email at certain times. When you forward an email, you can choose whether or not to forward the attachment. Large attachments increase the size of an email and consequently the connection time needed to send it. 90 Messaging Receiving attachments Any attachments to an email message are displayed on the tab. The icon next to an attachment in the list identifies the type of attachment. To view an attachment you need a viewer for that type of file.Your P900 comes with preinstalled viewers for Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files. More viewers are available on the Multimedia for P900 CD. tab. To save an attachment, for example a picture 1. Open the email message and select the 2. Tap the attachment, which opens the Pictures application. 3. Select Pictures > Save. 4. Select the location where you want to store the message. 5. Select Save. You can store items both internally and externally. You can also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27. Reply with history If messages is set up to reply with history, the original message is included when you reply to it, see Messaging accounts on page 151. Downloading You can choose not to download large emails and receive just a header instead. A header contains the subject line, senders details, and date, but not the full message. To specify a size limit for email, above which you only receive a header 1. Select Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >

Email (select the email account) > Edit. 2. Select Inbox. 3. Select an option from the Download list. In your list of messages, headers are denoted by

. To download the full message 1. In your list of messages, select the header. 2. Select Get & Send. To download a series of messages 1. In your list of messages, select the checkbox to the left of each entry (a checkmark appears). 2. Select Get & Send. Note If you delete a header, or a whole message, the message will no longer be visible in your message list. Messaging 91 Downloading emails automatically You can schedule your email messages to be downloaded automatically at certain times. To download your emails automatically 1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >

Email. 2. Select the required email account and select Edit. 3. Select Inbox > Schedule. 4. Set the time or interval for the scheduled download and select Done. Disconnecting and connecting If your P900 is already connected to the Internet when you send an email, it will remain connected after sending it. If your P900 is not connected before sending an email, it will connect and send the message. Note You can send text messages when connected to the Internet. If your connection is CSD or HSCSD, it must be disconnected before you can make or receive a phone call. If your connection is GPRS, it can be suspended to enable a phone call to be made or received. You may need to repeat the data activity (Web page retrieval, get email) after the call has ended. will be displayed next to the email If your P900 cannot connect to the email account, automatic download will fail, and account. A scheduled download will fail if your P900 is engaged in a voice call. It may fail if it is connected to another ISP, that is, through a different Internet account than specified for the email account. If email messages are not downloaded because a scheduled download fails, they will be downloaded during the next successful connection. More about messaging Finding messages In both the list of accounts and list of messages, Find searches through the subject lines, senders details, the text of the message, and dates. In an open message, Find searches through the text of the message and highlights the text it finds. You can only search through email messages that have been fully downloaded. 92 Messaging Get and send To get and send messages for a specific account 1. Select 2. Select the desired account (MMS or email, for example). 3. Select Get&send. Messaging. To get and send messages for all your accounts 1. Select 2. Select Message > Get&send. Any unsent messages in your Messaging. Outbox will now be sent, and new messages not yet downloaded will be downloaded to your P900. Note If the email account is set up to access the mail server through a Secure access connection (see Secure tokens on page 160), you must have the Flip open when you use Get&send. If the Flip is closed, you will see an error message. Saving contact details When you receive a message, you can save the contact details of the person who sent you the message. To save the senders details On the messages address tab, select From. Note If you save an address from an email synchronized from your company PC, the corporate version of the address, rather than the full Internet email address, will be saved to Contacts. If the corporate version of the address is not an Internet address

(for example, an X.400 address, or just the sender's name), you can use it to send emails from your synchronized account, but you cannot use it in emails that you send directly from your P900. Connecting and disconnecting from the Internet To disconnect from the Internet 1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD on the status bar. or GPRS

) 2. Select Disconnect from the popup menu 3. The dialog Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears. 4. Select Yes. If your service provider or network is unavailable Sometimes a message cannot be sent because your P900 cannot connect to a network. Please check that the Messaging Account and Internet Account information in the Control Panel is correct. Messaging 93 the availability of area information services and area information channel numbering. See Area tab on page 155 for more information. If you have both GPRS and Dialup Internet accounts, try sending the email message using an account of the other type. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network and Dialup Internet accounts use the GSM network. Synchronized emails When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for synchronized email messages is automatically created on your P900 and indicated by

. You can have more than one account for synchronized emails. If you send an email as PC mail, the mail will be sent via the PC when you have synchronized your P900 with the PC. If you set up a POP or IMAP account which accesses the same mail server, the two accounts will contain the same messages. Note that there is no connection between the accounts; the copies in each account are separate. Area information Area information messages are text messages that are sent to all subscribers in a certain network area, for example, a local traffic report. When you receive an area information message, the message automatically appears on the screen. When you dismiss the information, it will be stored in the Area info Inbox until it is replaced by a new message received on the same channel. Please consult your service provider for more information about 94 Messaging Contacts Contacts is like an address book, in which you can store names, phone numbers, email addresses and other useful information, including photographs. The information stored in the SIM is also accessible. SIM entries can be copied to Contacts and Contacts entries can be copied to the SIM. Some SIM cards have Information numbers and Service numbers stored on the SIM card by the operator. These numbers are useful for service and information, and are accessible from the SIM within Contacts. You can synchronize the contents in Contacts with one of the PIM applications in your PC supported by the P900. See Synchronization and backup on page 132. Using Contacts with the Flip closed With the Flip closed, you can make calls and send text or multimedia messages. Contacts has two views when the Flip is closed:

List view An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the starting point for finding a contact. Detail view The details for a contact. Menus In both list view and detail view, you can use some of the P900s contact functions. The options vary depending on the situation. to access Menu options in list view SIM Display the contacts of the SIM card. Send owner card Send your owner card (See Making an owner card on page 100) via infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. Find Search for a specific contact. Undo delete Restore the last deleted contact. Will appear only if there is something to undo.

# Applications Access the application list view. Menu options in detail view Menu options in detail view: (availability depends on the type of contact detail, for example phone number, that is highlighted.) Send MMS Send a multimedia message to the active contact Send SMS Send a text message to the active contact. Call Call the active contact. Contacts 95 Send as Send the active contact using infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. Delete contact Delete the active contact.

# Applications Will access the application list view. Menu options in SIM View all Switch to Contacts list. Service numbers Display the service numbers on the SIM card. This option is only displayed if there are service numbers stored on the SIM card. Information numbers As for service numbers above. Find Search for a specific contact.

# Applications Will access the application list view. Selecting a contact with the Flip closed To select a contact 1. Select

. 2. Then either:

Scroll down to the desired contact. Press a number key. The first contact corresponding to the first letter of the key appears. To search further, continue to enter the letters with the keys. Select Find from the menu and search for the contact. 3. Select a contact and press the Jog Dial or press to open the detail view for a contact. To return to the list view, press Note To make a call to a contact in the SIM, select SIM from the options menu. If there are service numbers or information numbers stored on the SIM card, you can also access them. To make a call 1. Select a phone number. 2. Press the Jog Dial or press or

. 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Call from the options menu. To send a text message 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Send SMS from the options menu. To send a multimedia message 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Send MMS from the options menu. 96 Contacts To add a contact You can create a new contact using information from a recently received voice call or message. See also Add to contacts on page 51. 1. Select Yes when asked to add to contacts. 2. Enter contact name and edit the number, if required. To delete a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Delete contact from the options menu. To restore a deleted contact, select Undo delete from the options menu. Using Contacts with the Flip open Open the Flip and tap launcher Contacts has three views when the Flip is open:

List view to open Contacts. An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the starting point for finding a contact. or select Contacts in the Application Detail view The details for a contact. Edit view Contact details, displayed in a way that allows you to add and change the information. Tabs at the bottom of the list view provide a fast way to locate information. To highlight the first entry that begins with the first letter on a tab, select the tab once. To highlight the first entry that begins with the next letter on the tab, select the tab again, and again for the third letter on the tab. abc def ghi jkl mno pqr stu v-z Making a call with the Flip open To open Contacts Tap or select Contacts in the Application launcher

. To make a call 1. If required, change folder from the Folders menu. 2. Scroll down to the desired contact. If the contact list is long, first select a tab at the bottom of the view. 3. Select the contact to display the contact details. 4. Depending on what you want to do, select according to the following:

Select Select or the phone number to make a call. or or the email address to send an email. Contacts 97 Select Select Select or the URL to open a Web page. to send a multimedia message. to send a text message. Using service and information numbers To call an Information number or Service number on the SIM card 1. Select SIM in the folders menu. 2. Select Contacts > Information numbers / Service numbers and select a phone number or select a subcategory and then a phone number. 3. Select Call. Creating and editing contacts You can sort the contacts according to first name, last name or company. The contact entries can also be filtered by folder, such as Business or Personal. To create a new contact 1. Select Contacts > New. 2. Enter the desired information. When applicable, select from the drop-down menus. To add a field to a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Select Edit > Add field. 4. Select the field to be added from the drop-down list. 5. Select Add. To add a DTMF tone sequence 1. Select a field and set it to Phone (h). Add a new field if necessary. 2. Enter a p and then the tone digits. Enter a p to insert a pause. It is necessary to start the tone sequence with a p so the phone recognizes it as a tone sequence. To send a DTMF tone sequence during a call 1. During a call, open the contacts detail view. 2. Tap Read more about DTMF tones in Controlling tone-based services on page 47. at the tone sequence. To add a voice dial command Contacts with a voice dial command are shown in Voice commands in the folders menu. 1. Select 2. Select a number. at the bottom of the screen. 98 Contacts 3. Tap the Record button and record a voice command after the tone. 4. Tap Play to check the quality of the recording. To remove a voice command, select the Del button. To add a note to a contact 1. Select 2. Enter the text. 3. If you do not want the note to be included when you send,

. beam, or synchronize the contact, select the Private checkbox. and to preview the sound. 2. If required, change folder. 3. Select the required sound. 4. Tap 5. Tap Select to set this sound for the contact. Note The selected ringtone will only be played if the network provides a CLI (Caller Line Identification) to enable the contact to be identified, otherwise the Default Melody will be played. Note If the ring melody selected for this contact is later deleted or moved, the Default Melody will be played. To add a photo or other picture to a contact 1. Select the photo view tab 2. Tap the picture space. 3. If required, change folder. 4. Select the picture to use. 5. Tap the Select button. To change a picture, select the picture and select Replace image. To remove a picture, select the picture and select Delete image. To personalize the ringtone for a contact Contacts with a personalized ringtone are shown in Personal ring type in the folders menu. 1. Against Ringtone, select Find sound from the drop-down menu. To change the details of a contact 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact, or tap the tab. 3. Change the desired information. When applicable, select from the drop-down menus. To delete a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Contacts > Delete contact. To create or edit a contact on the SIM card 1. Select SIM from the Folders menu. 2. Create or edit the contact as described above. All options are, however, not available for the SIM card contacts. Contacts 99 Managing contacts You can use Contacts manager to move contacts between the folders, send contacts as a Vcard to another device, or to delete them. You can also send or delete contacts on the SIM card with the Contacts manager. See Sending and receiving items on page 29 for information about how to receive contacts from another device. To move, send or delete a contact 1. Select Contacts > Contacts manager. 2. Select the contacts you want to manage.

(If required, change the folder from the Folders menu. Selecting All will show all the contacts from all the folders except the SIM. Clicking the Select all checkbox will select all the contacts in the current folder.) 3. Select Send / Move / Delete. 4. Follow the instructions, for example, select a folder or a sending method. 5. Tap Done or Yes to confirm the action. To search for an entry containing specific text 1. Select Contacts > Find. 2. Enter the text string you wish to search for. 3. Select either In all fields or In Names & Company and tap Find. 4. When the search is complete, all results will be displayed. Note Searching is not case-sensitive and you do not have to enter an entire word to locate a matching entry. Copying contacts to and from the SIM card You can also copy information between the contacts list and the SIM card. To copy contacts from the SIM card 1. Select SIM in the folders menu to the right in the menu bar. 2. Select Edit > Copy all to Contacts for copying all SIM entries or Tap a SIM entry to open it and select Edit > Copy to Contacts to copy the selected SIM entry. To copy contacts to the SIM card 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Copy to SIM card. 3. If the contact has multiple phone numbers, select the number to copy. 4. Select Done. Making an owner card You can create an electronic business card, containing your contact details, including notes and a photo. You can then send this card to another device. 100 Contacts 3. If you want a phone number to be shown next to the name in list view, select Show preferred phone number. If no preferred number has been set up for the contact, the first phone number will be used. 4. Select Done. To change the preferred phone number 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Select Edit > Show in list. 4. Select the number to be shown from the list. 5. Tap Done. Note If no number appears, ensure that Show preferred phone number is checked in preferences. To create your owner card 1. Select Contacts > New and enter your details. 2. Select Contacts > Set as owner card. Tip You can also create an owner card by viewing the detail view of a contact and selecting the menu option Set as owner card. To send your owner card 1. Open the list view, then select Contacts > Send owner card. 2. Send the card using Send as. Read more about sending items in Sending and receiving items on page 29. To view or edit your owner card Select Contacts > View owner card. Preferences Contacts tab To sort the contact list and show the preferred phone number 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the desired sorting option (first name, last name or company) and tap Done. Contacts 101 Calendar The Calendar function helps you keep track of appointments and events, and you can also set reminder alarms for the entries. A reminder is denoted by a

. Different views You can see your Calendar entries in three views with the Flip open: Day, Week and Month. With the Flip closed, you will see the Day view. to display the Day view. to display the Week view. to display the Month view. to navigate to the present day on the displayed view. To change view in Flip open Tap Tap Tap Tap If you tap an entry in week view, the subject and time for that entry are shown. To navigate backward or forward in the current view Tap the left and right arrows on the button bar at the bottom of the screen. You can also rotate the Jog Dial. To navigate to a specific date in the current view Tap the day, week or month heading at the top of the display to show a calendar popup in which you can select a specific date. Creating calendar entries To create a new calendar entry 1. Select Calendar > New and enter a short description of the entry. This is the description you see in the calendar. 2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) on the menu bar and select a folder to store the entry in. 3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail page. Type - Specify if the entry is an appointment, reminder or all-day event. Date - Select the date to get a calendar where you can set a date for the entry. Time - Set start and end time for the entry. Location - Specify a location or select a location you have used before. Alarm - Select the checkbox if you want your P900 to alert you about the entry with a sound. Select the time and date that appears for your settings. Repeat - Specify if you want to repeat the entry or not. Read more about this below. 102 Calendar Private - Select the checkbox to prevent the item from being viewed by others than yourself if you synchronize your calendar with, for example, your PC. 4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry. 5. Select You should delete old entries regularly to free up memory. to save and close the entry. To create recurring entries 1. When the entry is open, select Repeat. Set repeating to Daily, Weekly, Monthly by date, Monthly by day, Yearly by date or Yearly by day. Interval - Specify how often the event will happen, for example, by selecting Weekly and Interval 2 means that the event will recur every two weeks on the specified day. Forever/Until - Set the time limit for the alarm or select forever. 2. Select days - Weekly repeated events can be set to occur twice or more in one week. For example, eating lunch with a friend Tuesday and Friday every week. Note You cannot repeat All-Day Events To edit an entry 1. Open the entry by tapping it on the calendar. 2. Make the changes according to the instructions above. Managing calendar entries To find a certain entry 1. Select Calendar > Find. 2. Enter a search word on the menu that appears. 3. Select where to search (Everywhere, Future, Past). 4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed. 5. Select an entry on the result list to open it. To delete an entry Open the entry and select Calendar > Delete entry. A deleted entry may be restored with Edit > Undo delete. To delete all entries in a period of time 1. Select Calendar > Delete entries. 2. Select the time period and select Done. All entries from that time period are deleted from the Calendar. Note Repeated entries will not be deleted. To copy, cut or paste an entry 1. Open the entry. 2. Select Edit > Copy entry/ Cut entry. 3. Go to the day where you want to place the entry. 4. Select Paste entry. Calendar 103 To move a Calendar item to Tasks 1. Open the entry and select Calendar > Move to Tasks. 2. The entry is moved, not copied. If you move an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also sound in Tasks. To cut or copy Calendar entries to the Tasks application 1. Open the entry and select Edit > Cut entry or Copy entry. 2. Open Tasks. 3. Select Edit > Paste entry. Sending and receiving calendar entries You can send and receive calendar entries using Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Preferences You can customize the calendar views and alarm settings to suit your own needs. To customize the calendar view, General tab 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the General tab, and fill in the required details. To customize the alarm settings 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Alarm tab. Now, you can change the Alarm precedes event by setting - the length of time before an entry that the alarm goes off. To assign colors to your entries using the folders 1. In Calendar, select the folders menu to the right on the menu bar and select Edit folders. 2. Select a folder and select Edit or create a new folder by selecting Add. 3. Select the color box and select color for that folder and select Done. Entries in a folder with a specific color appear in that color in Day and Week views (but not in Month view) so that you can see the pattern of events in your diary. Reminders appear as whatever the folder color. Saving changes If you leave Calendar while editing an entry, your changes are saved automatically. 104 Calendar Tasks With the Tasks function, you can make a list of things you need to do. The folders help you to separate different types of activities. You can move entries between Tasks and the Calendar, which is useful when you come to schedule a Tasks entry. You can also send an entry via text message, infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology, multimedia message or email. Creating task entries The Tasks list shows a short description of the task. Select a task to see its full information. A task entry consists of two pages. One detail page where you set the properties for the task, and one page where you can add notes. To create a new task entry 1. Select Tasks > New and enter a short description of the task. This is the description you see in the task list. 2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) on the menu bar and select a folder to store the task in. 3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail page. Completed Select the checkbox when the task is done.This can also be done directly in the Tasks list. Priority Set a priority for the task. You can sort the tasks by priority. Due date Select the checkbox to set a deadline for the task. Select the date that appears to get a calendar where you can set a due date. Alarm Select the checkbox if you want your P900 to alert you about the task. Select the time and date that appears for your settings. Private Select the checkbox to prevent the task from being visible by others, when synchronized with shared calendars or tasks in other devices, for example your PC. 4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry. 5. Select Note Delete will delete the whole task entry. to save and close the task. To edit an entry 1. Open the entry by tapping it in the Tasks list. 2. Make the changes according to the instructions above. Tasks 105 Managing task entries To open an existing entry Select the entry in the Tasks list. To mark an entry as completed Select the checkbox to the left of the entry in the Tasks list. To sort the entries Select Edit > Sort on priority or Sort on date. To find a certain entry 1. Select Tasks > Find. 2. Enter a search word. 3. Select the folder to search in or use the default value All folders. 4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed. 5. Select an entry on the result list to open it. To make a copy of an entry or paste an entry 1. Open a task and select Edit > Copy entry. 2. In list view, select Edit > Paste entry. To delete an entry Open the entry in the Tasks list and then select Delete. To restore a deleted entry Select Edit > Undo delete. To delete all completed entries In your Tasks list, select Tasks > Delete completed. Note When you delete All Completed Entries, they are deleted permanently and cannot be restored. Moving task entries To move an entry to the Calendar Open the entry and select Tasks > Move to Calendar. The entry is moved, not copied. To copy a task entry to Calendar 1. Open the entry and select Edit > Copy entry. 2. Open Calendar. 3. Enter the day you wish the task to appear. 4. Select Edit > Paste entry in Calendar. Note If you move or copy an entry to the Calendar, it will lose the priority it was assigned in Tasks. 106 Tasks If you do not set a due date for the tasks entry, the current date will be used for the new Calendar entry. If you move or copy an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also be moved to the Calendar. Sending and receiving task entries You can send and receive task entries using Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Preferences Select Edit > Preferences to alter the settings. The following settings are available. Display due dates Select whether or not to display them in the Tasks list. Display completed Select whether or not to display them in the Tasks list. This will not delete the completed tasks. Tasks 107 Jotter The Jotter works as a notepad where you can write notes and draw pictures. The folders help you to separate different types of notes. A Jotter entry consists of two pages. One text page and one drawing page. With the Flip closed, you can read and edit your notes, but you cannot view or edit pictures. When opening Jotter you see a list of entered notes, with the first words of each text note. Select a note to see its full information or edit it. Creating and editing notes To create a new note 1. Open Jotter and select Jotter >New. The new note automatically starts as a text note. Select get bold text and to create a bulleted list. to A 2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) on the menu bar and select a folder to store the jotter in. 3. Select the drawing page tab to draw a sketch for this note. 4. Select to save and close the note. To edit a note while working with it For text, select Edit > Revert. The text returns to its original state. All changes are lost. For sketches, select Edit > Undo. This choice removes your last pen stroke. If you change your mind, select Edit > Redo. To create a new note from text or sketches copied from another application Open the list of notes and select Edit > Paste. Note If you paste a sketch over an existing sketch, the existing sketch is deleted. Create a note with the Flip closed (text only) 1. Select Applications >Jotter with the Flip closed. 2. If you have previous notes stored, these are now listed. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it. if you want to create a new note. Select New. 3. Press Insert your text by using the keypad. Edit a note with the Flip closed 1. Select Applications >Jotter with the Flip closed. 2. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it. 3. Press

. Select Edit. Insert your text using the keypad. 108 Jotter Jotter Edit Unfiled Drawing pictures You can draw with different nib widths and colors. The main window is the paper where you may draw with your stylus in the same way as you draw with an ordinary pen. Select Select virtual nib. Select eraser. Tap the eraser again to reactivate the pen. All jotter files (both text and drawings) are automatically stored in the P900. The list view is presented to you as soon as you start the Jotter application. to change color. to change the to activate the Managing notes To delete a note 1. Select the note in the notes list. The note opens. 2. Select Jotter > Delete note. Sending and receiving notes You can send and receive notes using Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Note Selecting Send as SMS sends the text only. Jotter 109 TOOLSSound recorder In Sound recorder, you can record and listen to your own sound recordings. You can also send your recordings to other devices via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, email or multimedia message, and use a sound recording as a ringtone. Each memo is identified with the date and time it was recorded and its position in the list of sound recordings. Making sound recordings To record and save a sound recording 1. Select

> New.

A new sound recording is created. and start recording after the beep. to finish the recording. 2. Select 3. Select The new sound recording is automatically saved in the list of sound recordings with the current date and time. To append to a previous sound recording 1. Select the required recording. 2. Select 3. Select and start recording after the beep. to finish the recording. Key functions To... Select... start recording a sound. listen to the current sound recording. stop the current sound recording. go to the previous sound recording in the list. go to the next sound recording in the list. To delete a sound recording 1. Select a sound recording you want to delete. 2. Select Delete > Yes. 110 Sound recorder Using sound recordings as ringtones You can set a sound recording as a ringtone.Your sound recordings appear in the list of sounds that can be selected as ringtones. They take the form voicenote and a number, for example voicenote1470. To set a sound recording as ringtone, see Sounds and alerts on page 141. Sending sound recordings You can send Sound recorder recordings via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, email or multimedia message. To send a sound recording 1. Select Sound recorder > Send as. 2. Select how you want to send the sound recording. See To send an item using Send as on page 29 for more information. Note All other sound media on your P900 is handled via the Music player application. You can send sound items from Music player and all received sound items are played using Music player. Sound recorder 111 Calculator The Calculator is a standard 12-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages. It also has a memory function.

To use the calculator 1. Select

. 2. Enter the calculations by tapping the digits. All calculations, except percentage calculations, are performed as they are entered, for example: 5+5x5=50, not 30. Percentage calculations are performed backward. To calculate, for example, 10% of 50, enter 50x10%. The result is displayed when you tap the %-key. Key functions mr Tap once to retrieve a value from the memory and enter it into the screen. Tap twice to clear the memory. Tap once to store an entered value in the memory. If you already have entered a value in the memory, tap once to add the value on the screen to the value in the memory. Tap once to subtract the entered value from the value in the memory. The memory is adjusted but not displayed. Tap once to delete the last digit you entered. Tap once to reset the screen to 0. m+

m-

C You can copy and paste values to and from other applications by selecting Calculator > Copy or Paste. Values stored in the memory are retained while using other applications. 112 Calculator Time The time and date are always displayed on the Flip closed standby screen. You can customize the display of times and dates throughout your P900. You can set your current location and another location of your choice. It is also possible to set three different alarms. Setting time and date To set the current time and date 1. Select 2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the

. current time and date settings. 3. Tap the Date box, then use the arrows to set the current year and month. Then select the current day. 4. Tap Summertime, then select the checkbox next to the zone that currently has summertime and tap Done. This is only required if you are currently in a country/region with summertime. 5. Tap the time box, then tap the upper half of the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower half to decrease the number. Use the am/pm box to togle between am and pm. (This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.) Confirm by tapping outside the time picker. 6. Select Done. Format You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen, and if you want to use the 12- or 24-hour time format. To set the time and date display format 1. Select 2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the

. current time and date settings. 3. Select Format. 4. Tap the Date Format box and select a format. 5. Tap the Date Separator box and select a separator. 6. Select a Time format. 7. Tap the Time separator box and select a separator. 8. Select Done. Time 113 Specifying workdays You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also specify the first day of your week to customize the display of both Week and Month views in Calendar. To specify your workdays 1. Select 2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the

. current time and date settings. 3. Select Workdays. 4. Select the checkboxes next to the days you normally work. 5. Select First day of week and select a day. 6. Tap Done. Setting locations Specify the country/region and city you are currently in. The city you select will be displayed next to the clock in Time. If you are away from home, for example traveling in another country/region, it can be useful to know what the time is in your home country/region as well as the country/region you are in. The city you select as Other City will be displayed below the clock in Time. To set the locations 1. Select

. 2. Tap Time > Set location. 3. Tap the Current Country/Region box and select the country/

region where you are located at that moment. 4. Tap the Current City box and select the city you are in at that moment. If the city you are in is not listed, select the city closest to you. 5. Tap the Other Country/Region box and choose a country/

region. 6. Tap the Other City box and choose a city. 7. Tap Done. Setting number formats You can choose how you want the measurements and numbers in your P900 to be displayed in all your applications. Distances can be displayed using the imperial or metric system, and different punctuation marks can be used as separators. To set the number details 1. Select 2. Select Time > Set location. 3. Select Numbers.

. 114 Time 4. Choose separators and symbol positions from the drop-down lists. You can tap the keyboard icon to find currency symbols. 5. Tap Done. Setting alarms You can set up to three different alarms on your P900. You can choose to activate one of the preset alarms, or set a new alarm with your own definitions. You can choose to set a silent alarm, where only a message is displayed when it goes off, or you can set an audible alert. Alarms requires that the P900 is turned on. If you want to get alarms in an environment where radio transmitters are not permitted, you can set the P900 to flight mode, see Flight mode on page 47. Note If you have connected a stereo headset to the P900, the alarm will only be heard in the headset. To activate an existing alarm Select the checkbox in the alarm slot. status bar on the screen. is displayed on the To set a new alarm

. 1. Select

Time 2. Select one of the alarm slots. 3. Select Time and choose at what time you want the alarm to go off. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker. 4. Select When and choose how often you want the alarm to go off:

Once The alarm will go off once only, at a time more than 24 hours from now but within the next eight days. Next 24 hours Within the next 24 hours. Daily Every day at the specified time. Weekly Every week at the specified time. Workdays Every workday at the specified time. 5. Select Alarm sound and select a sound. 6. Select Message and select a preset message or write a new one. 7. Tap Done. 8. Ensure that the checkbox next to the alarm is selected. When the alarm goes off, select Snooze to postpone the alarm for five minutes or Silence to turn off the alarm sound. To turn off the alarm completely, tap Done. 115 Viewer With Viewer, you can view Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint documents as well as Adobe Acrobat (PDF) documents. Support for additional file types can be installed from the Multimedia for P900 CD. When the Flip is open Viewer has two views:

List view An alphabetical list of files, for selecting a file to view. Detail view The contents of a file, for viewing and manipulating the file. Viewer is also started automatically when selecting and opening attachments to messages. The required view is selected based on the type of attachment. To save documents to another location (internal or on the Memory Stick Duo), you use folders; see Folders on page 27. The functions available vary according to the document type. General functions are similar between the document types and are therefore described first. Common viewer functions To open a document from an email or Web page Select the document link. The document viewer is started, showing the detail view of the document. To save the document in the P900 1. Select Document > Save from the menu. 2. Select where to save the document and select Save. To open a document from the list view 1. Select the Application launcher icon 2. Select the Document viewer icon 3. If required, change the folder. 4. Scroll to the desired file and select the filename. The document is shown in the Detail view. To save the document in a different location 1. Select Edit > Copy to from the menu. 2. Select where to save the document and select Save. 116 Viewer Viewing Word documents To copy text from the document 1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the document, select Edit > Select all. 2. Select Edit > Copy. The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed. To search for a text in the document 1. Select Document > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Document > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear search hits. To change the document view 1. To display the document as formatted text without pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Draft view. 2. To display the document as formatted text including pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Normal view. 3. To display the complete layout of the document, select Edit >

Page view. Viewing Excel spreadsheets To copy text from the document 1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the document, select Edit > Select all. 2. Select Edit > Copy. The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed. Note Data copied from a spreadsheet cannot be pasted into the Calculator application if they include non-numeric values (such as currency symbols or formatting characters). To search for text in the document 1. Select Spreadsheet > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Spreadsheet > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Spreadsheet > Clear search hits. To switch between draft view and complete layout Select Edit > Draft view. To show/hide the spreadsheet grid lines Select Edit > Show gridlines. Viewer 117 To show/hide the spreadsheet headings Select Edit > Show headings. 2. To go to the previous slide in the presentation or page in the PDF, select Edit > Previous slide. To navigate in the workbook 1. To go to the next sheet in the workbook, select Edit > Next sheet. 2. To go to the previous sheet in the workbook, select Edit >

Previous sheet. Viewing PowerPoint presentations and PDFs To search for text in the document 1. Select Drawing > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Drawing > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Drawing > Clear search hits. To navigate in a multipage presentation/PDF 1. To go to the next slide in the presentation, select Edit > Next slide. 118 Viewer File manager With the File manager, you can view, rename, copy, move, and delete files and folders on the P900. You can also add folders, send files and rename and format the Memory Stick Duo. Initially, the root view is shown, with the subfolders:

Audio, where all audio files are stored. Document, where different document files are stored. Image, where all images, pictures as well as drawings, are stored. Other, where all files not applicable for the other folders are stored. Video, where all video clips are stored. Using the folder menu, you can select between the internal storage and the external storage, that is, the Memory Stick Duo. The file path area at the top of the window shows the path to the shown folder. Note There is an important distinction between External media and External other. External other lets you view folders that have been placed on the memory card by other equipment, such as digital cameras. This is the only place where these folders can be viewed. From the file manager, it is possible to reach the Control Panel Storage Manager, see Storage manager on page 160. You can also format the Memory Stick Duo, see Reformatting a Memory Stick Duo on page 22. To move within the folder structure To move up in the hierarchy - tap the top folder. To view the contents of a folder or a file - tap the top folder. Folders are opened in the file manager, while other files are opened in the applicable application. To add a folder 1. Select File > New folder. 2. Type a folder name and tap Done. To copy or move one or more folders or files 1. Select the folders or files to handle. 2. Select the required activity from the File menu. 3. Select the destination and tap Done. File manager 119 To delete one or more folders or files Note Only empty folders can be deleted. 1. Select the folders or files to delete. 2. Select File > Delete. 3. Tap Delete. To change properties for one or more folders or files 1. Select the folders or files to change. 2. Select File > Properties. 3. Change the properties as required. 4. Tap Done. 120 File manager Online services Online services is a customized service offered by a network i operator. This function is network- or subscription-dependent. Online services provides a mechanism that allows applications that exist on the SIM to interact and operate with the P900. It may provide services ranging from weather forecasts to the latest stock price information. Online service are placed on your SIM card by your operator. Note Contact your operator to find out which services are available for your account. Note If this service is available on your SIM, the Online services application will appear in the application list under a name defined by the SIM provider. However, the icon used to represent the Online services application will not change. i Online services 121 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS PC Suite and multimedia for P900 PC Suite for P900 The PC Suite for P900 CD delivered with your P900 contains a set of useful applications to install applications and manage your P900:

Synchronization Synchronization of Calendar, Notes, Contacts and Tasks against MS Outlook, Lotus Notes and Lotus Organizer. Backup and Restore Make backup copies of your data via SyncStation. File Manager Transfer files (images, documents, music) via Windows Explorer between your P900 and PC. Install software Install applications in the P900. Download Language Change the language of the P900. Dialup Networking Wizard Wizard for GPRS and HSCSD settings for using your P900 as a modem. User Guide Manual for your P900. Quick Guide Quick Guide for your P900. Drivers Drivers for modem and the USB cable connected SyncStation. Refer to the online help for each specific application. Installation of the PC Suite for P900 The PC Suite for P900 programs can be used with Windows ME, 98, 2000 and XP. When inserting the CD in the PC, a start menu is automatically shown. Select language and then start the PC Suite for P900 Setup. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard. If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run command in the Windows Start menu to start Start.exe from your CD drive. By default the PC Suite for P900 is accessed from Start menu >

Programs > Sony Ericsson > P900. The Setup application also can be used later to add or delete components. You can download the latest PC Suite software from www.SonyEricsson.com/support 122 PC Suite and multimedia for P900 Multimedia for P900 The Multimedia for P900 CD contains a number of applications and files to be installed in, or downloaded to, your P900 and used together with its applications. Games. Audio files. Pictures. Video clips. MMS templates. Opening the Multimedia CD for P900 When you insert the CD in the PC, a start menu opens automatically. Select an item from the menu and follow the instructions on the PC screen. If the start menu is not displayed automatically, use the Run command in the Windows Start menu to start CDBrowser.exe from your CD drive. PC Suite and multimedia for P900 123 Installing applications from the Internet. from a CD. from a Memory Stick Duo. as an email attachment. from other devices. It is possible to install new applications in your P900. These applications can be obtained in several ways, for example:

There are two types of installation files for applications:

SIS (Symbian Standard Installation) made for P900 or other Sony Ericsson devices. MIDP JAR (Mobile Information Device Profile Java Archive). Note SIS and JAR files are installation packages containing one or several files. This chapter also applies to other types of software to install, for example, system components and add-ons. Applications from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called third-party developers, might be able to be installed in the P900. Applications which are not approved by Sony Ericsson are not guaranteed to work correctly or securely, and users install them at their own risk. Product failures caused by applications not approved or made for Sony Ericsson will not be covered by your warranty. Installing applications on your P900 Installation file security Installation files in SIS format are typically used for installation of Epoc or PersonalJava applications or other content into the P900 file system.The vendor who prepared the SIS file decides where in the file system the various content of the SIS file will be installed. This means that you need to decide if you trust that the SIS file does not contain harmful content. If you know for sure who produced the SIS file then you can take an installation decision based on what you know about that vendor. Your P900 supports cryptographic verification of vendor identity. During installation the P900 verifies a digital signature and certificate in the SIS file against a root certificate in the phone. Successful verification means that you can trust who produced the SIS file and that the content has not been modified after it was created. If the SIS file does not contain a digital signature, 124 Installing applications you will be given a warning about the problem, but you can still decide to proceed with installation at your own risk. In general, it is recommended that you install only from SIS files where the vendor identity and file integrity can be verified. Note Installation of uncertified applications may cause your system to crash and all your data will then be lost. MIDP applications run in a protected environment with no access to sensitive information, so no signatures are required for MIDP JAR files. From a PC PC Suite for P900 must be installed in your PC and the P900 must be connected to the PC via SyncStation, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology in order to install applications from your PC. Installing applications from your PC 1. Connect your P900 to the PC via SyncStation, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. When connected, an icon is shown in the status area to the right in the taskbar on the PC. 2. Start the PC software Install Software and select the application (.sis file) to install. 3. Confirm to install the application in the P900. 4. Select the target drive (phone memory or Memory Stick Duo). Download to the P900 begins. 5. Installation starts when the download is complete. From the P900 Program packages, for example, games, can also be downloaded to your P900 from the Internet or from a Memory Stick Duo. When downloading a file from the Internet, the installation will start automatically when the file is completely downloaded to your P900. The procedure below describes installation of application packages already in the P900 but not yet installed. See To download and upload files, for example, applications on page 76 for information about how to download files from the Internet. Installing applications in the P900 1. Select 2. From the menu, select Applications > Install. 3. Select the software from the list. 4. Select Install. If the software is certified, an information dialog will be shown with the name of the software, version and supplier. Select Install again. 5. Now, depending on the software, you may be prompted to replace a previous installation, select language, memory location and select other installation options. 6. Installation is complete. Select Done. Installing applications 125 Removing applications from your P900 It is sometimes necessary to remove installed applications and user data to free up memory. Removing applications in the P900 1. Select 2. From the menu, select Applications > Uninstall. 3. Select the application to be uninstalled. 4. Select Uninstall. 5. Tap Yes to confirm. 6. Select Done. Tip See also Master reset on page 159 and Storage manager on page 160 in Control Panel for more options regarding removal of applications and user data. Some removed applications could be reinstalled from the PC Suit for the P900 and the multimedia CD. 126 Installing applications Connecting to other devices Your P900 can be connected to other devices with similar interfaces such as PCs, other P900s and handheld computers. The connection can be made via:

Bluetooth wireless technology (not in conjunction with Windows 98) Infrared (IrDA) Cable Once it has been connected, you can perform various tasks, depending on what type of connection you have selected, such as:

Using a cordless headset (Bluetooth wireless technology) Sending and receiving files via (infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology) beaming Making Backup/Restore and Synchronization of your data and file transfer. (Cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless technology) Using the P900 as a modem for Dialup Networking. (Cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless technology) PC connectivity software Your P900 is delivered with a CD, PC Suite for P900. This software must be installed on the PC you want to connect to. See Installing applications on page 124 for more information. You do not need to install the PC Suite for P900 if you only want to perform beaming with the PC or use a cordless headset. Connection via SyncStation Connect the SyncStation to your PC with the USB cable. A wizard helps you install the USB cable for the first time. The PC Suite for P900 CD contains the required software. Put your P900 in the SyncStation. A new wizard starts to help you connect your P900, if this is the first time you have done it. appears in the status area to the right on the taskbar when the P900 is connected. When connecting via cable, the P900 can be set to PC Connect mode or Modem mode. The setting is made in Control panel >

Connections > Cable, see Cable on page 146. Set the P900 in PC connect mode for Synchronization Software installation Connecting to other devices 127 Backup and restore Set the P900 in Modem mode when using P900 as a modem Dialup networking wizard You should disable the USB cable connection in these three cases. In your PC select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone Monitor Options > COM Ports and disable the COM port to which the cable is connected. Sony Ericsson Update Service Sony Ericsson Update Service (SEUS), is a way for end-users to update their phone's firmware on their own, using an SEMC desk stand and any Internet-connected PC (preferably via broadband). To update the P900's firmware 1. Connect the desk stand to your PC. 2. Visit the Sony Ericsson customer support Web site. 3. Download and run the SEUS application. Detailed instructions on how to proceed with the update sequence are displayed. You can also make a backup of the P900. Connection via the Infrared port When connecting via the infrared port, make sure that both devices are placed within one meter of each other and that the infrared ports have a free line of sight between them. Both your P900 and the device you connect to must have their infrared ports activated before communication can begin. To activate the infrared port on the P900 1. Go to Control panel > Connections > Infrared. 2. Set the P900 to PC connect or Modem as required. 3. Set the port state to On or On for 10 minutes. You can also change the infrared port state with the Flip closed, using the Connections application. in the status area to the right on the taskbar. To activate the infrared port on the PC 1. Right-click 2. Select Properties 3. Select the Infrared checkbox 4. Click Close. Note Clear the Infrared checkbox when ready. 128 Connecting to other devices Send and receive You can send items via the infrared port, beam, in any application if there is a Send as command. To send, select Infrared. If you receive a beamed item, a dialog box appears with two options. View or Done. View opens the associated application which shows the item; Done saves it in the Beamed folder in Messaging. Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology You can connect your P900 to other products equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, for example PCs or other cellphones, and exchange data. Since Bluetooth wireless technology is radio-based, there is no need for a free line of sight between transmitting and receiving devices. This means that your P900 can remain in your pocket while communicating. However, objects located between transmitting and receiving devices may weaken the signal. Connection to another device can be performed at a range of up to 10 meters. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will affect the performance. For all tasks, except beaming, it is necessary that you first set up a permanent and trusted relationship between your P900 and the other device. This process is called pairing. (Other documentation may refer to it as bonding.) The paired devices are remembered by your P900 even after you have turned it off, so you do not need to repeat the process for every connection to those devices. The reason for pairing is to simplify future connections and make them secure; only paired devices can connect to your P900. Activating Bluetooth wireless technology Activate Bluetooth wireless technology on your P900 in Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings. Set Operation mode to On, and set if your P900 should be Visible by other devices or not. See Bluetooth on page 145 for more information on Bluetooth wireless technology settings. The Bluetooth wireless technology operation mode can also be changed with the Flip closed, using the Connections application. When the Bluetooth wireless technology is activated, appears on the screen and the left indicator on top of your P900 flashes blue. Pairing To make your P900 initiate pairing with another device, such as a headset 1. In Control panel > Connections> Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to On. 2. Set the other device to be on or discoverable. 3. In the Devices tab, tap Add. Your P900 searches for all devices within range and lists them. Connecting to other devices 129 All enabled devices that are visible to others within range are shown with their name and icon. You can use Show: to restrict the list to one category (only PCs, for example). Paired devices within range are shown in regular text. Nonpaired devices within range are shown with their names in italics. Devices that are within range but unknown are shown with a preset name. 4. Select the device you want your P900 to pair with, and enter a passcode when requested. When the passcode is accepted, the pairing process is complete; see Passcodes on page 131. 5. If, in the future, you want to allow a paired device to connect to your P900 without your explicit approval of each connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices, then select a device and the checkbox Allow to connect without confirmation. To make another device initiate pairing with your P900 1. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to On. 2. Follow the other devices manual to initiate pairing. 3. When asked for a passcode, enter the same on both devices. 4. If, in the future, you want to allow a paired device to connect to your P900 without your explicit approval of each connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices, select a device and the checkbox Allow to connect without confirmation. Tip You can change the name of a paired device. When you pair with other Bluetooth wireless technology-enabled phones, it is very useful to include the user's name as part of the device name. This will make it very easy to beam information to the desired recipient. To make a headphone initiate pairing with your P900 1. Check that the device you want to pair with your P900:

Is switched on and within range. Has its Bluetooth functionality activated and is in visible mode. 2. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to On. 3. Follow the headphones manual to initiate pairing on the headphone. 4. In the Devices tab, tap Add. Your P900 searches for all devices within range and lists them. 5. When asked for a passcode, enter the headphones passcode on your P900. 130 Connecting to other devices Bluetooth share You can make it possible for other users to transfer items from your P900. To make an item accessible, select Send as > Bluetooth Shared. The item is then copied to the Shared folder, accessible by other users. When a user requests to access your Shared folder, a request dialog is shown, where you can Accept or Reject the transfer. 6. If, in the future, you want to allow the headphone to connect to your P900 without your explicit approval of each connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices, select the headphone and the checkbox Allow to connect without confirmation. To remove a paired device from your P900 Select a device in the list and select Remove. Passcodes Passcodes ensure that the device you pair with really is the device you think it is. A passcode is a set of numbers and/or letters (at least four characters) that you agree to exchange with the owner of the other device. Simply agree a passcode with the other user and enter the same code into both devices when requested. The actual code is up to you; the important thing is that you both enter the same code. Accessories like headsets often have a default passcode, usually 0000; see the specific user guide. Send and receive You can send items via Bluetooth wireless technology in any application that has a Send as command. To send, select Bluetooth. If you receive an item via Bluetooth wireless technology, a dialog box appears with two options: View or Done. View opens the associated application which shows the item;

Done saves it in the Beamed folder in Messaging. Connecting to other devices 131 Synchronization and backup With PC Suite for P900 installed in your PC, your P900 can synchronize with the following PC applications, also called Personal Information Managers (PIMs):

Lotus Organizer 5 & 6 Lotus Notes 5.0, 6 Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, 2002 Synchronization is divided into local and remote. Local synchronization is performed directly to a connected PC, while remote synchronization is done over the air with a remote server, for example, on a corporate network. The manual describes the easiest way to perform the tasks, but you can also perform most of them by selecting Start > Programs >

Sony Ericsson > P900 on the PC and then select the desired command. Refer to the online help find in Help in the menu bar in the PC software to get more information about synchronization and backup. Note If you have imported SIM phone book entries into Contacts in your P900, these entries will not be synchronized with the corresponding entries in your PC when synchronizing your P900 and PC. You will instead get duplicates on your P900. Local synchronization Bluetooth IrDA Cable Local synchronization is performed with either cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. The functionality is the same. Email, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Jotter notes (only text) can be synchronized locally. Local synchronization settings Local synchronization is initiated from the PC and all settings are made in the P900 PC software (included on the PC Suite for P900 CD). 132 Synchronization and backup The easiest way to synchronize is to set the Synchronization to automatically perform a synchronization every time your P900 is connected. in the status area to the right in the To perform the synchronization settings In the PC, click on taskbar on the PC and select Sync Station Settings. A dialog appears where you can make the synchronization settings. Click Help in the dialog to get more information about the settings. Making a local synchronization To make an automatic synchronization 1. Connect your P900 via SyncStation, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. For more information, see Connecting to other devices on page 127. 2. Synchronization starts automatically. 3. After a short time, the PC application you want to synchronize with might ask you to allow the P900 access to it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues. To make a manual synchronization 1. Connect your P900 via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. For more information, see Connecting to other devices on page 127. 2. In the PC, click on on the PC taskbar and select Synchronize. The synchronization starts. 3. After a short time, the PC application you want to synchronize with might ask you to allow the P900 access to it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues. Remote synchronization Remote synchronization takes place over the air and is the ideal way to keep the P900 up-to-date while on the move. Using GPRS, the P900 can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization server. GPRS, HSCSD or CSD PIM Application Sync Server Firewall Internet/Intranet Synchronization and backup 133 Synchronization services may be offered by mobile operators, third-party service providers and as added capability to corporate PIM applications. Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks can be synchronized remotely. Remote synchronization settings To configure the remote synchronization server In Applications, select in the following parameters:

Remote Sync > Edit > Preferences and fill Server address Username Password You might also need to fill in whether to use transport login under the Protocol tab. Contact your corporate information services help desk or your service provider for information on these parameters. You also need to have at least one configured Internet account that remote sync can use to connect, see Internet accounts on page 147. To select items to synchronize 1. In Remote Sync, select one item in the list you want to be synchronized. 2. Select the Enable task checkbox. 3. Fill in the Task name or leave default. 4. Fill in the Server database (contact your corporate information services help desk or your service provider). 5. The item you selected to be synchronized is now above the divider in the list. (Disabled items are below the divider.) Repeat for other items. Making a remote synchronization Open Applications > Remote Sync and tap the Sync button. When ready, the Task status column shows today's date for all successfully synchronized items. Backing up data You can use the P900 Backup and Restore PC software to back up the contents stored in your P900 to your computer. Keeping backups of your P900 contents on your computer means that you have a separate copy of the contents of the P900, which can be restored into the P900. Backups should be made on a regular basis. See the online help for P900 Backup and Restore for more information on how to use the application. Note All user data will be deleted when the P900 software is upgraded by a Service Partner. Always back up your data before handing over the P900 for upgrading, so that you can restore it afterwards 134 Synchronization and backup Preconditions The PC Suite for P900 must be installed on the PC and the P900 must be connected to the PC via a cable. Note Backup and restore does not work via infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. Performing a backup To make a backup 1. Turn on your P900 and connect it to the PC via cable. 2. In the PC, click on on the PC taskbar and select Back up and restore. 3. Select your P900 in the menu that appears. Several P900s can be backed up to the same PC. 4. Select Backup and select what to back up: P900 and/or Memory Stick. 5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the P900. 6. The backup is complete. Restoring data Lost data or accidentally deleted information in your P900 can be restored from an earlier backup. A backup from the phone can only be restored to the phone, and a backup from a Memory Stick can only be restored to a Memory Stick. To restore a backup 1. Turn on your P900 and connect it to the PC via a cable. 2. In the PC, click on on the PC taskbar and select Back up and restore. 3. Select your P900 in the menu that appears. Several P900s can be backed up to the same PC. 4. Select one of the backups in the list of previously saved backups and click Restore. 5. Click Yes and follow the instructions on the PC and on the P900. 6. The restore is complete. Note Everything in your P900 will be overwritten by the chosen backup. Once you have clicked Yes to start the restore, you cannot cancel the procedure. Note If you have used your Secure Tokens (Secure Access files) since you made your backup, you must reconfigure these. If you restore another P900, you must reconfigure your Secure Tokens. For more information see Secure tokens on page 160. Synchronization and backup 135 SETTINGSPersonalizing your P900 There are a number of ways you can give your P900 a personal touch and change its settings to suit your requirements. Themes Themes control the color of screen and text, the icons, and the wallpaper picture. Sound themes control the notification alerts. Four themes are preloaded in the P900. Extra themes can be found on the Multimedia for P900 CD. To change the theme, select see Themes on page 143. Control panel > Device > Themes, Changing your application shortcuts You can change and rearrange the five shortcuts to applications, shown in the standby screen when the Flip is closed, and the five first shortcuts in the Application picker area in Flip open (not the Application launcher

). The Flip closed shortcuts can even be hidden, if you wish. Control panel > Device > Display. You can use Setting a wallpaper picture You can change the background image (wallpaper) for the standby screen in any image stored internally or on a Memory Stick Duo. Tip More wallpaper images can be found on the Multimedia P900 CD, delivered with your P900. You can obtain suitable wallpaper picture files by downloading, MMS, beaming using Bluetooth or infrared, or transferring them using a cable from your PC. Wallpaper picture images are 208 x 144 pixels and the picture can be seen on the standby screen. (Any selected picture will be scaled to fit the screen.)The images can be in JPEG, GIF, BMP, WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Setting a screensaver You can set a screensaver picture to be displayed after a period of inactivity. See Display on page 139. Keylock and device lock may be used in combination with the screensaver. When you press a key or touch the screen, you will be prompted to activate keys and/or enter the device lock code. 136 Personalizing your P900 The images can be in JPEG, GIF (including animated), BMP, WBMP, MBM or PNG format. The image format for the screen saver is 208 x 320 pixels. Note Using animated GIF uses more power. To select the contacts picture size 1. Select 2. Select the Show large popup picture for incoming calls checkbox. 3. Tap Done. Phone > Edit >Preferences > Incoming call picture. 11:03 John S mith

+4613244500 (h) Adding images to your Contacts You can store a picture with each entry in Contacts. See Creating and editing contacts on page 98. Pictures are easily taken using the CommuniCorder

(see CommuniCorder on page 56), though of course other images can be used. If your network operator provides a CLI (Caller Line Identification) service, your P900 can display the contacts picture together with the other information when an incoming call is received with a CLI matching that contact. (Not all numbers can be displayed.) The contacts picture is also displayed when you make a call to that person. End call Ringtones Your P900 can play both iMelody format and polyphonic ringtones in WAV, AU, AMR, MIDI, RMF, and MP3 sound file formats. When you select a ringtone, your P900 will scan the internal and Memory Stick storage and present you with a list of ringtones in these formats. Recordings you have made using Sound Recorder can also be selected. Ringtones can be added by downloading them from the Web, beaming using infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology file transfer from a PC or using a Memory Stick. Extra ringtones can be found on the Multimedia for P900 CD-ROM. You can add as many ringtones as desired, subject only to available storage space. Tip Sound Recorder recordings are listed as voicenote and a number, for example voicenote1470. A ringtone may be selected for an entry in Contacts, so that the caller can be identified by the ringtone that is played. See To personalize the ringtone for a contact on page 99. Personalizing your P900 137 Note If you use an audio file as alarm or notification signal, it will be played using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring volume setting will not effect the sound volume. Note The mobile network must provide the CLI (Caller Line Identification) of the caller to enable the contact to be identified. You may change the default ringtone that is played in all other cases. To do this, see Sounds and alerts on page 141. Note If your P900 finds that you have renamed, moved or deleted a ringtone, it will play the default instead. Note If you use an audio file as ringtone, it will be played using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring volume setting will not effect the sound volume. Alarm tones and sound notification You can choose different sounds for alarms and notifications in these applications:

Time Calendar Tasks Messaging See Setting alarms on page 115. Set a sound for reminder alerts, see Preferences on page 104). Set a sound for reminder alarms. See Preferences on page 107. Set a different sound for each type of message as notification of a new message:

See Sounds and alerts on page 141. 138 Personalizing your P900 Control panel Applications >

Control Panel. The Control Panel is the location for all the main settings on your P900 that are systemwide and affect more than one application. This is the main place to go to initially set up your P900, and to change settings at any point thereafter. To access it, select Tip You can find settings that apply to a single application in the Preferences menu of the application, for example: Phone > Edit

> Preferences, CommuniCorder > CommuniCorder > Preferences, Internet > Edit > Preferences. The sections below describe the settings available for each of the default items in the Control panel. THE DEVICE TAB The device tab contains settings related to the behavior of your P900 device itself. Application shortcuts Use this dialog to configure the application shortcuts shown in the Flip closed Standby view, and the Application picker shortcuts in the Flip open mode. See Standby view on page 15 and Navigation on page 16. You can change the five shortcuts shown. If you feel that the Flip closed shortcuts obscure your wallpaper, you can choose to hide them when you do not need them. To change an application shortcut 1. In the Application shortcuts dialog, select the Flip open or Flip closed tab depending on the shortcuts you intend to change. 2. Select the icon you wish to change. The name of the application is shown in the Set Application pick list. 3. Choose the application you want to replace it with from the list. To hide the Flip closed application shortcuts when your P900 is inactive Clear the Shortcuts always displayed checkbox. Display Use the Display settings to control the screen and power functions of your P900. Wallpaper tab You can set a picture to be the wallpaper for the standby screen. Control panel 139 1. Select if the Flip closed or Flip open wallpaper should be changed. 2. Tap the image showing the current picture. 3. Browse to see picture files available on your P900. 4. Select a picture and tap Select. Read more about wallpaper in Personalizing your P900 on page 136. Screen tab You can set a picture to be the screensaver. 1. Select a picture for the screensaver. 2. Set the activation time for the screensaver. If you select the screensaver device lock checkbox, the device lock will activate when the delay runs out. Read more about the device lock in Device lock on page 35. If you set a time for the Automatic input lock, the keyboard lock will activate when the time runs out. Read more about the automatic keylock in Automatic keylock on page 36. Power tab You can set the screen light settings for in-car use and handheld use. Auto The light switches on when you tap the screen, press a key, or receive an incoming call Light is always on Light is always off On Off You can set if the power save should switch off the screen, blank the screen or show a clock on the screen. You can also set the power save time between 1 and 30 minutes. If you set times for both screensaver and power saver, the power saver time will commence after the screensaver is displayed. Flight mode In Flight mode, the radio function is turned off. You cannot make and receive calls but most of the other functions in the P900 are available. Use these settings to turn Flight mode on or off and also to activate the Power menu. When activated, the Power menu will ask you if you want to start the P900 in normal mode or Flight mode each time you turn on the P900. Also, when you press the On/Off button when your P900 is on, the Power menu will ask you if you want to turn off the P900, or switch to another mode. 140 Control panel To activate the Power menu Select the Prompt me... checkbox and tap Done. To cancel the selection of Power menu Clear the Prompt me... checkbox and tap Done. International Use these settings to set the locations shown in Time, as well as the units for distances, numeric separators, and how currency values should be shown. There are two tabs: Locations and Numbers. On the Locations tab Set Current country/region and Current city to your current location. Set Other country/region and Other city to an alternative location (for example, your home location if you are abroad). If the city you want is not listed, select another city in the desired timezone. On the Numbers tab Set the decimal separator and thousands separator you desire. Locks Locks contains options for activating the locks on the device, the SIM card and the keys on the keypad, and for changing the lock codes, see P900 locks on page 35. Sounds and alerts Use these settings to control sounds and alerts of your P900. Calls tab Sets ringtones and volume. Messages tab Sets notification alerts for messages. Other tab Sets button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms, and other notifications. You can choose to use any sound recording or audio file. You can select ringtones stored on your local storage or on a Memory Stick. If the selected file is later deleted or moved, the Default Melody will be played instead. Note If you use an audio file as a ringtone, alarm or notification signal, it will be played using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring volume setting does not affect the sound volume. To listen to the selected ringtone or alert 1. Tap the icon to listen to the signal. 2. Tap it again to stop playback. Control panel 141 To change the default ringtone or alert 1. Tap the drop-down menu. 2. Select Default Melody for the P900 default or Find Melody to select a new one. and to preview the sound. 3. If required, change the folder. 4. Select the required sound 5. Tap 6. Tap Select to set this sound. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure to excessive volume may damage hearing. Note To set the vibrating alert, silent mode, or the speakerphone, or to mute the microphone, tap the volume icon on the status bar. Calls tab These settings set incoming call alerts. For more information, see Ringtones on page 137. You may personalize the ringtones further for individual contacts; see To change the details of a contact on page 99. Ring (voice) Select a ringtone for incoming voice calls. Ring (data) Select a ringtone for incoming data calls. Ring volume Set the preferred sound level for handheld, hands-free and in-car use. Increasing ring Select the checkbox to use increasing ringtones. This disables the other volume settings. Messages tab These settings set messaging alerts. Display notification message Select the checkbox to receive notification of a received message. SMS Select an alert for received SMS messages. Email Select an alert for received Email messages. MMS Select an alert for received MMS messages. Area info Select an alert for received area information messages. Auto setup Select an alert for auto setup messages. Other tab These settings set button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms, and other notifications. Button clicks Select the sound used when you press a key on the keypad. Screen taps Select the sound used when you tap the screen. 142 Control panel Reminder Select an alert to be played for reminders. Voice messages Select an alert to be played for voice messages. Default alarm sound Select the default alarm sound. Text input There are several standard ways of entering text in your P900. See Entering text with the Flip closed on page 31 and Entering text with the Flip open on page 32. Use the settings on the Primary, Alternative and Flip Closed tabs to set methods for entering text in your P900. Primary The method that you select here is activated automatically when you need to enter text into your P900. Alternative The method that you select here is activated if you tap at the bottom of the screen. Themes You can set the look of the user interface by changing the theme. To change the theme, select a theme from the list. The picture shows the Flip closed standby wallpaper. Tap Select. To change the sound, select from the drop-down list. Tap the trumpet to listen to the sound. Tap again to stop playback. To send a theme, select the theme and tap Send as. To delete a theme, select the theme and tap Delete. Time & date Adjusting the time and date here sets these throughout your P900. The dialog has three tabs. You can set:

Time & date The current time and date. Here you can also turn Summertime (daylight saving time) on or off for your location. Specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen. Specify the days in your working week. Flip closed The method that you select here is activated when you need to enter text with the Flip closed. If you load other text input software, select it and adjust its settings here. Format Workdays Note These settings are also available in the application. Time Control panel 143 Time & date tab To set the current date 1. On the Time & date tab, select the date. A calendar view opens. Tap the arrows to set the current year and month. 2. Select the current date. To set the current time 1. On the Time & date tab, select the time. Select the upper half of the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower half to decrease the number. 2. Select the am/pm box. This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format. 3. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker. If the locations you have set under Control panel >

International are in a country/region that currently has summertime (daylight saving time), you can adjust the time and date. To turn daylight saving time on 1. On the Time &date tab, select Summertime, select the checkboxes for the zones that currently have daylight saving time. Select Done. 2. Format tab You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen, and if you want to use the 12-hour (am/pm) or 24-

hour time format. To set the time and date display format 1. Select Date format and choose a format. 2. Select Date separator and choose a separator. 3. Select a Time format. 4. Select Time separator choose a separator. 5. Select Done. Workdays tab You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also specify the first day of your week to customize the display of both Week and Month views in Calendar. User greeting Your P900 can show a user greeting on the standby screen when you turn it on. Use this dialog to turn this function on or off. You can define your own user greeting text (up to 32 characters). 144 Control panel THE CONNECTIONS TAB The connections tab contains settings related to how your P900 communicates with other devices. Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio waves to enable wireless connections between your P900 and other Bluetooth-

enabled devices. This method of linking works well at a range of up to 10 meters. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will have an effect on the performance. Read more about connecting to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology in Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology on page 129. Bluetooth settings are shown on two tabs:

Settings A device name for your P900. Bluetooth on or off. If it should be visible to other Bluetooth-equipped devices. Devices A list of all the Bluetooth-enabled devices that your P900 is paired (bonded) with. To change the name of a device, and to allow for connection without confirmation, select the name from the list. To remove a device from the list, select the name and To locate other devices in the vicinity, and add them to select Remove. the list, tap Add. Tip You will probably find that the preset name of your P900, and of devices you pair it with, are not very meaningful or easily recognizable. It is a good idea to change these names to something more useful. The name you choose for your P900 appears on any devices you pair it with. See Pairing on page 129 for instructions on how to connect to another device using Bluetooth wireless technology. Security On the Settings tab, you can set the Bluetooth security-related settings of your P900. Bluetooth on All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from your P900 works. Visibility according to the Visible to other devices setting. Set Bluetooth to Off if you do not use Bluetooth, which will decrease battery drain. Bluetooth will be automatically switched on if you use Send as >

Bluetooth from the applications Yes: All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from your P900 works. No: All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from your P900 works, but you cannot receive beamed items, and other devices cannot initiate pairing with your P900. You cannot use your P900 as a modem, it is not possible to connect from a PC and voice dialing from a headset is not possible. Visible to other devices Control panel 145 Cable Use Cable to set the cable connection mode and the connection parameters used when communicating through your P900's cable port. Set the cable connection mode. Please note that you must set the mode to Modem when using the P900 as a modem and when using the DUN (Dialup Networking) Wizard. Set the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, character length and type of flow control required for the connection. When connecting your P900 via the desk stand to a USB port on your PC, use the following (default) settings:

460800 None 1 8 CTS/RTS Baud rate Parity Stop bits Character length Flow control Tip You can set the cable connection mode when the Flip is closed by selecting Connections >

Applications >

Cable. 146 GSM Networks This option lets you choose what network to use when roaming outside of your operators area. Select whether you want to search for a new network or use a preferred one. You can also make a list of preferred networks. Search mode Select between automatic or manual search for a network. Select network Tap the button to access a list of available networks. New search Tap the button to search for available networks. Preferred list Show the networks that your P900 will search for when you are roaming outside of your home network. Note Your operator may not allow you to access all available networks. To add a network to the preferred list 1. Tap Add network. 2. Select a network from the displayed list. 3. Select a position in the Preferred list and tap Done. Infrared Use this setting to control the state of the infrared port of your P900. Control panel Set the infrared status to PC connect or Modem, as required. You can set it Off, On or On for 10 minutes. Read more about connecting to other devices using infrared in Connection via the Infrared port on page 128. Internet accounts You access the Internet using an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies you with account details including: a username, a password, and the phone number or Web site address that your P900 automatically uses to access the Internet. You need to set up an Internet account before you can:

Access Web pages and download multimedia messages. Set up an email account to send and receive email messages. Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to ask your service provider to send you a message containing the required information to create an account automatically on your P900. There are three types of Internet account:

Dialup:

High-Speed Dialup:

GPRS :

For Dialup (CSD, Circuit-Switched Data) connections, you are charged for the length of time you are connected to the Internet. For High-Speed Dialup (HSCSD, High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data) connections, you are charged for the length of time you are connected but you can increase the connection speed so information is transferred faster. The service must be included in your subscription, and billing rates from your network operator may increase as you increase the connection speed. For a GPRS connection, you are charged for the amount of information you view, download, or send. The dialog has two tabs: Accounts and Other. Accounts tab The Internet accounts dialog lists all the Internet accounts that have been set up on your P900. You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. Control panel 147 If you want to select an Internet account every time you connect to the Internet, select the Show connection dialog checkbox. This may be useful if you use different Internet accounts for Internet and Messaging. Whenever you connect to the Internet, your Preferred account is the account that your P900 prompts you to use. To create a new Internet account 1. On the Accounts tab, select New. 2. Give the account a name. This will be the name displayed in your list of accounts. (In dialogs that appear while a connection is being established, the text -GPRS is automatically added to the names of GPRS accounts.) 3. Choose the Connection type for the type of account that you want to create, GPRS or Dialup. 4. Continue entering settings as required. These will differ depending on the type of account: GPRS, Dialup or High-

Speed Dialup:

GPRS account New For some accounts, you may need to enter advanced settings, provided by your ISP. Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described below GPRS Advanced tabs Server Username and password Normally, you do not have to enter a username and password when you connect to a GPRS account. However, some service providers may require you to enter these details. If you select the Username and password required checkbox, but do not enter a username and password, you will be prompted to enter these when the P900 connects. Address Enter the Internet address of your access point. This address is supplied by your service provider. 148 Control panel GPRS Advanced tabs Log in The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses. The DNS address uniquely identifies your Internet Service Provider (ISP)'s computers, which your P900 uses to connect to the Internet. Your P900 can normally retrieve these addresses automatically from most ISPs. If, after setting up an Internet account, you cannot connect to the Internet and you suspect these addresses are incorrect, ask your ISP for their primary and secondary DNS addresses. An IP address consists of four 3-digit boxes, and the valid input is between 000 and 256 in each box. A proxy server is a computer connected between your P900 and the computer you communicate with. This arrangement can be used for connections to Remote Sync servers, or within a company network. If this setting is needed, your company's Information Services department or Remote Sync provider must give you instructions. If your ISP supports Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions checkbox. PPP extensions allow your P900 to provide features such as encryption, which increases the security of your Internet connection. Proxy Other GPRS Advanced tabs Authentication is used by some network operators to identify the cellphone connecting to their GPRS network. There are different methods, or protocols, for doing this. Normal: PAP (Password Authentication Protocol). The user's username and password are transmitted over the network in an unencrypted format. Secure: CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). The user's username and password are never transmitted over the network. None: No authentication is required by the network operator. Check with your network operator before changing any of the QoS (Quality of Service) settings. If your operator supports the use of Header compression, selecting On can speed up your connection. The settings Precedence, Delay, Peak rate, and Mean Rate are all by default set to Subscribed, which means that your operators default QoS (Quality of Service) values will apply. Reliability is set as Class 3 by default. QoS Dialup or High-Speed Dialup account New Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your Username, your Password, and their Phone number, which your P900 dials to connect to the Internet. If you have a High-Speed Control panel 149 Dialup account with your network operator, you can increase the speed of your connection by making settings on the Speed tab under Advanced. Tip To avoid having to change the phone number when you travel abroad: enter the international dialing prefix (for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your ISP. For some accounts, you may also need to make advanced settings. Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described below Dialup and High-Speed Dialup Advanced tabs Log in The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses. For an explanation of these settings, see Log in in the GPRS Advanced tabs on page 148. As an alternative to entering your username and password to access the Internet, you may need to use a login script stored on your P900. Although uncommon, scripts may be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Select the Use login script checkbox and enter the script text in the Script editor If you select the checkbox Plain text authentication

(required by some ISPs), the security of your connection will decrease during the connection process. Once you are connected, the security of your connection will be restored. Script 150 Dialup and High-Speed Dialup Advanced tabs Select the checkbox Post connect terminal if:

The login script of the account that you are setting up requires that you input certain information or you will need to respond to prompts from the Internet account. You are connecting to a Dialup account that uses Secure Access generated by a separate smart card or password generator. For an explanation of these settings, see Proxy in the GPRS Advanced tabs on page 148. You can only increase the speed of your connection if you have a High-Speed Dialup account with your network operator. To enable secure access for this Internet account, you must link it to a vendor-associated Secure Token in this dialog:

1. Select the Enable secure access checkbox. To create or delete Secure Tokens on your P900, select Control panel > Other >Secure tokens. 2. Select the vendor and token names of the Secure Token that you want to link to this account from the drop-down lists. If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point-to-

Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions checkbox. PPP extensions allow your P900 to provide features such as encryption, which increases the security of your Internet connection. Proxy Speed Secure Other Control panel To edit an Internet account 1. On the Accounts tab, select the account from the list. 2. Select Edit. 3. Change your settings as desired. 4. Select Done. Note If you change the Connection type, all account data for that account will be deleted. To delete an Internet account 1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Done. Other tab You can use the Dialup timeout and GPRS timeout settings to set up your P900 to disconnect automatically from the Internet if you are not using it. The connection is ended after the period you specify has lapsed. Preferred Mode (bearer preference) Please note that your P900 can be used for either voice (or GSM data) calls or transferring GPRS data, but not both at the same time. It may, however, still be connected to GPRS. As an

), your P900 may

) incoming calls will be accepted. example, during GPRS data transfer (Icon:

not receive incoming calls. As soon as the transfer stops

(Icon:

Setting the Preferred Mode lets you select how you want to use your P900:

Select GPRS only if you do not want to be disturbed by incoming phone calls while browsing the Web. All incoming voice (and GSM data) calls are rejected. If you disconnect from the Internet, incoming calls can be received. Outgoing calls are possible, except during data transfers. This mode is useful if you are using sensitive Internet services, such as banking. If you select GSM only, your P900 will not be connected to the GPRS network. If you choose to download email or browse the Web, your P900 will connect to GPRS only as long as is needed for the data connection. If you select Automatic, your P900 will let you answer incoming GSM calls while retaining normal GPRS functionality. A GPRS data connection will be temporarily interrupted by a voice call. Messaging accounts The of messages, but you must first set up accounts and make settings as described below. Messaging application can handle many different types Control panel 151 The Messaging accounts dialog has four tabs, one for each type of messaging account:

Email You can have any number of email accounts. To receive and send email, you must first set up an Internet account

(if one is not already set up). See Internet accounts on page 147. You can only have one SMS (Short Message Service) account.The settings on this tab also apply to EMS

(Extended Message Service) messages. You can only have one MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) account. To receive MMS messages, you must first set up Internet and WAP accounts (if they are not already set up). SeeInternet accounts on page 147. You can only have one Area info account. The number of Area Information channels you can subscribe to is limited by the storage of your SIM. SMS MMS Area Tip A simple way of setting up an email or multimedia message account is to ask your service provider to send you a message containing the information required to create an account automatically on your P900. Read more about the different types of messages in Messaging on page 83. Email tab The Email tab shows a list of the email accounts on your P900.You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. You can select one of your email accounts as Preferred. This will be the email account that your P900 uses when you use Send as to send an entry as an email directly from one of your P900 applications To create a new email account 1. On the Email tab, select New. 2. Enter the following settings on the tabs:

Email account basic tab settings Account name Your name Email address This is the name you give to your email account. This name appears on your outgoing email messages. Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your email address. Connection type Select POP3 or IMAP. POP3 is most common. Internet account Select the Internet account to access your email messages. 152 Control panel Email account Inbox tab settings Username Password Incoming server address Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your username and password, and its incoming server address, which identifies the computer where your incoming email messages are stored. If you want to limit the data traffic, you can choose to receive Just headers (the sender, subject, and date only) or set a size limit (if a message is larger than the emails smaller than limit, only the headers are downloaded). You can download the complete message later. Select Schedule to schedule automatic downloading of your incoming email messages. Messages waiting in your Outbox will not be sent at the same time. Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with its Outgoing server address, which identifies the computer through which your outgoing email messages are sent. Some SMTP servers might also require authentication when sending email. In that case, select the checkbox Use SMTP authentication and enter your Username and Password. If the SMTP server accepts using your Inbox login information for authentication, select the checkbox Use Inbox login details. Download Schedule Use SMTP authentication Use Inbox login details Control panel Email account Outbox tab settings Outgoing server address Email account Advanced tab settings Secure connections Outgoing mail port Use MIME encoding Incoming mail port Secure password authentication Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will tell you whether you can use either a Secure connection or Secure password authentication. Normally 25. Do not change unless your ISP instructs you to do so. MIME encoding is a standard that allows nontext information (for example graphics) and accented characters to be sent in email messages. If you do not wish to Use MIME encoding, clear the checkbox. Normally 110. Do not change unless your ISP instructs you to. A secure connection means that all information

(including your username, password, and all messages) is encrypted to maximize security while you are connected to the Internet. In contrast, secure password authentication means that only your password is encrypted. To edit an email account 1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Edit. 3. Change your settings as desired. 4. Select Done. 153 To delete an email account 1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Done. SMS tab Use these settings to set up text message and EMS messaging:

Messaging accounts SMS tab settings SMS Service center address The Service center address is the phone number where your text messages are stored. It is normally imported from the SIM card, but if that fails, your network operator can provide you with the service center address. Your network operator may also specify the Character Set. You can set a time limit after which text messages are deleted from the network by selecting a value in the Messages stored for list. Character Set Messages stored for Connection type Specify if you prefer to use GPRS or GSM connection, as directed by your network operator. Tip If you send and receive text messages in several countries, you can avoid having to change the service center address when you travel abroad by entering the international dialing prefix

(for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your network operator. MMS tab Use these settings to set up multimedia messaging:

Messaging accounts MMS tab settings Service center address WAP accounts Automatic Download size and Smaller than The Service center address is the URL of the server on which your multimedia messages are stored. Your MMS service provider or your network operator can provide you with the service center address. Specify which of your configured WAP accounts you wish to use. WAP accounts are created in Control panel >

Connections > WAP accounts Select between:

Home only - messages are downloaded automatically when you are connected to your home network. On - messages are also downloaded automatically when you are roaming outside your home network Off - automatic download is off, you will receive notifications of incoming messages and have to download them manually. Set whether or not to have a size limit for incoming messages:

No restrictions - the size of the incoming messages does not matter, all messages will be received. Less than - messages smaller than the limit will be received; larger messages may not be received. 154 Control panel Advanced settings Select Advanced to make settings about how your P900 will send and receive multimedia messages. MMS Advanced settings tabs Send The values you give these settings will be default for all multimedia messages that you send. You can of course choose other values for an individual message in Messaging. You can set the Validity period for your messages, that is, how long they should be available to the recipient. Maximum is the default. You can give your messages a Priority of Low, Normal

(default) or High. You can set a level of Conformance for the multimedia messages that you send to make sure that they will be played back correctly on different products. If checked, a warning message is displayed whenever you add a nonconformant item to a multimedia message. You have the option to send anyway. Select the checkboxes to provide the function you want:

Hide number prevents the sent message from showing your number. Read report requests a read notification from recipients of your messages. Delivery report requests a delivery notification from recipients of your messages. Reply with history includes the original with your reply. MMS Advanced settings tabs Receive These settings apply to multimedia messages that you receive. Select the Play full screen checkbox, when you want to play MMS messages in full-screen mode. Select the checkboxes to send a notification message to the sender when a message is:

Delivered to you: Allow delivery notification Read by you: Allow read notification You can filter reception of incoming messages by message class (Advertisements, Information, and Anonymous senders) as well messages from senders listed in Contacts. Selecting a checkbox will filter out messages of that category. To receive multimedia messages only from senders listed in your Contacts, select all other checkboxes and clear the checkbox for Anonymous senders. Area tab On the Area tab, you make settings related to Cell Broadcast Services. These include both Area Information and Cell Information services. The availability of Cell and Area Information Services is operator-dependent. Your network may broadcast the area code as cell information. Your P900 can to display it below the network name in the Flip closed standby view. Control panel 155 Area Information is a type of text message that is sent to all subscribers in a certain network area, for example a local traffic report. To enable Cell Information Select the Cell information checkbox To turn Area Information on 1. Check the Area information checkbox. Received messages will automatically be stored, and displayed in the list when dismissed. 2. The list shows all the channels that you have defined on your P900. The checkbox for each channel shows if it is on

(checked, ready to receive messages) or off (cleared, not active):

To add a new channel 1. Select New. 2. Enter the number of the new channel in the New Channel dialog. Channel numbers can be from 0 to 999. If there are too many channels defined, New will be disabled and you will see a message: Maximum channels on SIM. Channel numbering is operator-dependent. Please consult your network operator for information. To turn a channel on or off Select the channel in the list and check the checkbox. To turn it off, clear the checkbox. To delete a channel Select Delete. Since deleting a channel cannot be undone, you will be asked to confirm the deletion. Deleting the channel will also delete any stored Area Information messages for that channel in your Area Info Inbox. WAP accounts Use these settings to set up and manage WAP accounts on your P900. WAP accounts are intended for multimedia messages and for accessing the Internet through a WAP gateway. (Such gateways make use of proxy port 9200-9203.) All other proxy settings should be included in your Internet accounts. For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular WAP account. The dialog has two tabs: Basic and Preferred. Basic tab The dialog displays a list of all the WAP accounts on your P900. You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. 156 Control panel Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a new one. To create a new WAP account 1. Enter the name of the WAP account. 2. Select the Internet account you want to use. Preferred indicates the account set as preferred in the Internet setup. 3. If you are going to use a WAP gateway or a proxy, select the Use proxy checkbox. 4. Enter the IP Address of the gateway or proxy. 5. Enter the Port address of the gateway or proxy. For a WAP gateway use:

9201 for a normal connection. 9203 for a secure encrypted connection. If the gateway/proxy requires Username and Password, which is very unusual, fill in the last two fields in the dialog. Preferred tab Select the checkbox to set a preferred WAP account. It will be used when you use the Open page command in the Internet application and when a page is opened from another P900 application. If you do not set a preferred WAP account, the preferred Internet account will be used when connecting to the Internet. THE OTHER TAB The other tab contains all settings that are not related to the device or connections. This is also where settings from system components and add-ons, developed by third-party developers, can be found. Certificate manager Digital certificates ensure that the Web or WAP pages you visit, or any software you install, really are created by the person you expect. Certificates may be present on the pages you view or the software you download. Your P900 compares these certificates with a set of certificates stored in Certificate manager to ensure the authenticity of the page or software. If the certificates do not match, your P900 informs you, and gives you the following choices:

Prevent the page being loaded or the software being installed. Continue at your own risk. The certificates on your P900 have been created and issued by an independent organization that ensures their authenticity. Control panel 157 Security information Security information is displayed when Certificate manager cannot be sure of the origin of the page or software. For example, security information will be displayed if:

The certificate on a page has expired. The identity of a software manufacturer cannot be verified. Security information is also displayed when a certificate on your P900 has:

Expired. Been revoked by the independent organization that issued it. Adding and deleting certificates Your P900 handles certificates automatically so, most of the time, you can browse the Internet securely without using Certificate manager. If you do need to add or delete a certificate, you will usually be informed by your network operator or system administrator. You should delete a certificate from Certificate manager if you are informed, or suspect, that:

The certificate does not belong to the person who supplied it. The certificate was issued incorrectly by the independent organization that created it. Type of certificate The type can be either User or Certificate Authority. User certificates contain your identity. This type of certificate is used when the server asks for client authentication. The client application requests you to identify yourself by choosing a user certificate. Certificate Authority certificates contain server details. This type of certificate is handled by your P900 when the server only requires server authentication. This means that your identity remains anonymous. Flip removed This dialog lets you enable the use of the Virtual flip when the flip of your P900 has been removed, see Virtual flip on page 17. Format disk This dialog primarily lets you rename and format any Memory Stick Duo that you install in your P900. Your P900 comes with one Memory Stick Duo. 158 Control panel When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it, including any applications that you may have installed. You also delete all information placed on it by other devices (these folders are hidden except in File Manager). IP security manager The IP security manager displays stored policies and only one policy may be activated at a time.This is used for secure connections over the Internet, typically to a corporate intranet. If necessary, your company information services department will supply the necessary information. There are two types of passwords required:

IP security password: is to be set when activating the very first policy, that is, this password is only set once, but it is possible to change it later at any time by tapping the Password button. Activation password: is required when a policy is activated for the first time and the supplier of the policy gives this. Language selection Use this list of all languages stored on your P900 to change the language. The highlighted entry is the language presently in use. You can delete all languages except English. To conserve storage space, only a limited set of languages is loaded on your P900 at delivery. When you select one of the languages from the list, the unused languages in the set are deleted from the memory of your P900. You can, at any time, use the Download Language utility on the PC suite for P900 CD to load and delete languages.The utility will guide you through downloading the language from your PC or the Internet. When you have selected a new language, you must turn the P900 off and then on again for the change to take effect. Master reset Use Master reset to reset your P900. Note All user data, as well as preinstalled media files and application data files (including, for example, wallpapers, ringtones and pictures), will be deleted and settings will be set to the state they were, after you selected the language. The selected local language is restored. If you have backed up your user data, you can restore it from the backup, see Restoring data on page 135. You can restore media files and application data files from the Multimedia for P900 CD, or from the Web. If you want to keep installed applications, clear the Delete user installed applications checkbox. Control panel 159 Secure tokens If you need access to a network that requires secure access

(often known as strong authentication), for example a corporate intranet, you can set up the Internet account you use to log into that network to use secure access and generate the required one-time password when you make the connection. Your P900 supports the following secure access systems:

SecureID from RSA SafeWord from Secure Computing It is also possible to add other access systems through third-

party software. If you have a separate device or application that requires one-

time passwords according to one of these systems, you do not need a separate hardware token generator (Hard Token). Your P900 can generate passwords that are not associated with an Internet account. You manage secure access in your P900 using Secure Tokens. Each token is associated with one vendor/system and may be associated with one or more Internet accounts (or none, when you use your P900 as a Hard Token). You can configure as many tokens as needed. Tip Dialog details when using secure access are vendor, system and network-specific. You should contact the administrator of the network you wish to access to obtain the correct information. Storage manager The list shows the applications on your P900 and the space they occupy. Tapping the Files button lets you manage general files stored internally on the P900 or on a Memory Stick Duo. Deleting information from applications To delete information from an application, select an application in the list. This application is then displayed. Delete the old or unwanted entries or information. Here are some maintenance tips for different applications:

Delete any unwanted recordings as even short ones occupy a Messaging, delete any old messages from your Inbox lot of space. In or Sent folders. In selecting Calendar > Delete entries in your list of entries. In Tasks, delete all completed entries by selecting Tasks > Delete completed in your list of entries. Calendar, delete all entries in a specified time period by 160 Control panel Throughout your P900, use folders as you create and receive information to speed up maintenance later. Deleting or copying general files Tap Files to see lists of all stored general file types on your P900 and the Memory Stick Duo. You can copy files to a specified folder, delete unwanted files, and launch the appropriate application to view or play a file in the list. To delete files or copy files between folders 1. Select Files. 2. Select the Type of file to move or delete. 3. Select the Location folder. 4. Tap one or more checkboxes to select the files to copy or delete. 5. To copy files, tap Copy and select the destination folder. To delete files, tap Delete. You will be asked to confirm. Uninstalling applications If you uninstall an application, you can always reinstall it if you want to use it later. To uninstall applications 1. Select Uninstall. A list of applications that can be uninstalled is shown. 2. Select the application to uninstall. 3. Select Uninstall. Note You cannot uninstall the standard applications that came with your P900. WIM PIN settings WIM (WAP Identity Module) is used for performing security functions, especially to store and process information required for user identification and authentication. It is a tamper-resistant store for private keys, certificates and other items that may require a PIN for access or modification. The WIM management dialog consists of a PIN selection list and a WIM items list. You can select a PIN from the PIN selection list. The WIM items list changes content dynamically, displaying only the keys that are protected by the selected PIN and also have an associated certificate. Other keys that are protected by the selected PIN but do not have an associated certificate are not shown in the WIM item list. This is the case when WIM PIN

(PIN-G) is selected. Note The PIN-G applies to the whole WIM and any items that do not have a different PIN. This means that no specific items on the WIM are linked to PIN-G. You can change the status of a PIN:

Control panel 161 Enable PIN A PIN code that is enabled is requested for authorization of an operation. To proceed with the operation, you must enter the PIN code. Disable PIN A PIN code that is disabled is not requested to authorize an operation to proceed. To change the PIN code 1. Select the PIN you want to change from the choice list. 2. Select Change PIN. If a PIN code has been blocked, you must unblock it before it can be used again. Select the PIN and select Change PIN. 162 Control panel Getting started with Internet and Messaging Introduction Before you can use Internet and send or receive messages, you must make some user-specific settings in the Messaging to access the Control Panel. Internet and Service provider You will need a service provider to connect your P900 to the network.The service provider could be:

An Internet Service Provider (ISP) that connects you to the Internet. An access point provided by your network operator. A private service provider such as your company or bank. You will need to enter specific service provider details into your P900 to set up an Internet account. It can hold the details of multiple service providers, for example, you may have separate Internet and corporate accounts. Your network operator or retailer may have preinstalled services; check with them. Connection type When your P900 connects to a service provider, it will use a GSM or GPRS network provided by a network operator. Many network operators offer both GPRS and GSM services. The connection type defines which network your account uses to connect to the Internet. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network, and Dialup Internet accounts use the GSM network. GPRS If your network operator supports GPRS, a GPRS Internet account allows you to:

Remain permanently connected to the Internet without being charged for connection time. With a GPRS account, you are charged for the amount of information you view, download or send while connected to the Internet. Consult your operator for details of your subscription. Avoid having to reconnect to the Internet if the connection is interrupted. Dialup For both Dialup and High-Speed Dialup accounts, you are charged for the length of time you are connected. If your network operator supports them, you can increase your connection speed (at a cost) by setting up a high-speed account. Getting started with Internet and Messaging 163 email accounts Messaging settings, your P900 supports the automatic Automatically set up service provider and messaging The easiest way to set up your P900 is automatically, through your service provider. For setup of:

MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service) settings. Check your service provider's Web site for information or contact their support desk and inquire about automatic remote configuration of ISP (Internet Service Provider) settings, email and MMS message settings. If remote configuration is possible, they will send you the auto-

configuration messages required via an SMS message. Settings valid for your network operator and one or more of these services may also be available through the phone configurator utility at www.SonyEricsson.com To check that your SMS messaging settings are correct 1. Select Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >

SMS. 2. Check the information, for example the address of the service center. Accepting new Internet or Messaging settings New configuration messages will appear in the Auto setup account inbox of Messaging. (Configuration messages for email accounts will, however, be found in your SMS message inbox.) When an auto setup message appears, select it. A dialog with a brief text and operator message appears on the screen. You can accept the new settings or leave the message in the inbox. If the name of the new account is the same as that of an existing account, you can choose to create a new account with the same name or replace the existing account. Note Never accept remote configuration messages if you are not expecting them or are unsure where they have come from. Manually set up the service provider As an alternative to setting up an Internet account automatically, you can enter the settings manually from Connections > Internet accounts. Control panel >

164 Getting started with Internet and Messaging First collect all the information you require. You can obtain this information from your ISP (Internet Service Provider), or if you are connecting to a corporate network, your information services department. All settings are described in Internet accounts on page 147. To set up a new account, follow the steps under To create a new Internet account on page 148. Manually set up Messaging As an alternative to setting up Messaging automatically, you can enter the settings for the messaging services you want to use yourself from accounts. First collect all the information you require. You can obtain this information from the following sources:

If your network operator offers an email service, you can get the necessary details from them. Control panel > Connections > Messaging Your Internet Service Provider. Your information services manager, if you connect to the corporate network to access your work email account. Your network operator, in the case of SMS message and Cell Broadcast Services. The dialog has four tabs, one for each type of messaging service:

email The provider of your email service, or for a corporate account, your information services manager, can provide you with the necessary details. All settings are described in Email tab on page 152. To set up a new account, follow the steps under To create a new email account on page 152. Short Message Service The necessary settings are usually provided on your SIM card. All settings are described in SMS tab on page 154. Multimedia Messaging Service Your MMS messaging provider will be able to provide you with the necessary information. Before you set up MMS messaging, you need to set up an Internet account in Control panel > Connections > Internet accounts and a WAP account in Control panel >

Connections > WAP accounts All settings are described in MMS tab on page 154. Cell Broadcast Service: Area and Cell information Your network operator will be able to inform you if these services are available. All settings are described in Area tab on page 155. SMS message MMS message Area Getting started with Internet and Messaging 165 Setting up WAP accounts A WAP account (sometimes called a WAP profile) defines a service provider and gateway that should be used when making a connection to WAP services. You also need a WAP account when you use MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service). The WAP gateway sits between your P900 and the WAP site coding and decoding information. You can set up details of more than one gateway if necessary, for example one for your MMS messaging, one to access corporate data over WAP, and another to access your bank's WAP service. The easiest way to set up a WAP account on your P900 is automatically, via your service provider. Check your service provider's Web site for information or contact their support desk and ask about automatic setup. You can also find more information, and settings for many operators on:

http://www.SonyEricsson.com/support. Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must select one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a new one. Manually set up a WAP account Instead of setting up a WAP account automatically, you can enter the settings manually from WAP accounts. Control panel > Connections >

First collect all the information you require. You can obtain this information from the WAP service provider, or if you are connecting to a corporate network, your information services manager. All settings are described in WAP accounts on page 156. To set up a new account, follow the steps under To create a new WAP account on page 157. Using your P900 as a modem Your P900 contains a complete GSM/GPRS modem, so you can use it to connect your PC to the Internet or corporate intranet.Your P900 appears to the laptop like a normal modem. You link the laptop to your P900 using Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared, or cable (USB or serial).The connection over the air can be by any of the bearers that your P900 supports:

GPRS HSCSD (High-speed Circuit-Switched Data) CSD (Circuit-Switched Data). A Windows modem driver file and a PC utility, the Dialup Networking Wizard, is provided on your PC Suite for P900 CD. The wizard will help you configure DUN (Dialup Networking) entries on your PC for GPRS and HSCSD connections. 166 Getting started with Internet and Messaging Once paired with a Bluetooth-enabled laptop, your P900 is ready to make a connection to the Internet or corporate network. Because Bluetooth is wireless and requires no line-of-sight alignment, you can place the laptop in a comfortable position and let your P900 remain in your pocket, briefcase, or even be placed up to 10 meters away. If you wish to use an infrared link, the range is typically up to 1 meter. The two infrared ports must be kept in line of sight, at an angle of no more than approximately 30 degrees. The Dialup Networking Wizard The wizard simplifies the creation of GPRS DUN connections by setting the proper values in the PC DUN entry and linking the entry to one of the GPRS configurations in your P900. You can also view and modify the GPRS settings in the P900. For HSCSD DUN entries, it updates the modem settings such that the specified data rate and type of bearer (ISDN / Analog) will be used when you make a DUN connection. You can view or change the DUN entries created with the wizard using the standard Windows DUN user interface. The Dialup Networking Wizard software included in the PC Suite for P900 must be installed in your PC and your P900 must be connected to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. See Connecting to other devices on page 127. Ensure you have any information concerning, for example, phone numbers, names of servers or domains, that the server that you want to connect to may require. To set up a GPRS or HSCSD (High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data) connection using the Dialup Networking Wizard 1. Start the Dialup Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson folder on the Start menu on your PC. 2. Choose Create a new Dialup connection. 3. Follow the instructions in the wizard. To edit a previously created DUN entry 1. Start the Dialup Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson folder on the Start menu on your PC. 2. Modify a Dialup connection. 3. Select the desired connection from the list. 4. Follow the instructions in the wizard. To define P900 as a modem To set up a CSD (GSM Data) or HSCSD connection, you will need to manually install your P900 as a modem. To set up a Dialup entry for CSD or HSCSD 1. On the PC, open the Control Panel. 2. Choose to install a new modem. Getting started with Internet and Messaging 167 3. Select your P900 as the modem. 4. Select the port to which the P900 is connected. 5. Confirm the selection. A new DUN connection is created. Connecting To connect using a DUN entry created by the wizard 1. If you are connecting by cable, set your P900 to Modem cable connection mode; see Cable on page 146. 2. Use any conventional method to make a connection:

Click the Desktop shortcut created by the wizard. Select the entry from within the system DUN folder. Run an application that has built-in support for using DUN entries (for example, a browser or email client). GPRS - connection information Icons on the status bar give you an overview of the information on data connection calls. A combined signal strength and GPRS signal icon provides information on the GPRS service status. The GPRS connection status appears above the signal strength icon. There are three states for the icon, unavailable attached

, available and

. and GPRS The HSCSD/CSD icons are displayed during a data connection. Where GPRS is suspended, for example, the GPRS suspended state is indicated by a combined icon There are three states for the GPRS icon: Active active transferring data (alternates between and suspended activates the GPRS active icon for 5 seconds. Any data transfer either received or sent and

, Connection information When you select the data connection icon, during an active data connection, a menu appears with the options Information and Disconnect. Select Information to view information on the connection. Select Disconnect to end the connection. GPRS status information When the signal strength icon is selected, network, GPRS status information and, if applicable, GPRS error text appear. GPRS data log A new GPRS data log entry is created when a GPRS account establishes a connection for the first time. It does not wait for transfer data. If there is an existing data log associated with the current GPRS connection, it is updated. 168 Getting started with Internet and Messaging Session data When the connection is deactivated, for example when the current Internet account is disconnected, the total data sent and received in the last session is displayed. The information is displayed for a couple of seconds. To dismiss the information when the Flip is closed, press

. The GPRS data log shows a list of GPRS Internet accounts. Where one account is active or suspended, the relevant status icon is displayed to the left of the account. To view information on an account 1. Select an account in the list. 2. Information on the account is shown. The data log is updated dynamically. Buttons allow you to delete or reset the current data. These buttons are disabled during an active or suspended connection. To delete the log for an account 1. Select an account in the list. 2. Select GPRS data log > Delete. To reset the log for an account 1. Select an account from the list. 2. Select GPRS data log > Reset. To delete or reset the logs of several accounts 1. Select the checkboxes of the accounts in the list to be deleted or reset. 2. Select GPRS data log > Reset or GPRS data log > Delete. Getting started with Internet and Messaging 169 REFERENCE Troubleshooting This chapter consists of a selection of suggestions for solving possible problems with your P900. If this does not help, please try the Solution Finder on www.SonyEricsson.com/support. There you can also find other information that can be helpful. Startup problems The P900 will not start Handheld phone: recharge or replace the battery. Ensure the contacts on the battery and charger are clean and avoid charging the battery in extreme temperatures. Vehicle Hands-free: check that the P900 is properly inserted into the holder and check the fuse in the fuse holder (connected to the battery cable). Lock problems Insert card Ensure a SIM card is activated and inserted into your P900. See SIM card on page 11. Blocked SIM card If your PIN is entered incorrectly three times in a row, the SIM card will be blocked. You can unblock it by using your PUK. See SIM card lock on page 35. Does not flash Device lock Phone locked is displayed followed by the prompt Enter lock code. Your P900 is locked to prevent unauthorized use. To unlock the P900:

Enter your device lock code, 0000 by default, then press or

. Key symbol Indicator light Flashes red The keypad is locked to prevent unintentional key action. Press keys. to unlock the followed by This indicates that the battery is running low and soon needs recharging or replacing with a spare. With Vehicle Hands-free (VHF) equipment, Ensure the following are inserted or connected:

your P900 and its holder, the fuse in the fuse holder, and/or the external antenna. If the indicator light at the top of your P900 does not flash and no network is displayed, there is no network within range. See Phone does not work on page 171. 170 Troubleshooting Communication problems Phone does not work The received signal can be too weak, possibly because you are being shielded from the signal. Check your display signal strength indicator. Move outdoors or up from the ground to obtain a sufficiently strong signal. Ensure the P900 is not set in Flight mode. Your P900 might be busy sending or receiving data or email. Check the settings for forwarding or restricting calls. See Forward calls on page 52, Accepted callers on page 52 and Restrict calls on page 53. If Emergency calls only is displayed on the screen, you are not allowed to use the network within range. You can, however, usually make an emergency call using the emergency number. If No network is displayed on the screen, you are in an area that is not covered by a network or the received signal is too weak. Cannot hear incoming call Increase the ringtone volume. Increase the ringtone volume. The person I talk to has problems hearing what I say Ensure you do not cover the microphone when you talk. You find the microphone at the bottom, next to the connector. You could be almost outside the network range. The sound improves with a better network connection. Cannot use WAP Cannot send or receive SMS or MMS Your subscription does not include WAP. Check with your service provider. The settings are not correct. Enter new settings. Contact you service provider or visit www.SonyEricsson.com/support and use the WAP configurator. Your subscription does not include SMS or MMS. Check with your service provider. Check with you service provider that you have entered the correct Service Center phone number. Check the settings in the Control panel. Contact you service provider or visit www.SonyEricsson.com/support and use the MMS configurator. Ensure Flight mode is deactivated. Phone memory might be full. Delete some pictures or music, for example. Troubleshooting 171 Fax calls Your P900 does not support fax transmission. Even if your operator subscription supports fax transmission, fax calls will be rejected. However, they can be forwarded to another number such as the office fax number, see Forward calls on page 52 for more information. Ensure potential fax callers do not try to send a fax to your P900, as they can experience a number of retries before the fax transmission is stopped. Problems connecting to a PC or another device Not possible to establish connection using cable Ensure the correct COM port on the PC is Ensure the Sync Station and cable is correctly connected to the PC. enabled. Right-click the P900 link symbol on the PC taskbar, and select Properties. Select the USB COM port. Uninstall PC suite for P900. Connect the Sync Station with the P900 to the PC. Reinstall PC suite for P900, following the installation procedure thoroughly. Check for PC suite for P900 updates on www.SonyEricsson.com/support. If you find a new version of the program, download it and install it instead of the old one. Cannot transfer pictures Place the P900 in the Sync Station. In the PC, open My P900 and browse through the P900 file system to find the picture. Ensure Bluetooth wireless technology is activated. Ensure the devices are in range with each other. Maximum range is 10 meters. Ensure the devices are correctly paired. See Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology on page 129. Ensure the handset or hands-free is charged. Ensure the devices are within range of each other. Cannot transfer items with Bluetooth wireless technology Cannot establish connection with a Bluetooth wireless technology handset or hands-free Memory full When your P900 has no more space available to save or store information, a message is displayed. You must then free up memory to ensure the proper functioning of the P900. Ensure regular backups are made with Communications Suite to reduce the risk of lost or corrupted information. Storage manager Use the storage manager to move items from the P900 internal memory to a Memory Stick Duo, or remove items from the P900 memory. 172 Troubleshooting To start the storage manager Select Applications >

Control Information in applications panel > Device > Storage manager. A list of all applications and their memory requirements is shown. See Deleting or copying general files on page 161 and Deleting information from applications on page 160. Use the applications to remove unused or old items from the P900 internal memory:

WAP history or bookmarks. Messages. Contacts. Call logs. Calendar tasks or appointments. Jotter notes. Applications stop responding System failure Close the Flip and open it again. Turn off the P900 and turn it on again. Remove the battery, wait about 10 seconds, then reinsert it. Phone memory might be full. Delete some pictures or music, for example. If the problem continues, do a master reset. See Master reset on page 159. All data will be lost. In the case of a system failure, your P900 will flash an animated warning. To recover, please restart the P900 like this:

Press and hold the On/Off button for at least 10 seconds to turn the P900 off. Restart as normal: Press the On/Off button to turn on your P900. Miscellaneous Cannot save on Memory Stick Duo You might have a Memory Stick Duo with a lock switch. Move the switch in the other direction. The Memory Stick Duo might be full. Delete some files from it. Cannot change language except to the language I selected when I first started The first time you start the P900, you select a language. All other languages are then deleted, in order to free up memory. You can find all languages on the PC suite for P900 CD. From the CD, you can install the language you want. Troubleshooting 173 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read this information before using your mobile phone. Note Important: to avoid hearing impairment, answer call or lower volume before placing this product to your ear. Recommendations Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place. Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity. Do not expose your product to extreme high or low temperatures. Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco products. Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product. Do not paint your product. Do not use your product near medical equipment without requesting permission. Do not use your product when in, or around aircraft, or areas posted turn off two-way radio. Do not use your product in an area where a potentially explosive atmosphere exists. Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the area above your cars airbag. Do not attempt to disassemble your product. Only Sony Ericsson authorized personnel should perform any service. Antenna Only use an antenna that has been specifically designed by Sony Ericsson for your mobile phone. Use of unauthorized or modified antennas could damage your mobile phone and may violate regulations, causing loss of performance and SAR levels above the recommended limits (see below). Efficient use Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the top of the phone when in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times. Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is turned on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or radio frequency fields). Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety guidelines, developed by scientific organizations, e.g. ICNIRP (International Com-

mission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) and IEEE (The Institute of Electri-

cal and Electronics Engineers Inc.), through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels of radio wave expo-

sure for the general population. The levels include a safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, and to account for any variations in measurements. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio frequency energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR value is determined at the highest certified power level in laboratory conditions, but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone while operating can be well below this value. This is because the mobile phone is designed to use the minimum power required to reach the network. Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that there are variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among mobile phones, all Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to meet radio frequency exposure guidelines. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certi-

fied to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-

adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (that is, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when the handset is positioned a minimum of 15 mm from the body without any metal parts in the vicinity of the phone or when used with the original Sony Ericsson body worn accessory intended for this phone. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. A separate leaflet with SAR information for this mobile phone model is included with the material that comes with this mobile phone. This information can also be found, together with more information on radio frequency exposure and SAR, on www.SonyEricsson.com. 174 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Driving Please check if local laws and regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while driving or require drivers to use handsfree solutions. We recommend that you use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson handsfree solutions intended for use with your product. Please note that because of possible interference with other equipment, some vehicle manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles unless a handsfree kit with an external antenna supports the installation. Always give full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Personal Medical Devices Mobile phones may affect the operation of cardiac pacemakers and other implanted equipment. Please avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker, e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the mobile phone, place it at the ear oppo-

site the pacemaker. If a minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) is kept between the mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk of interference is limited. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, immediately turn off your mobile phone. Contact your cardiologist for more information. For other medical devices, please consult the manufacturer of the device. Children DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR COULD ACCIDENTALLY DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCESSO-

RIES. YOUR MOBILE PHONE AND ITS ACCESSORIES MAY CONTAIN SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BE DETACHED AND CREATE A CHOKING HAZARD. Disposing of the Product Your mobile phone should not be placed in municipal waste. Please check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Power Supply Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as marked on the product. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be subjected to damage or stress. To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the unit from any power source before attempting to clean it. The AC power adapter must not be used out-

doors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug. If the plug will not fit into the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Emergency Calls Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection under all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any mobile phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain net-

work services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local ser-

vice provider. Emergency Response Center Location Technology. Using wireless technology to help find you in case of an emergency is a goal shared by the entire wireless industry, local phone companies and the emergency response centers. Your phone may support an emergency positioning system being implemented by some service providers. But the complexity of mobile communi-

cation technology, combined with related implementation technologies, means that your wireless carrier, the local phone companies, and emergency response centers all have a role to play in implementing this capability. So even if your phone supports this technology and even if the locating features works in one area there is no guarantee that it will work in all areas for all calls to emergency response centers. Always review with an emergency response center all location data you have, including intersecting streets, as well as any landmarks, to assist in locating you. Sony Ericsson is committed to continuing to work with the entire communications industry to improve location features for emergency response. Sony Ericsson is not liable for any service(s) including operation, coverage, or range of the network services provided by network carriers independent of Sony Ericsson. Guidelines for safe and efficient use 175 Battery Use and Care We recommend that you fully charge the battery before you use your mobile phone for the first time. The battery can only be charged in temperatures between +5C

(+41F) and +45C (+113F). A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced capacity the first few times it is used. The talk and standby times depend on the actual transmission conditions when using the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is used near a base station, less power is required and talk and standby times are prolonged. Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire. Use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original batteries and chargers intended for use with your mobile phone. Other chargers may not charge sufficiently or may produce excessive heat. Using other batteries and chargers could be dangerous. Do not expose the battery to liquid. Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch another metal object. This could short-circuit and damage the battery. Do not disassemble or modify the battery. Do not expose the battery to extreme temperatures, and never above +60C (+140F). For maximum battery capacity, use the battery in room temperature. Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery. Keep out of the reach of children. Use the battery for the intended purpose only. Do not allow the battery to be put into the mouth. Battery electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed. Disposing of the product. Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Center for information. The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Use a bat-

tery disposal facility if available. Limited warranty Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, S-221 88 Lund, Sweden, (Sony Eric-

sson), provides this Limited Warranty for your mobile phone and original acces-

sory delivered with your mobile phone (hereinafter referred to as "Product"). Should your Product need warranty service, please return it to the dealer from whom it was purchased, or contact your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Center

(national rates may apply) or visit www.SonyEricsson.com to obtain further infor-

mation. Our warranty Subject to the conditions of this Limited Warranty, Sony Ericsson warrants this Product to be free from defects in design, material and workmanship at the time of its original purchase by a consumer, and for a subsequent period of one (1) year. What we will do If, during the warranty period, this Product fails to operate under normal use and service, due to defects in design, materials or workmanship, Sony Ericsson author-

ized distributors or service partners, in the country/region* where you purchased the Product, will, at their option, either repair or replace the Product in accordance with the terms and conditions stipulated herein. Sony Ericsson and its service partners reserve the right to charge a handling fee if a returned Product is found not to be under warranty according to the conditions below. Please note that your personal settings/downloads might be lost when the Product is repaired or replaced. Conditions 1. The warranty is valid only if the original proof of purchase issued to the original purchaser by a dealer authorized by Sony Ericsson for this Product, specifying the date of purchase and serial number**, is presented with the Product to be repaired or replaced. Sony Ericsson reserves the right to refuse warranty service if this information has been removed or changed after the original purchase of the Product from the dealer. 176 Guidelines for safe and efficient use The warranty provided does not affect the consumer's statutory rights under appli-

cable legislation in force, nor the consumer's rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase contract.

* European Union (EU) If you have purchased your Product in an EU country you can have your Product serviced, under the conditions set out above, within the warranty period in any EU country where an identical Product is sold by an authorized Sony Ericsson distrib-

utor. To find out if your Product is sold in the EU country you are in, please call the local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Center. Please observe that certain services may not be possible anywhere other than in the country of original purchase, for example due to the fact that your Product may have an interior or exterior which is different from equivalent models sold in other EU countries. It may not be possible to repair SIM-locked Products.

** In some countries/regions additional information is requested. If so, this is clearly shown on the valid proof of purchase. 2. If Sony Ericsson repairs or replaces the Product, the repaired or replaced Product shall be warranted for the remaining time of the original warranty period or for ninety (90) days from the date of repair, whichever is longer. Repair or replacement may involve the use of functionally equivalent reconditioned units. Replaced parts or components will become the property of Sony Ericsson. 3. This warranty does not cover any failure of the Product due to normal wear and tear, or due to misuse, including but not limited to use in other than the normal and customary manner, in accordance with the Sony Ericsson instructions for use and maintenance of the Product. Nor does this warranty cover any failure of the Product due to accident, software or hardware modification or adjustment, acts of God or damage resulting from liquid. 4. Since the cellular system on which the Product is to operate is provided by a carrier independent from Sony Ericsson, Sony Ericsson will not be responsible for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of that system. 5. This warranty does not cover Product failures caused by installations, modifications, or repair or opening of the Product performed by a non-Sony Ericsson authorized person. 6. The warranty does not cover Product failures which have been caused by use of accessories or other peripheral devices which are not Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original accessories intended for use with the Product. 7. Tampering with any of the seals on the Product will void the warranty. 8. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, OTHER THAN THIS PRINTED LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ERICSSON OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS, TO THE FULL EXTENT THOSE DAMAGES CAN BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Some countries/states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or con-

sequential damages, or limitation of the duration of implied warranties, so the pre-

ceding limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. Guidelines for safe and efficient use 177 FCC Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Environmental information Halogenated flame retardants are not used in cabinets or the printed wiring board of the phone. Power consumption of charger during standby < 0.3W. For more environmental information, look at the Environmental Declaration for P900 at www.SonyEricsson.com Declaration of Conformity We, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB of Nya Vattentornet S-221 88 Lund, Sweden declare under our sole responsibility that our product Sony Ericsson type FAB 1021011-BV and FAB 1021011-CN and in combination with our accessories, to which this declaration relates is in con-

formity with the appropriate standards 3GPP TS 51.010-1, EN 301489-7, EN 300328, EN 300826 and EN 60950, following the provisions of, Radio Equip-

ment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment directive 99/5/EC with require-

ments covering EMC directive 89/336/EEC, and Low Voltage directive 73/23/

EEC. Kista, October 2003 Place & date of issue 0682 Hiroshi Yoshioka, Head of Product Business Unit GSM/UMTS We fulfil the requirements of the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC). 178 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Terms and definitions AU Format for audio data files .AU files have the suffix .au bps Bits per second rate of data flow. Bearer Path over which data flows. Specifically in CSD and HSCSD, the type of phone link from the GSM network to the server PSTN or ISDN. Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology is a secure, fast radio connection technology. It is a computing and telecommunications industry specification that describes how cellphones, computers, and personal digital assistants (PDAs) can easily interconnect with each other and with home and business phones and computers using a short-range wireless connection. BMP Microsoft Windows Bitmap. A graphics format defined by Microsoft supporting 1, 4, 8 or 24-bit color depth. No compression, so file size can be large. Bookmark A URL and header/title stored in the phone, enabling the user to go directly to a Web or WAP page. cHTML A version of HTML optimized for small devices. CLI Caller Line Identification. Shows the number of the person calling you in your cellphone display. Your P900 will also display the name and photograph of the caller if they are in Contacts. You can then make an informed choice as to whether or not to take the call. Bear in mind that not all numbers can be displayed. To use this service, it must be supported by your network. COM Port Defines a serial/RS-232 port within the Windows environment. CS Circuit-Switched. Connection from A to B which has a fixed bandwidth and is maintained over a period of time, for example a voice phone call. CSD Circuit-Switched Data. CSD is a GSM service providing a CS data connection at a rate of 9.6 or 14.4 kbps. Terms and definitions 179 CSS Cascading Stylesheet. A feature of browsers. DTMF Dual-Tone Multifrequency. A method of coding digits as a combination of two audible tones. DUN Dialup Networking. The dialup networking capability in Windows. e-GSM Extended GSM. New frequencies specified by the European Radio Communications Committee (ERC) for GSM use when additional spectrum is needed (network-dependent). It allows operators to transmit and receive just outside GSM's core 900MHz frequency band. This extension gives increased network capability. EMS Enhanced Messaging Service. An extension of SMS enabling pictures, animations, sound and text formatting to be added to text messages. FCC Federal Communications Commission. US government agency which regulates radio communications. GIF Graphics Interchange Format. Format for storing images that also supports animated images. Highly compressed by limiting the color palette to 16 or 256 colors. It is one of the two most common file formats for graphic images on the Web. The other is JPEG. GPRS General Packet Radio Services. A radio technology for GSM networks that adds packet-switching protocols, shorter setup time for ISP connections, and the possibility of charging by the amount of data sent rather than by connection time. GPRS promises to support flexible data transmission rates typically up to 20 or 30 kbps (with a theoretical maximum of 171.2 kbps), as well as continuous connection to the network. GSM Global System for Mobile Communications. GSM is the world's most widely-used digital cellphone system, now operating in over 160 countries around the world. GSM 900 The GSM system family includes GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900. GSM 900 refers to GSM working on a frequency of 900 MHz. 180 Terms and definitions GSM 1800 Also known as DCS 1800 or PCN, this is a GSM digital network working at a frequency of 1800 MHz. It is used in Europe and Asia-Pacific. GSM 1900 Also known as PCS. Refers to a GSM system running in the 1900 MHz band. Used for example in the USA and Canada. HSCSD High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data (HSCSD) is circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates of up to 64 kbps. HTML Hypertext Markup Language is the set of markup symbols or codes inserted in a file intended for display on a Web browser page. The markup tells the Web browser how to display a Web page's words and images. HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol. The communications protocol used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary function is to establish a connection with a Web server and transmit HTML pages to the client browser. IMAP4 Internet Message Access Protocol (the latest version is IMAP4) is a standard client/server protocol for accessing email from your local server. The email is received and held for you by your IMAP server. You (or your client email receiver) can view just the heading and the sender of the letter and then decide whether to download the mail. IrDA The Infrared Data Association is dedicated to developing standards for wireless, infrared transmission systems between devices. With IrDA ports, a device such as your P900 can exchange data with other devices without a cable connection. IrDA requires line-of-sight transmission. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. Communication protocol offered by phone companies that permits phone networks to carry data, voice, and other source traffic. Selecting ISDN for CSD/HSCSD connections provides quicker call setup. ISP Internet Service Provider. An organization that provides access to the Internet. JFIF JPEG File Interchange Format. Terms and definitions 181 JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group, best known for the .JPG format for still image compression. MBM Multiple Bit Map. Symbian OS bitmap format. MeT Mobile Electronic Transactions. An initiative founded by Ericsson, Nokia and Motorola to establish a secure and consistent framework for mobile transactions. MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a protocol designed for recording and playback of music on digital synthesizers that is supported by many brands of personal computer sound cards. MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. A protocol defining how messages are sent on the Internet. For example, MIME is used to describe how attachments are encoded and what type of data they contain. MMS Multimedia Messaging Service. Logical extension of SMS and EMS. MMS defines a service enabling sound, images and video to be combined into multimedia messages. It supports photo quality pictures, and sounds in WAV, MIDI, AMR, or Melodies format. MP3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 is a standard technology and format for compression a sound sequence into a very small file (about one-

twelfth the size of the original file) while almost preserving the original level of sound quality when it is played. MPEG-4 The Moving Picture Experts Group, develops standards for digital video and digital audio compression. It operates under the auspices of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). MPEG-4 goes far beyond compression methods. Instead of treating the data as continuous streams, MPEG-4 deals with audio/video items that can be manipulated independently, allowing for interaction with the coded data and providing flexibility in editing. MPEG-4 supports a wide range of audio and video modes and transmission speeds. OS Operating System, such as Symbian OS, Linux, Microsoft Windows. 182 Terms and definitions OTA Over-The-Air. A technology for transmission and reception of application related configuration information in a wireless communications system. PC Personal Computer. PCS Personal Communications Services, often used to describe GSM 1900 networks. PDA Personal Digital Assistant. A handheld computer having functions such as an address book, calendar, etc. PDF Portable Document Format. A format created by Adobe for storing and distributing documents. Phone book A memory in the SIM card where phone numbers can be stored and accessed by name or position. PIM Personal Information Management. Generic term for applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, etc. PIN A PIN is a personal identification number. PINs are commonly assigned to bank customers for use with automatic cash dispensers. They are also used, sometimes with a security token, for individual access to computer networks or other secure systems. PNG Portable Network Graphics. Format for storing images on file with data compression but without lowering of quality (loss of information). POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 is a standard client-server protocol for receiving email. The email is received and held for you by your POP server. Periodically, the P900 Messaging application can check your mailbox on the server and download any emails. Protocol In information technology, a protocol is the special set of rules that end points in a telecommunication connection use when they communicate. Protocols exist at several levels in a telecommunication connection. QQVGA Quarter Quarter VGA, 160 x 120 pixels. Terms and definitions 183 QVGA Quarter VGA size, typically refers to a portrait-oriented screen 240 pixels wide x 320 pixels high. RS232 A standard for serial transmission between computers and peripheral devices SC Service Center (for SMS). Service Provider A company that provides services and subscriptions to cellphone users. SGML A generic markup language for representing documents. SIM A SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a smart card, inserted into GSM phones, that contains your phone account information. SIM cards can also be programmed to display custom menus for personalized services, for instance to assist operators in providing mobile e-commerce applications. SMS Short Message Service. Allows messages of up to 160 characters to be sent and received via the network operator's message center to a cellphone. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to send email from an email client via an SMTP server. SWIM A SWIM card is a SIM card containing a WIM. SyncML SyncML is a universal protocol for data synchronization, developed by the SyncML Initiative Ltd. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the basic communication language or protocol of the Internet. It can also be used as a communications protocol in a private network

(either an intranet or an extranet). TLS Transport Layer Security. Used by Web browsers, for example. SMIL Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language. Used by MMS to describe how media items are to be played. URL Uniform Resource Locator. Points to a service or information on the Internet, for example: http://www.SonyEricsson.com 184 Terms and definitions USB Universal Serial Bus. A plug-and-play interface between a computer and add-on devices (such as audio players, joysticks, keyboards, phones, scanners, and printers). With USB, a new device can be added to your computer without having to add an adapter card or even having to turn the computer off. USSD Unstructured Supplementary Services Data. Narrowband GSM data service. For example, entering *79*1234# might return the stock price for stock 1234. vCal; vCalendar vCalendar defines a transport and platform-independent format for exchanging calendar and scheduling information for use in PIMs/PDAs and group schedulers. vCalendar is specified by IETF. vCard vCard automates the exchange of personal information typically found on a traditional business card, for use in applications such as Web mail, voicemail, Web browsers, phone applications, call centers, video conferencing, PIMs /PDAs, pagers, fax, office equipment, and smart cards. vCard is specified by IETF. VGA Video Graphics Array. Graphics standard introduced by IBM, with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels. VPN Virtual Private Network. A private network that is configured within a public network. A VPN appear as private national or international network to the customer, but physically shares a backbone trunk with other customers. VPNs enjoy the security of a private network via access control and encryption, while taking advantage of the economies of scale and built-in management facilities of large public networks. Today, there is tremendous interest in VPNs on the Internet, especially due to the constant threat of hacker attacks. WAP Wireless Application Protocol is a specification for a set of communication protocols to standardize the way that wireless devices, such as cellphones and radio transceivers, can be used for Internet access, including email, the Web and newsgroups. WAV A Wave file is an audio file format, created by Microsoft, that has become a standard PC audio file format for everything from system and game sounds to CD-quality audio. A Wave file is identified by a file name extension WAV (.wav). WBXML Wireless Binary Extensible Markup Language. Terms and definitions 185 XML Extensible Markup Language. An initiative from the W3C defining an extremely simple dialect of SGML suitable for use on the WWW. WIM The Wireless Identity Module is a data module for electronic identity certificates. It can contain both trusted and client certificates, private keys and algorithms needed for WTLS handshaking, encryption, decryption, and signature generation. The WIM module can be placed on a SIM card, called a SWIM card. WML Wireless Markup Language. A markup language used for authoring services, fulfilling the same purpose as HyperText Markup Language (HTML) on the World Wide Web (WWW). In contrast to HTML, WML is designed to fit small handheld devices. WTLS Wireless Transport Layer Security. Part of WAP, WTLS provides privacy, data integrity and authentication at the transport layer level between two applications. W3C The main standards body for the WWW. xHTML Extensible Hypertext Markup Language. A reformulation of HTML 4.01 in XML. Being XML, means that XHTML can be viewed, edited, and validated with standard XML tools. At the same time, it operates as well as or better than HTML 4 in existing HTML 4-conformant user agents. 186 Terms and definitions Antenna Speech coding P900 standard version, Latin character set 115 x 57 x 24 mm 150 grams with battery and Flip. Technical data General Product Size Weight System and power class E-GSM 900 Class 4 GSM 1800 Class 1 GSM 1900 Class 1 Built in HR, FR, EFR supported where available, for high speech quality. Small plug-in card, 3V or 5V type Symbian OS v7.0 with UIQ v2.1 user interface and applications environment ARM 9 For settings, user data (for example images, contacts, messages) and third-party applications: up to 16 MB Memory Stick Duo, up to 128 MB supported. 32 MB Memory stick Duo supplied, plus adapter. 15 to +55 C Processor Internal User storage SIM Card Operating system Operating temperature Additional storage Screen Screen type Screen size Pixel size Color resolution Screen surface Illumination TFT Flip closed: 208 x 208 pixels, 40 x 40 mm Flip open: 208 x 320 pixels, 40 x 61 mm 0.192 x 0.192 mm, or 132 ppi (pixels per inch) 16-bit (65k colors) Touch-sensitive Variable intensity backlight Third-party application support SDKs C++, PersonalJava PJAE 1.1.1a, J2ME MIDP 2.0

/ CLDC HI 1.0 with JSR 120 and JSR 82 (partly), AppForge Microsoft Visual Basic v6 C++ or Java applications in Symbian SIS format. MIDP installation (JAR/JAD) from browser or connected PC. Support for signed applications. Load formats Security Bluetooth wireless technology Bluetooth compatibility statement Coverage area This product is manufactured to comply with the Bluetooth specification 1.1. Up to 10 meters (33 feet) Technical data 187 Infrared transceiver Data transmission rate Max speed between phone and IrDA device (that is a PC or another phone) SIR: up to 115,200 bps GPRS maximum data rates (kbps) CS-1 9.05 kbps 36.2 9.05 CS-2 13.4 kbps 53.6 13.4 CS-3 15.6 kbps 62.4 15.6 CS-4 21.4 kbps 85.6 21.4 4 + 1 Rx Tx Speed achieved depends on the Coding Scheme supported by the GSM Network. HSCSD maximum data rates (kbps) 9.6 kbps per time slot 2 + 1 Rx 19.2 9.6 Tx 14.4 kbps per time slot 28.8 14.4 Phone Personal ringtones -

supported formats 188 Sound clips as personal ringtones and default ringtone:

MP3, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, RMF (Beatnik) and WAV. Integrated CommuniCorder 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) Picture size 320 x 240 pixels (QVGA) 160 x 120 pixels (QQVGA) 176 x 144 pixels (QCIF) 24 bit (16 million colors) Still pictures: JPEG/JFIF, 3 quality (compression) levels, user-selectable. Video: MPEG4 video with AMR sound. Color depth Storage format Pictures (image viewer) Formats Sharing via JPEG, BMP, GIF (including animated), PNG, WBMP Infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology, MMS message, email, PC file transfer, Memory Stick Video player File Format

.MP4 (MPEG4), 3GP Music player File format

.MP3, WAV, AU, AMR and G-MIDI level 1 with 24 voices polyphony, RMF, iMelody Technical data Integrated browser Markup languages HTML 3.2 (excluding features not relevant to a small-screen device) WML 1.3 WBXML xHTML Basic xHTML Mobile Profile cHTML 2.0 Compiled WML scripts WCSS WBMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG WTLS Class 1, 2, 3 TLS/SSL WIM interface including SIM-WIM (SWIM) 15 - 120K user-configurable; 30K default. GSM and GPRS Up to 255 messages GIF (including animated), JPG, BMP, WBMP, PNG WAP version Scripting Stylesheets Images Security WIM Cache SMS Bearer Concatenated MMS Image formats Technical data Audio formats Video formats AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, WAV MP4 EMS Supported items Sounds, melodies, pictures, animations Email Incoming mail server support POP3, IMAP4 Outgoing mail server support SMTP Content coding Security Attachments MIME-compliant SMTP authentication, SSL-encrypted IMAP4 and SMTP Receiving and sending Document viewer Preinstalled viewers Microsoft Word Microsoft Excel Microsoft Powerpoint Adobe Acrobat (PDF) Support for additional file types can be installed from the Multimedia for P900 CD. Supplied on CD-

ROM Note The preinstalled viewer for Microsoft Word documents cannot be used to view files in Rich Text format (.RTF) A separate viewer must be installed to view these files. 189 Index

- handwriting 2, 34 A Accented letters Accepted callers 52 Accessories 23 Add to contacts 51 Alarm tones 138 Alarms 115 ALS

- settings 55

- support 48 Antenna 174 AoC - Call meter settings 54 Application shortcuts 136 Applications

- flip closed 15

- installing 124

- overview 24

- removing 126, 161 Area information 155 Attachments 90 B Background picture 136 Backing up data 134 190 Battery

- charging 12

- information 176

- inserting 11

- removing 11 Bluetooth wireless technology 129, 145

- Bluetooth share 131

- headphone 130

- pairing 129

- passcodes 131 Bookmarks 77 Browser view 74 Browsing the internet 73 C Cable 146 Calculator 112 Calendar 102

- creating entries 102

- managing entries 103

- preferences 104

- sending and receiving entries 104 Call costs 54 Call list 45 Call waiting 52 Calling cards 53 Calls

- answering 40, 43

- conference 44

- diverting 52

- emergency 39

- flip closed 38

- flip open 41

- incoming 43

- international 38

- making 38, 41

- options 41, 43

- preferences 50

- rejecting 40, 43

- restricting 53

- retrying automatically 42

- speed dialing 42

- two or more 44

- voice control 50

- recording video clips 56

- settings 59

- taking pictures 58 Camera Care instructions 174 Cell information 155 Certificate manager 157 Chess 81 Conference calls 44 Connecting

- via Bluetooth wireless technology 129

- via infrared port 128

- via SyncStation 127 Connection type 163 Connectivity software 127 Contacts 95

- adding images 137

- creating and managing contacts 98

- to add a contact 97

- to delete a contact 97 Control panel 139 Corporate phone services 49

- setup 54 D Data backup 134 Data restore 135 Data storage 30 Index Date settings 113 Demo application 24 Device lock 35, 170 Dialup Networking Wizard 167 Disk formatting 157 Display 139 Disposing of the battery 176 Diverting calls 52 Documents

- viewing 117 Drawing pictures 109 Driving 175 DTMF 47

- turning on 41 E Efficient use 174 Email 83, 89, 152 Emergency calls 39 EMS 85 Entering text

- flip closed 31

- flip open 32

- handwriting 33 Extended characters

- handwriting 35 Index F File manager 119 Find 28 First time start-up 13 Flight mode 47 Flip

- virtual 17 Flip closed 15 Flip open 16 Folders 27 Folders in Messaging 84 Formatting disks 157 G Games 81 General functions 27 Getting help 30 GPRS 163, 168 H Hands-free 51 Handwriting recognition 33

- accented letters 2, 34

- extended characters 35

- letters 2, 34

- numbers 2, 34 I Icons 20 Image editor 63 Image status 59 Importing phone book entries 13 Incoming call picture 50 Incoming calls 43 Increasing ring 142 Indicator light 170 Indicators 20 Infrared 128, 146 Inserting symbols 31 Installing applications 124 International calls 38 International settings 141 Internet 73

- accounts 147

- bookmarks 77

- browser view 74

- browsing 73

- signing documents 77

- user authentication request 77 Introduction to P900 8 IP security manager 157 J Jog Dial 18 Jotter 108

- creating and editing notes 108

- drawing pictures 109

- managing notes 109

- sending and receiving notes 109 K Key functions 112 Key lock 36 Keyboard 33 Keypad functions 19 L Languages 159 Letters Local synchronization 132 Locations 114 Lock problems 170 Locks 35

- handwriting 2, 34

- device 35

- key lock 36

- SIM card 35 M Making a call 96 Master reset 159 Media buffer 68 191 Medical Devices 175 Memory Stick Duo 21

- adapter 22

- formatting 157 Messaging 83

- accounts 85, 151

- attachments 90

- email 89

- folders 84

- MMS 86

- multimedia messages 86

- SMS 85

- text messages 85 MMS 83, 154 Mobile music 69 Modem 166 Multimedia for P900 123 Multimedia messages 83, 86 Music player 69 N Navigation 16 Networks 146 Notes 108

- creating and editing 108

- managing 109 192 Numbers

- sending and receiving 109

- formats 114

- handwriting 2, 34 O Off 13 On 13 Online services 121 On-screen keyboard 33 Operational modes 14 Options menu 15 Owner card 100 P P900 Locks 35 P900 overview 10 P900 package 9 PC connectivity software 127 PC Suite for P900 122 PDF files Personalizing your P900 136 Phone book Pictures 61

- importing entries 13

- drawing 109

- viewing 118

- sending and receiving 62

- taking 58

- viewing 61

- viewing 118 PIN 35 PIN2 35 Powerpoint presentations PUK 35 R Radio Frequency 174 Recording sounds 110 Remote synchronization 133 Removing applications 126 Restoring data 135 Restricting calls 53 Retry to call 42 Ring signals 137 Ring volume 142 S SAR 174 Screen areas 17 Screensaver 136 Secure tokens 160 Security information 158 Self-timer - picture 58 Self-timer - video 57 Send as 29 Sending notes 109 Service provider 163 Services 24 Settings 31 Setup Wizard 13 Shortcuts 161 Silent mode 46 SIM card 11 SIM card lock 35 SMS 83, 85, 154 Solitaire 81 Sony Ericsson Update Service (SEUS) 128 Sony Image Station 64 Sound files

- loop 70

- managing 70

- playing 69 Sound notification 138 Sound recorder 110 Sound recordings 110

- sending and receiving 111

- using as ring signals 111 Sounds and alerts 141 Speakerphone 46 Index Speed dial

- making a call 42

- set-up 46 Spreadsheets

- viewing 117 Standby view 15 Start-up 13 Storage manager 160, 172 Storing data 30 Streaming 67 Symbols 31 Synchronization

- local 132

- remote 133 T T9 text input 31 Tasks 105 Technical data 187 Text input 31, 141 Text messages 85 Themes 136 Time 113

- alarms 115

- locations 114

- number formats 114

- settings 113

- workdays 114 Index Time & date settings 157 Tone based services 47 Touchscreen lock 37 Transfer items with Send As 29 Troubleshooting 170 TTY settings 54 TTY support 48 Turning on and off 13 U Uninstalling applications 126, 161 User greeting 143 V Video 56 Video clips

- downloading 68

- managing 66

- playing 65

- saving 67

- sending and receiving 67 Video status 57 Viewer 116 Viewing

- documents 117

- PDF files 118

- powerpoint presentations 118

- spreadsheets 117 Virtual flip 17 Voice control 50 Voicemail 53 Volume

- changing 41 W Wallpaper 136 WAP accounts 156 Warranty 176 WIM management 161 Z Zooming 28 193

 

 

P900 User Guide

, Letters Lowercase letters are written below the arrow and uppercase letters in line with the arrow. n a o b c p q d e r s f g t h u i v j w k x 1 l y m z

1 2

2 1

2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. Accented letters Write the character as described above, then write the accent above the arrow. Other such characters, for example, and , follow the same principle.

, or

Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. Numbers Numbers are written above the arrow. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. 8 9

) Contents OVERVIEW Introduction ................................................................. 8 Getting to know your P900......................................... 9 P900 package...................................................................... 9 P900 overview .................................................................. 10 SIM card ........................................................................... 11 Battery .............................................................................. 11 Care instructions ............................................................... 12 First time start-up.............................................................. 13 Turning your P900 on and off .......................................... 13 Importing phone book entries........................................... 13 Operational modes............................................................ 14 Flip closed mode .............................................................. 15 Flip open mode ................................................................. 16 Flip removed..................................................................... 16 Screen areas ...................................................................... 17 Jog Dial ............................................................................ 18 Keypad functions ............................................................. 19 Indicators and status bar icons.......................................... 20 Memory Stick Duo .................................................... 21 Connecting the accessories............................................... 23 Services............................................................................. 24 Applications - overview.................................................... 24 General functions.............................................................. 27 Entering text..................................................................... 31 P900 locks........................................................................ 35 Phone.......................................................................... 38 Call handling with the Flip closed ................................... 38 Call handling with the Flip open...................................... 41 Handling two or more calls.............................................. 44 Call list and call log ......................................................... 45 Hints and smart functions ................................................ 46 Preferences....................................................................... 50 MEDIA CommuniCorder....................................................... 56 Recording video clips ...................................................... 56 Taking pictures ................................................................ 58 Camera settings................................................................ 59 Pictures and Image editor ........................................ 60 Pictures ............................................................................ 60 Image editor ..................................................................... 62 Video player .............................................................. 64 Video clips ....................................................................... 64 Streaming ......................................................................... 66 Preferences....................................................................... 67 Music player .............................................................. 68 3 Playing sound files............................................................ 68 Managing sound files........................................................ 69 Internet....................................................................... 72 Using the browser view .................................................... 73 Using the bookmark view................................................. 76 Preferences........................................................................ 78 Games ......................................................................... 80 Chess................................................................................. 80 Solitaire............................................................................. 80 BUSINESS Messaging................................................................... 82 Folders in Messaging........................................................ 83 The accounts in Messaging............................................... 84 Handling text messages .................................................... 84 Handling multimedia messages ........................................ 85 Handling e-mails............................................................... 88 More about messaging...................................................... 91 Contacts...................................................................... 94 Using Contacts with the Flip closed ................................. 94 Using Contacts with the Flip open.................................... 96 Creating and editing contacts............................................ 97 Managing contacts ............................................................ 99 Making an owner card .................................................... 100 Preferences...................................................................... 100 Calendar................................................................... 101 4 Creating calendar entries................................................ 101 Managing calendar entries ............................................. 102 Sending and receiving calendar entries.......................... 103 Preferences..................................................................... 103 Tasks ........................................................................ 104 Creating task entries....................................................... 104 Managing task entries .................................................... 105 Moving task entries........................................................ 105 Sending and receiving task entries................................. 106 Preferences..................................................................... 106 Jotter ........................................................................ 107 Creating and editing notes ............................................. 107 Drawing pictures............................................................ 108 Managing notes.............................................................. 108 Sending and receiving notes .......................................... 108 TOOLS Sound recorder........................................................ 109 Making sound recordings............................................... 109 Using sound recordings as ring signals.......................... 110 Sending sound recordings .............................................. 110 Calculator ................................................................ 111 Time.......................................................................... 112 Setting time and date...................................................... 112 Specifying workdays...................................................... 113 Setting locations............................................................. 113 Setting number formats .................................................. 113 Setting alarms ................................................................. 114 Viewer....................................................................... 115 Common viewer functions.............................................. 115 Viewing Word documents .............................................. 116 Viewing Excel spreadsheets ........................................... 116 Viewing PowerPoint presentations and PDFs ................ 117 File manager ............................................................ 118 Online services......................................................... 120 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS PC Suite and multimedia for P900 ........................ 121 PC Suite for P900 ........................................................... 121 Multimedia for P900....................................................... 122 Installing applications............................................. 123 Installing applications on your P900 .............................. 123 Removing applications from your P900......................... 125 Connecting to other devices.................................... 126 Connection via SyncStation............................................ 126 Connection via Infrared port........................................... 127 Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology .............. 128 Synchronization and backup.................................. 131 Local synchronization..................................................... 131 Remote synchronization ................................................. 132 Backing up data .............................................................. 133 Restoring data ................................................................ 134 SETTINGS Personalizing your P900......................................... 135 Themes........................................................................... 135 Changing your application shortcuts ............................. 135 Setting a wallpaper picture ............................................ 135 Setting a screen saver..................................................... 135 Adding images to your Contacts.................................... 136 Ring signals.................................................................... 136 Alarm tones and sound notification ............................... 137 Control panel........................................................... 138 The Device tab Application shortcuts ..................................................... 138 Display ........................................................................... 138 Flight mode .................................................................... 139 International ................................................................... 140 Locks.............................................................................. 140 Sounds and alerts ........................................................... 140 Text input....................................................................... 142 Themes........................................................................... 142 Time & date ................................................................... 142 User greeting.................................................................. 143 The Connections tab Bluetooth........................................................................ 144 Cable .............................................................................. 145 GSM Networks .............................................................. 145 5 Limited warranty............................................................ 175 FCC Statement ............................................................... 176 Environmental information............................................ 176 Declaration of Conformity............................................. 176 Terms and definitions............................................. 177 Technical data ......................................................... 185 Index......................................................................... 188 Infrared ........................................................................... 145 Internet accounts............................................................. 146 Messaging accounts ........................................................ 150 WAP accounts ................................................................ 155 The Other tab Certificate manager......................................................... 156 Flip removed................................................................... 157 Format disk ..................................................................... 157 IP security manager ........................................................ 158 Language selection ......................................................... 158 Master reset..................................................................... 158 Secure tokens .................................................................. 159 Storage manager ............................................................. 159 WIM PIN settings ........................................................... 160 Getting started with Internet and Messaging ....... 162 Introduction..................................................................... 162 Automatically set up service provider and messaging ... 163 Manually set up service provider.................................... 163 Manually set up Messaging ............................................ 164 Setting up WAP accounts ............................................... 165 Using your P900 as a modem ......................................... 165 GPRS - connection information...................................... 167 REFERENCE Troubleshooting....................................................... 169 Guidelines for safe and efficient use ...................... 173 6 Sony Ericsson P900 User Guide First edition (August 2003) This User Guide is published by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this User Guide necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communica-

tions AB at any time and without notice. Such changes will, however, be incorpo-

rated into new editions of this User Guide. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 2002. All rights reserved. Publication number: EN/LZT 108 6633 R1A The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Sony Ericsson is under license. This product contain QuickView Plus and Outside In which are 1992-2002 Stel-

lent Chicago Inc. All rights reserved. QuickView Plus and Outside In are trademarks or registered trademarks of Stellent Chicago Inc. Symbian and all Symbian-based marks and logos are trademarks of Symbian Lim-

ited. Memory Stick Duo is a trademark of Sony, its parent and/or its affiliates. Beatnik is a trademark of Beatnik, Inc. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trade-

marks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Copyright SyncML initiative Ltd. (1999-2002). All rights reserved. Portions of software PacketVideo Corporation (USA) 1999, 2002. PacketVideo, pvPlayer and the PacketVideo logo are trademarks of PacketVideo Corporation. All rights reserved. This product contains software copyright Beatnik, Inc. 1996-2002. End-user license agreement for Sun Java J2ME:

1. Restrictions: Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to all copies is retained by Sun and/or its licensors. Customer shall not modify, decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, or otherwise reverse engineer Software. Software may not be leased, assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in part. 2. Export Regulations: Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regu-

lations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. The Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Soft-

ware. Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise exported or re-exported (i) into, or to a national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran, North Korea, Libya, Sudan, Syria (as such listing may be revised from time to time) or any country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Denial Orders. 3. Restricted Rights: Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States govern-

ment is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR 52.227-

19(c) (2) as applicable. Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved. Note Some of the services in this User Guide are not supported by all networks. This also applies to the GSM International Emergency Number 112. Please contact your network operator or service provider if you are in doubt whether you can use a particular service or not. Important Your mobile phone has the capability to load, store and forward additional content, e.g. ring tone melodies. The use of such content may be restricted or prohibited by rights of third parties, including but not limited to restriction under applicable copyright laws. You, and not Sony Ericsson, are entirely responsible for additional content that you download to or forward from your mobile phone. Prior to your use of any additional content, please verify that your intended use is properly licensed or is otherwise authorised. Sony Ericsson does not guarantee the accuracy, integ-

rity or quality of any additional content or any other third-party content. Under no circumstances will Sony Ericsson be liable in any way for your improper use of additional content or other third party content. 7 OVERVIEW Introduction For ease of reference the Getting to know your P900 chapter gives a quick overview of the main functions of the phone, shortcuts and general information. Your P900 combines advanced business and entertainment features in one intuitive device. Its integrated camera lets you take pictures and record video wherever you are and use them in a wide range of applications. The pictures can be used in the Picture Phone Book, where they can be used to identify callers. MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) allows you to send and receive messages that include pictures, sound, text and voice notes. The P900 features advanced entertainment functionality that offers high quality MP3 music and widescreen format video clips and 3D games. New content can be downloaded quickly and easily from Internet sites or transferred to the phone via Bluetooth Wireless Technology, an infrared port or a cable. Extra memory is available through Memory Stick Duo, which also serves as a convenient way to exchange content and applications such as Java games. The P900 can be used as a corporate phone with Ericsson MD110 and Business Phone exchanges. The P900 also contains an organizer, which includes contacts, a calendar, notes and e-mail, all of which can be quickly and efficiently synchronized with a PC. The e-mail application supports attachments. Viewers let you read documents in various formats such as Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint. The complete P900 documentation consists of the following parts:

Quick Guide User Guide Help texts in the P900 Complementary information on the Internet, refer to Instruction for removing the Flip www.SonyEricsson.com Information on the PC Suite for P900 CD 8 Introduction Getting to know your P900 P900 package A D K J L P900 M H E C F B G A P900 with stylus B Battery C Travel charger D SyncStation E Stereo headset F Protective bag and strap G Extra stylus H Cover and tool set - Flip replacement J Memory Stick Duo K Memory Stick Duo adapter L User documentation package M 2 CDs, PC Suite for P900 and Multimedia for P900 Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the market. Note If your package does not include all the listed items above, please contact your retailer. Note Before you can use your P900 you need to insert the SIM card, and insert and charge the battery. Always detach the charger before you insert or remove the SIM card. Getting to know your P900 9 P900 overview D E F G A B C A B C D E F G H I A Indicator light for Bluetooth wireless technology (blue) B Screen C Flip (in open position) D Indicator light for network and battery (green/red) E CommuniCorder activation and shutter release F Internet button for activation of the browser G Slot for Sony Memory Stick Duo A Stylus B External antenna connector C CommuniCorder D Battery compartment E Connector for accessories and charger F Connector for stereo headset G Jog Dial H Infrared port I On/Off button 10 Getting to know your P900 SIM card When you register as a subscriber with a network operator, you receive a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card. The SIM card contains a computer chip that keeps track of your phone number, the services included in your subscription and your phone book information, among other things. A PIN (Personal Identity Number) code is supplied with the SIM card from your operator and must be entered when switching on your P900. Open the battery cover and insert the SIM card as shown in the picture. Some subscriptions are limited to call only predefined numbers, so-called Fixed Dialling Numbers

(FDN). To avoid problems when travelling abroad, these predefined numbers should be defined as international numbers starting with +, for example +4613244500. In order to speed up calling while at home, the same numbers can also be added in the national number format, for example 013244500. For more information. see Copying contacts to and from the SIM card on page 99. Battery Before you use your P900 for the first time, charge the battery provided for at least 4 hours. Use the supplied charger. See Charging the battery on page 12. Insertion and removal To insert the battery 1. Ensure that the Flip is closed. 2. Remove the battery cover by sliding it downwards. 3. Place the battery in the battery compartment and close the cover. To remove the battery 1. Ensure that your P900 is turned off. Note It is important that you always turn off your P900 before removing the battery. Failure to do so can result in loss of information. 2. Remove the battery cover by sliding it downwards. 3. Use your fingernail at the lower left-hand edge of the battery to gently lift the lower edge of the battery outwards. 4. Take out the battery. Getting to know your P900 11 Charging the battery When the battery needs to be charged, a beep is heard. The indicator light (on the top of your P900) flashes red and a battery low message appears on the screen. The battery can be charged whenever you want. The P900 performance is not affected. However, using your P900 while charging increases the charging time. To charge the battery The P900 can be charged either when it is switched on or off. Tip You can also use other battery chargers that have been supplied with other Sony Ericsson mobile phones using the same connector plug, for example, T68i or T300. Note When the battery is completely discharged, or new, it may take up to 30 minutes before the battery charging icon appears on the screen. 4. Wait approximately 4 hours or until the battery meter on the screen is full and the indicator on the top of the P900 shows a steady green light. 5. Remove the charger by tilting 1. Make sure the battery is inserted in your P900 and the cover the plug upwards. is closed. 2. Connect the charger to the P900 at the base of the phone by the flash symbol. The charger plug flash symbol must face upwards. 3. Connect the charger to the mains. Charging is indicated by the battery meter on the screen pulsing continuously, and the indicator at the top of the P900 showing a steady red light (or green, if the P900 is switched on). See also Battery Use and Care on page 174. Care instructions Your P900 is a highly sophisticated electronic device. To get the most out of it, please make sure that you follow this advice:

Keep the P900 in its protective bag when not using it. Use a commercial glass screen cleaner sprayed on a cloth, when you clean the screen. Use only the stylus provided to tap the screen. 12 Getting to know your P900 First time start-up Please read Guidelines for safe and efficient use on page 173 before you start using your P900. When you start your P900 for the first time 1. Press the On/Off button to turn on your P900, keeping the Flip closed. The language selection dialogue opens. 2. Select one of the languages from the list. Read more about selecting a language in Language selection on page 158. 3. When you have selected a language, the phone turns off. 4. Open the Flip. Press the On/Off button again. The Setup Wizard starts automatically and guides you through the essential settings. These include time and date settings, and information on the Jog Dial, text entry, and status bar. Follow the instructions on the screen. 5. The Power menu opens. Select Phone on. 6. Enter your PIN when the dialogue box appears and press

. Press to delete a digit. Turning your P900 on and off By default the Power menu prompts you to choose normal operation or Flight mode each time you press the On/Off button. These settings can be turned off. See To use the Power menu on page 47. In Flight mode the phone and Bluetooth functions are switched off, but you can still use the other functions. Set your P900 in Flight mode where the use of mobile phones is not allowed. You can also use Flight mode if you want to use the other functions but do not want incoming calls. Importing phone book entries You may want to import existing contact information from another mobile phone to your P900. You can do this in several ways:

Beam the phone book entries from the other phone by infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology and save the set to Contacts. See Creating and editing contacts on page 97. Synchronize the SIM and the internal memory on the other phone with one of the PC PIM applications supported by your P900. Then you can synchronize this information with Contacts. Note When you synchronize application, the SIM information will not be synchronized. You might get two versions of the same contact. See Synchronization and backup on page 131. Contacts with your PC PIM Getting to know your P900 13 The Jog Dial provides further navigation and selection capability. Closing the Flip generally ends an activity and saves the data. Multimedia phone calls and data sessions will, however, continue. Flip removed The Flip can also be removed, which makes the organizer applications easier to access. When the Flip is removed, the P900 works in Flip open operational mode. Note Turn off the P900 before you remove the flip to avoid to damage your phone. Phone book entries stored on your SIM card are accessible Contacts. Select SIM in the folders menu to the through right in the menu bar to see the list of entries in your SIM Contacts. phone book. These entries can be imported to See Copying contacts to and from the SIM card on page 99. Operational modes The P900 works in different operational modes:

Flip closed With the keypad Flip closed, the P900 can be used like a conventional mobile phone using the keypad to dial and the Jog Dial to navigate. For more information please see Jog Dial on page 18 and Keypad functions on page 19. You can open the Flip at any time to continue working. Many more functions are available when the Flip is open. Flip open When the Flip is opened, the large touch-screen is revealed. You use the stylus to tap the screen to navigate and enter data. There is also a handwriting recognition feature, so that you can use the stylus to write on the screen. 14 Getting to know your P900 Flip closed mode C B A Sony Ericsson D E 11:20am 21/06/2004 11:20am 21/06/2004 Call list OK C A Shortcut to the Messaging application B Shortcut to the Contacts application C Shortcut to the Call list application D Shortcut to the Calendar application E Shows all applications available in Flip closed mode Standby view The standby view shows shortcuts to the most commonly used applications. Choose which shortcuts you want to use in standby. See Personalizing your P900 on page 135. Selecting and starting applications Rotate the Jog Dial to select an application. Press the Jog Dial or to start the application. Applications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CommuniCorder Music player Messaging Contacts Calendar Tasks Jotter Sound recorder OK C Applications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CommuniCorder Music player Messages Contacts Calendar Tasks Jotter Sound recorder Connections Tip When application by pressing its specific number. view is selected, it is also possible to start an Closing applications The current application automatically closes and the data is saved when you return to the standby view or switch to another application. To return to standby, press and hold or press the Jog Dial backwards. Options menu Press options menu to get access to keylock, battery status, missed calls and more. or press the Jog Dial forwards to open the standby Getting to know your P900 15 Flip open mode C B A D E F Applications View All CommuniCorder Pictures Video Music player Internet Messages Contacts Phone Calendar Tasks Jotter Control panel Calculator CommuniCorder Pictures Video Music player Internet Messages Contacts Phone Calendar Tasks Jotter Control panel Calculator Sound recorder Time Viewer File manager Remote Sync Online services Demo GPRS data log Chess Solitaire i A Shortcut to the Messaging application B Shortcut to the Contacts application C Shortcut to the Phone application D Shortcut to the Calendar application E Shortcut to the Internet application F Shows all applications available in Flip open mode You can change the shortcuts A-E. See Changing your application shortcuts on page 135. Navigation When the Flip is open, the application shortcut icons shown in the Flip closed mode move to the top row in the Flip open screen. You navigate by using the stylus and tapping selected items and by using the Jog Dial, see Jog Dial on page 18. Flip removed You can use your P900 without the physical Flip. When the Flip is removed, the P900 works in Flip open mode. To remove and attach the Flip, refer to the separate instructions. Note Please note that Sony Ericsson does not accept any liability for lost parts or product defects resulting from any disassembly or modification of the product. 16 Getting to know your P900 Virtual flip When the virtual flip is enabled, when the virtual flip is open. Select flip. is shown on the status bar to close the virtual When the virtual flip is closed, the virtual flip keypad is shown. Select to open the virtual flip. You must activate the virtual flip, when you have removed the Flip keypad, by tapping the Enable virtual flip checkbox in Control Panel > Device > Flip removed. Screen areas When the Flip is closed, you use the keyboard and the Jog Dial. When the Flip is open the screen is touch-sensitive. The screen is divided into a number of areas: see the figure and table below. E F C B 11:03 John Smith

+4613244500 (h) End call Internet E dit Chat Edit Sony Ericsson Sony Ericsson P900 A B C D E picker Item A Application Description Displays six icons for quick and easy access to the most common applications. These can be customized. B Menu bar Usually contains two menus on the left, and a folder menu on the right. The two left-hand menus contain:

the application menu, whose name is always the same as the application. It contains the system services used by most applications, such as Find, Send as, and Delete. the edit menus contain editing items such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Zoom, Preferences and Help. In Flip open, the menu bar shows the function of the key. C Application area Applications use this central area of the screen to display the essential information. Many of the built-in applications are based on two standard view layouts: a list view and a detail view. E Status bar D Button bar An application view displays a button bar that contains useful controls and shortcuts. Not all application views require a button bar. Displays device status information such as: signal strength, battery and device information, settings for sounds and time, on-screen keyboard, as well as temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread messages. Displays the name of the active application. F Title bar Getting to know your P900 17 Jog Dial Action Rotate the Jog Dial (up) Rotate the Jog Dial (down) Press the Jog Dial (inwards) Press the Jog Dial

(backwards) Function Scrolls items in a list up / to the left, increases volume during a call, moves back a page when playing a multimedia message. Scrolls items in a list down / to the right, decreases volume during a call, moves forward a page when playing a multimedia message. Selects a highlighted item, dials selected phone numbers. Generally the same action as Goes back to the previous screen, dismisses dialogues, and sends a busy signal to the calling party when you receive a call. It will not end a call. Always the same action as closed and in Flip closed. in Flip open. in Flip Up Down Inward Backward Forward Press the Jog Dial (forwards) Flip closed: brings up the Options menu. Press and hold takes you to the Applications list. Flip open: toggles the Application, Edit and Category menus. Press and hold takes you to the Application launcher. 18 Getting to know your P900 Keypad functions Key Key Function OK Enter selected function, indicated on the display above the key. BACK Return to previous menu. Reject an incoming call. Press and hold to return to Standby. CLEAR Delete entered characters/digits from the screen one by one. Press and hold to delete an entire row of entered characters/digits. Delete an entry from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Sound Recorder, and Messaging. Press and hold to disconnect the microphone

(mute function) when a call is in progress. Mute the ring signal during an incoming call. Pause/play the medody when the Music player is open. Press and hold to put the P900 into silent mode, when in the standby view. OPTIONS Open the menu with different options for different applications. Press and hold to open Applications. Function STAR Enter the character *. Press and hold to enter a p (pause) character. Press to switch between different input modes

(Abc, 123 ... ). This is useful when writing SMS or similar texts. Press and hold to change between T9 and multitap. HASH Enter the character #. Press and hold to see a list with special characters. Terminate the input of PIN and security codes. Retrieve a phone number from the SIM card phone book. Enter the number of the memory position and then press

. NUMERIC KEYS Enter the digits 0 to 9. Enter associated characters or perform associated functions. See Shortcuts on page 40. Press and hold digits 1 to 9 to open Contacts.

Getting to know your P900 19 Icon Indicators and status bar icons These icons appear in the Flip closed standby screen or in the status bar when the Flip is open. When the Flip is open, you can often tap the icons to get more detailed information or start an application. Icon Function Signal strength, GPRS status Battery strength Bluetooth on Bluetooth discoverable Infrared on GPRS active GPRS data transfer in progress Ongoing data call Ongoing call Missed call Divert all calls notification Calls screened Function SMS notification MMS notification E-mail notification SMS overflow Time Time, alarm set Key lock Magic word Keyboard Multimedia volume Speakerphone Muted microphone Silent mode Home network Voicemail notification 20 Getting to know your P900 Memory Stick Duo The Memory Stick Duo provides a convenient way of increasing the storage space in your P900. You can save still images, video clips, music, and voice recordings as well as computer data and applications on a Memory Stick Duo and use it to store or transfer the contents for many different purposes. These include:

Storing backup copies of important files. Storing media for personalizing your P900. Storing media for use when composing MMS messages. Storing installation files for new applications. Transferring data between the P900 and a PC or Mac. Providing storage for third-party applications. To insert the Memory Stick Duo 1. Open the cover for the Memory Stick Duo slot. 2. Insert the Memory Stick Duo in the slot, with the connector side towards the back (see picture). Make sure it is securely inserted. A click should be heard. Note Insert the Memory Stick Duo correctly to avoid damage to your P900 or the Memory Stick Duo. SONY Memory Stick Duo 8MB The Memory Stick Duo supplied with the P900 may or may not be a version that contains the lock function. Remember, you can overwrite existing files without the lock function. To remove the Memory Stick Duo Press the edge of the Memory Stick Duo using your fingernail or the stylus to release it. You hear a click as it jumps out of the slot. Note Be careful when removing the Memory Stick Duo to avoid dropping it. Renaming a Memory Stick Duo You can rename a Memory Stick Duo to give it a name that is meaningful to you. The name you set will be shown in the divider between internal and external storage in the folder menu. See Folders on page 27. There are two ways to rename a Memory Stick Duo:

Select Control Panel > Other > Format disk and tap Rename. See Format disk on page 157. Select File manager > File > Format disk and tap Rename. Renaming will not erase any data. Copying and moving data For information on how to copy and move data to and from the Memory Stick Duo, refer to Folders on page 27. Getting to know your P900 21 Formatting a Memory Stick Duo If you need to reformat a Memory Stick Duo, select Control Panel > Other > Format disk, or select File manager > File > Format disk. When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it, including any applications that you may have installed. Sharing data with other devices Your P900 uses the shorter memory stick variant, Memory Stick Duo. Memory Stick Duo Adapter Use the Memory Stick Duo adapter when using your Memory Stick Duo in a device equipped with a regular sized Memory Stick, for example a personal computer. Insert your Memory Stick Duo according to the picture on the adapter. Warning! Do not insert a Memory Stick Duo adapter without a Memory Stick Duo into a Memory Stick slot. This may damage the product. Always insert the adapter in the slot with the connector end (marked with a triangle) first. Compatibility The P900 defines its own folder structure on a Memory Stick. Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in one application is not visible in another. Other devices must access the same folder structure to interact with the P900 files. If you are using a PC, this is easily done by browsing to the required folder on the Memory Stick. Memory Stick enabled devices which do not allow you to browse and manage a folder structure may not be able to share data directly with the applications in your P900 (for example, Memory Stick enabled digital cameras). However, the File Manager can access these files and move them into the correct folders for use by the applications. When your P900 is connected to your PC, you also have access to the P900 folder structure as well as other Memory Stick Duo content in My P900. Personal computer support Both PCs and Apple computers may be enabled for Memory Stick use via built-in Memory Stick slots, Floppy Disk adapters, PC card adapters, and Memory Stick enabled mouses. (Memory Stick Duo Adapter required.) For more information about Sony Memory Stick, visit www.memorystick.com. 22 Getting to know your P900 Connecting the accessories C E B D A A The travel charger is connected to the desk stand or to the P900. Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the market. B The USB connector from the desk stand is connected to a PC. C The headset is connected to the P900. D Other accessories can be connected to the connector at the base of the P900. E A car holder can be connected to the antenna connector at the rear. Note Remove the plastic plug before connecting the P900 to the car holder. The wrist strap is threaded through the holes next to the connector at the bottom of the P900. Getting to know your P900 23 Services You need the following services to use the P900 functions:

You need... GSM subscription GSM subscription To use... phone services text messaging (SMS) multimedia messaging (MMS) MMS account, GSM data subscription e-mail account, GSM data subscription e-mail Internet account, WAP account (only Internet for WAP 1.x services), GSM data subscription GSM data subscription data communication Please consult your network operator and Internet service provider for more information about the services that are available to you. Applications - overview You can start applications in different ways. Select icons in the standby view (Flip closed) and in the application picker (Flip open) to start the most important ones. Select applications. to list all Demo application The Demo application shows some of the most common functions in your P900. You can uninstall the demo application and also reinstall it from the Multimedia for P900 CD. See Removing applications from your P900 on page 125 for how to uninstall the demo application and Installing applications on your P900 on page 123 for how to reinstall it. To start the demo 1. Select the Applications icon 2. Select the Demo icon

. The demo starts. To stop the demo Tap the screen or rotate the Jog Dial to stop the demo. The demo also stops when any other dialogue is opened. Note When the Flip is open, an incoming text or MMS message will not stop the demo. The Demo application can be launched also when the P900 is started without a SIM card inserted. When the P900 asks you to insert the SIM card, just press OK. If the Flip is closed, open it. Phone This is the mobile phone application. When the Flip is opened, select to start it. 24 Getting to know your P900 Call list The call list displays the most recent calls, either outgoing, incoming or missed. In Flip closed, press the Jog Dial or to call the selected entry. To view the call list when the Flip is open, open Phone and select the call list view by tapping the icon. CommuniCorder For taking video clips and still pictures. In CommuniCorder view, the screen becomes a viewfinder. Press the CommuniCorder button or the Jog Dial to start recording or take a photo. Alternatively tap the red button at the bottom of the screen. Pictures (Flip open only) Manages your pictures. You can take pictures with CommuniCorder, or receive them via e-mail, Bluetooth wireless technology and infrared communication. Download via the Internet browser, or transfer them from your PC. With the image editor you can also edit your pictures. Video (Flip open only) Plays video clips. You can record video with CommuniCorder, download them from Internet or transfer them from your PC. You can stream video and audio from the Internet. Music player Plays music tracks and other audio files. You can download these from the Internet or transfer them from your PC. The player supports the most common sound formats. You can save music tracks on the Memory Stick Duo. Internet (Flip open only) The Internet browser can access both Web and WAP pages. It can also download images, video clips, audio files, and Java applications. Messaging You can read, create, send and delete text (SMS), multimedia

(MMS) and e-mail messages in this view. Contacts Displays a list of your contacts. Select a contact to view associated contact data. Calendar The Calendar view displays entries for the current day. Use the Jog Dial to get more information about a selected entry or to change days. Tasks Keeps track of your tasks. Set due date, alarm, priority, and so on, for all your tasks and let your P900 remind you in time. Getting to know your P900 25 Jotter File manager (Flip open only) Displays a list of stored entries. In detailed view, the complete entry is displayed. You can handle the content and organisation of media, both in the P900 and on the Memory Stick Duo Control panel (Flip open only) Contains all settings that are system-wide and affect more than one application. This is the main view to use when initially setting up your P900. Note Settings for Flight mode and P900 locks are located under Control panel > Device Calculator (Flip open only) A standard 10-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages. Sound recorder You can use your P900 as a sound recorder. Time (Flip open only) Shows time and date. You can set your current location and another. You can also set different alarms. Viewer (Flip open only) Use it to view various types of documents: for example Microsoft Word, Excel, Power Point, Adobe Acrobat

(PDF files). Remote Sync (Flip open only) Performs synchronization over the air. Using GPRS, the P900 can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization server. Remote Sync works equally well over CSD or HSCSD. Online services i Your service provider may offer different services, for example, weather forecasts, financial information or newsletters. Contact your service provider for more information. GPRS data log (Flip open only) A list of GPRS Internet accounts. Open an account to view your logged GPRS traffic, including your costs. The P900 creates a new data log when a connection to an account is created. Connections (Flip closed only) Set the way you communicate with your PC or other devices. Select between infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology and cable. In the cable menu, you can also select whether the P900 synchronizes with a PC or acts as a wireless modem. 26 Getting to know your P900 General functions Application launcher views In Flip open, the P900 can present the applications in two ways:

List view (small icons appear in one column) Icon view (large icons appear in two columns) Folders Folders are used to organize information, for example contacts, jotter entries, or task lists. You might want to organize your contacts in business and personal folders. Folders are also used when managing files of different types on your P900 and Memory Stick Duo. You might want to move or copy sound files into a sound track folder to store on a Memory Stick Duo. As you may notice, if you connect your P900 to a PC and view the contents of your P900 in My P900, it is easier to get an overview of a folder and file structure on a large screen than on a handheld device. If you make it a habit to set up specific folders to suit your needs and use them to categorise all your information, working with it becomes easy. Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in one application is not visible in another. For each application there is a default Unfiled folder. Since there is no way of seeing on your P900, whether a file in an Unfiled folder is located on your P900 or on a Memory Stick, we recommend that you move files to your own folders as soon as possible. Every item created in an application is always assigned to a single folder, by default the same folder as displayed in the list view. In list view, the folder menu is used to organise your entries. In detail view, the folder menu allows you to change the folder of the current item. Using the folder menu In the applications that use folders you can see the folder menu to the right in the menu bar. When a Memory Stick Duo is available in the P900, the folders on it are shown in the folder menu under the divider. If you rename the disk (see Renaming a Memory Stick Duo on page 21) the divider will show the new name. In list view, there is a super-folder called All, which, when selected, displays items from all folders (in Contacts, the All folder does not display the entries in the SIM phone book). All is the default value in list views and when an application is first launched. Getting to know your P900 27 Use the Edit Folders menu item to:

Rename a folder, or move a folder to or from Memory Stick Duo. Select the folder you want to move or rename, tap Edit, type the name of the new folder, and choose a Location from the list. Tap Done. To Add a new folder. Tap Add, enter a folder Name and choose a Location from the list. Tap Done. To Delete a folder. Select the folder you want to delete and tap Delete. A folder can only be deleted if it is empty. Not all folders can be deleted. To copy all the files in a folder to another folder 1. Open the folder in list view, and select Copy to in the main application menu; for example Audio or Image. 2. Select the destination Folder from the list and select Copy. To move a file from one folder to another Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the destination folder. To copy a file to another folder 1. Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the destination folder. Select Copy to in the main application menu; for example Audio or Image. 2. Select the destination Folder from the list and tap Copy. Tip To delete multiple files in an application you can use Storage manager. See Deleting or copying general files on page 160. Managing your files Using the File Manager, you can handle the content and organisation of media, both in the P900 and on the Memory Stick Duo. See File manager on page 118. You can also use the Storage Manager in the Control Panel. See Storage manager on page 159. Zooming You can change the size of the screen fonts. Choose between Small, Medium or Large. From the menu bar, tap Edit > Zoom. Automatic saving When you work in an application and leave it, your work is automatically saved. Find The Find function searches through all the items stored in an application. The standard Find dialogue contains a single text edit box with two buttons, Find and Cancel. Selecting Find starts the search, while Cancel closes the Find dialogue. 28 Getting to know your P900 In some applications, for example Messaging, Find may be more complicated:

The size of each message is so large that you may want to restrict the search to the current message only. Folders are potentially more significant, so you may want to restrict the search to the current folder only. Sorting your files You can sort the files you have stored in your P900. By sorting your files, you choose in which order you want the files to be displayed on the screen. You can choose between sorting by, for example type, size, date, or name. Note Sort is not included in all applications. Sending and receiving items From many applications it is possible to exchange items like appointments, contacts and images. To send an item using Send as 1. Enter the Send as menu in the specific application. 2. Depending on the application and item, you can choose between the following transfer methods:

Text message (using SMS): P900 will create a new text message. Add the mobile number of the recipient and tap Send. E-mail: the P900 will create a new message with the item included as an attachment. Complete with address and subject, and tap Send. Multimedia message (using MMS): the P900 will create a new message with the item included as an attachment. Complete the message and tap Send. Infrared: align the infrared port of the P900 with the infrared port of the other device. Select Send. Progress messages on screen will tell you when the information has been transferred. Bluetooth wireless technology: the P900 will search the local area for paired devices. These will be presented in a list. Select a device to which the item is to be sent and select Send. Progress messages will tell you when the information has been transferred. Tip The other devices must have Bluetooth wireless technology enabled. You can select Refresh to perform a new search if, for example, a destination device was not enabled at first. To handle items received in e-mail and multimedia messages 1. Tap the notification icon

, or Getting to know your P900 29 open Messaging and select MMS or an e-mail inbox. 2. Open the message. 3. Select the attachments tab. 4. Select the required attachment. The attachment or a summary of the attachment will be displayed. 5. Select Save to save the item. You may optionally display the received item within the related application. See Messaging on page 82 for more information. To receive beamed items 1. Ensure that infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology is activated. 2. For infrared, ensure that the infrared ports are aligned. 3. The received item will be notified by a dialogue box listing the item(s) received. 4. Select View to view and save the item to the related application. Select Done and any unsaved items will be automatically saved for you in the Beamed inbox in Messaging. Methods for storing data Your P900 can store data in different ways:

Internal memory. Up to 16 MB of capacity for storing pictures, messages, music, applications, and so on, depending on applications in use. Memory Stick Duo (expansion memory). Several other expansion-memory alternatives on the market. Pictures on Sony Image Station on the Web:

For Europe: http://www.sonystyle-imaging.com For Japan: http://www.imagestation.jp For USA: http://www.imagestation.com SIM card, for phone numbers and associated names. See Copying contacts to and from the SIM card on page 99. Getting help From the menu bar tap Edit > Help to get to the P900 help system. The help system uses two views:

The Topics view shows all available topics, for example both specific application topics and general topics. The Detail view presents the title and text of a single topic. The Topics view allows you to select a topic, which opens the detail view/text view and displays the selected topic. You can also set the zoom level and exit the Help system. In many dialogue boxes you can select the Help icon upper right corner. in the 30 Getting to know your P900 Settings For settings that are application-specific, tap Edit > Preferences in the application menu bar. For generic settings, go to Control Panel. Entering text Entering text with the Flip closed With the Flip closed, you use the keypad keys to enter text, for example, when writing a text message. When you press a key, a pre-edit box with the different characters on that key is shown in the title area:

If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-

edit box will be selected. key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. If key deletes several characters and The continuously pressed, the then whole words. Types of text input There are four text input types:

ABC uppercase entry abc lowercase entry When you are editing text you can:

Press and select Text options > Input type to select text input type. Press mode. to switch between the input types in text edit Inserting symbols When you are editing text you can press on the application, choose Add symbol or Text > Add symbol to select an item from the symbol selector table. Use the Jog Dial to select the row and press

. Then scroll within the row to select a symbol and press and, depending

. T9 text input You can use T9 text input when writing, for example text messages and e-mail. The T9 text input method uses a built-in dictionary to recognise the most commonly used word for each sequence of key presses. This way, you press each key only once, even when the letter you want is not the first letter on the key. Press and hold to change input method. Abc initial uppercase letter, the rest lowercase. Default for The following example shows how to start writing a text. each new text edit field. 123 numeric entry only Getting to know your P900 To enter letters using T9 text input 1. Select, for example, Messaging > Create SMS. 31 2. For example, if you want to write the word Jane, press

. During text entry, a suggestion list with word candidates are presented. The most frequently used word is highlighted. 3. If the word is the word you want:

Press to accept and add a space.

(To accept a word without adding a space, press

.) If the word is not the one you want:

Scroll with the Jog Dial up or down to view alternative to accept the word and words (candidates). Press add a space. If you do not find the word you want:

to go to a list of options. Press Select Text options > Spell word. Edit the word using multitap text input and press Yes.The word is added to the user dictionary. The next time you enter the word, it will appear as one of the alternative words. 4. Continue writing your message. Spell word, to edit the entered word. My words, to view the user dictionary. Language, to change language. Show suggestion list / Hide suggestion list, to switch the candidates window on and off. Use T9 / Use multitap, to switch between T9 text input and multitap text input Add symbol, adds symbols and punctuation marks. Input type, changes the text input type between Abc, abc, ABC and 123. Copy all / Paste, to copy all text to the clipboard, and for pasting the copied text to the place of the text cursor. Entering text with the Flip open There are two ways of entering text with the Flip open:

Use the on-screen keyboard located at the bottom of the screen. Write directly on the screen using the stylus. Press marks, press If you press list of options:

32 to enter a full stop. To enter other punctuation and use the Jog Dial. and select Text options when writing, you get a Getting to know your P900 On-screen keyboard When you need to edit text, tap the keyboard icon in the status bar and then select characters. Tap Done when ready. At the bottom left of the keyboard you can choose between three keyboard layouts with different character sets. abc - standard characters

- international characters 123 - numeric characters and currencies abc Calendar Edit Unfiled Chat Edit Weekly meeting Type Appointment Description The agenda for... Weekly meeting Done t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 q w e r y u i o p l cap s d f g h j a k z x c v b n m . aeo 123

The current input field is shown to the left in the top bar of the keyboard. Tap the arrows or rotate the Jog Dial to change the input field. The keyboard top bar also contains a drop-down menu with Cut, Copy and Paste. When copying or cutting, the text must be selected first. Handwriting recognition Handwriting recognition translates stylus gestures into letters, digits or other characters, and displays these characters as text. Handwriting recognition is only active in places where text can be input. The text mode screen is split into an upper and a lower part, by an arrow in the middle of the right edge. Write lowercase letters below the arrow and uppercase letters in line with it. Write digits above the arrow. Contacts Edit Unfiled Chat Edit First name Last name Job title Jane Jones Graphic Desig Phone (w) Phone (h) Mobile (w) Ring tone Email (w) Fax (w) Web Default Rin... Mark text by putting the stylus on the text, wait a moment, and drag the stylus over the text. Note Most letters can be written using different stroke styles. See the tables below. The style does not determine case. The position on the screen decides case. Getting to know your P900 33

, Letters Lowercase letters are written below the arrow and uppercase letters in line with the arrow. n a o b c p q d e r s f g t h u i v j w k x 1 l y m z

1 2

2 1

2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. Accented letters Write the character as described above, then write the accent above the arrow. Other such characters, for example, and , follow the same principle.

, or

Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. Numbers Numbers are written above the arrow. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. 8 9

) 34 Getting to know your P900 Extended characters To write symbols and characters that are not shown in these tables, please consult the Extended characters section of the Handwriting recognition help topic in your phone. P900 locks Use the SIM card lock and the device lock to protect your SIM card and your P900 from unauthorized use. Use the key lock to prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed. Note You can usually make an emergency call without unlocking the P900. SIM card lock The SIM card lock protects your SIM card, not the P900, against unauthorized use. It is unlocked by the PIN and PUK codes which you receive from your service provider. You can choose to have to unlock the SIM card every time you turn the P900 on, or to have the SIM card unlocked. Your PIN (Personal Identification Number) code consists of four to eight digits. If you activate the SIM card lock, the P900 will ask for the PIN code every time you turn it on. You unlock the SIM card by entering the PIN code. To activate the SIM card lock 1. Select 2. Select a lock option. 3. Select Done. Control panel > Device > Locks. An error message informs you if a wrong PIN code has been entered. Usually, the SIM card will be blocked after three wrong attempts (the number of attempts is SIM-card dependent), and you need to enter the PUK code to unblock it. The PUK code consists of eight digits. When you have entered the right PUK code you must enter a new PIN code. You have ten attempts to enter the PUK code. If all ten attempts fail, the SIM card will be disabled and you need to contact your network operator. You cannot change the PUK code. PIN2 Some functions on the SIM card can be protected by a secondary code feature. Some SIM cards do not have a PIN2 lock. The PIN2 lock cannot be deactivated. The code can be changed by a user who knows the old code. Device lock The device lock protects your P900 and the data in it against unauthorized use. Getting to know your P900 35 If the device lock is set to When SIM changed, it means that the P900 is not normally locked. However, if the SIM has been changed, the P900 asks you to enter the code to unlock the P900 before you can use it. This means that if someone steals your P900 and puts another SIM card into it, they will not be able to use it. Note Your operator can block your SIM, if you report that your phone has been stolen. The device lock is not on when you buy your P900. You can change the device lock code to any four to eight digit personal code. The default device lock code is 0000. To activate the device lock 1. Select 2. Select a lock option. 3. Select Done. Control panel > Device > Locks. You can choose to have the P900 locked every time you turn it on, locked when the SIM card has been changed, or unlocked. It is also possible to use the device lock in combination with the screen saver. Just mark the checkbox Control panel > Device >

Display > Screen > Screen saver device lock to have the device lock activated when the screen saver goes on. Note When using the screen saving device lock, make sure you have set the device lock to activate at Power on. Otherwise your P900 will be unprotected after Power on, until the screen saver goes on. Change code Control panel > Device > Locks. To change a code 1. Select 2. Select Change Codes. 3. Select the code you want to change. 4. First enter the old code, then the new one. (To ensure that you have typed the new code correctly you have to enter it twice.) Automatic key lock This option locks the keys on your P900. This is to protect the device if the keys are accidentally pressed. When this setting is active, the Flip closed keypad will become automatically locked after a period of inactivity. To activate or change the key lock Select Control panel > Device > Locks. To unlock the keys Select

. 36 Getting to know your P900 Screen lock This option locks the screen of your P900. This is to protect the device if the screen is accidentally pressed in Flip open mode or with the Flip removed. When this setting is active, the screen will automatically become locked after a period of inactivity. To activate or change the screen lock 1. Select 2. Select a lock time or Off.

> Settings. To lock the screen Select

> Lock screen. To unlock the screen Push the Jog Dial Forward > Inward or Backward > Inward. Getting to know your P900 37 Phone The P900 is a full-featured mobile phone having full integration with the other functions of the device, including applications from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called third-party applications. The phone includes useful features such as:

personalized ring types. Picture phone book Quick access back to the entry in Contacts, making it easy to try an alternative number or send an e-mail if the contact is unavailable or busy. Voice-dialling make a call by saying the contacts name. Voice answer an incoming call may be answered or sent a busy signal, using the words recorded for answer and busy. Access to other applications while talking on the phone. Office handsfree (speakerphone) which is enabled when the Flip is open, making it easy to access applications such as Calendar and Jotter while talking. Flight mode which enables the P900 to be used as a PDA in situations where radio transmitters may not be used. The GSM and Bluetooth transmitters (and receivers) are switched off. With the Flip closed you can access most of the functions using the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced tasks such as handling conference calls or using other applications during a call are best handled with the Flip open. The P900 supports Customer Service Profile (CSP). This means that some options may be hidden depending on your subscription. Call handling with the Flip closed With the Flip closed, you can use either the keypad or the Jog Dial to handle calls. Outgoing calls To make a call Enter the phone number on the keypad and press the Jog Dial or press

. Press to delete a typed character. Press and hold to delete all characters. Press and hold to insert the international call prefix +. 38 Phone Press and select Hide my number, if you do not want to show your phone number to the party you are calling. Select Show my number, if you want to show it. If a call is not successfully connected, the P900 can be set to automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is successful, the P900 alerts you with a single ring signal. To make an emergency call Enter the emergency number on the keypad and press the Jog Dial or press

. Usually, but not always, no SIM card or PIN code is required for emergency calls and you will be able to make the call as long as the available network allows and you have coverage from a GSM network. Check with your local provider to find out if emergency calls are possible without a SIM card, and which emergency call numbers are supported. To make a call using Speed dial Speed dial is a fast way to call one of your special speed dial numbers. See Set up speed dial numbers on page 46. 1. Select the key corresponding to the number of the speed dial contact. The speed dial name is shown above the picture is attached to the speed dial, the picture is also shown. key. If a 2. Press

. Phone on the standby screen. To make a call using the Call list 1. Select 2. Press the Jog Dial or 3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select an entry. 4. Press the Jog Dial or

. To make a call using the Contact list 1. Select on the standby screen. 2. Press the Jog Dial or 3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select a contact. 4. Scroll by rotating the Jog Dial and select the desired number. 5. Press the Jog Dial or

. For more information, see Contacts on page 94. To make a call using voice control 1. There are three ways to use the voice recognition function. Press and hold the Jog Dial. Press and hold

. Say the Magic word. Press the call button on the headset. When the Magic word function is activated, the appears in the status bar. icon 39 2. When you hear a short tone, say the voice command linked Press for the last dialled number. to the number you want to call. See To record a voice command on page 51. The P900 will connect you with the matching contact. You can use voice control when the P900 is handheld, used with a handsfree set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. Magic word cannot be used together with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. For more information, see Voice control on page 50. To end a call Press

, or press the Jog Dial. Shortcuts Press and hold to dial your voicemail. With the Flip open, select Phone > Call voice mail. See Voice mail on page 53 on how to set up voicemail. Press any of the keys from to followed by to call a speed dial number. Press twice to call the last dialled number. Press and hold any of the keys from to to open your Contact list. Press again to reach the next letter. Additional key presses will add letters to your search. Press any digit followed by to reach a phone number in the SIM phone book. Incoming calls When you receive a call, the name of the caller will be displayed if the calling party is in Contacts. If there is an associated picture it will also be shown in a small or large version. See Incoming call picture on page 50. To handle an incoming call You can press control, see Voice control on page 50. to answer the call or answer by voice You can press signal. to reject a call and press to silence the ring An incoming call will bring up the following options:

1 Answer Answer the call. 2 Send Busy Reject the call. The calling party will hear a busy tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call. 3 Mute Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged as a missed call. If a large picture of the caller fills the screen, you can use the Jog Dial to get the menu with the options above. 40 Phone Options during or after a call Use the Jog Dial to change the phone volume during a call. to get a list of call handling options. The list will Press vary depending on the situation. Options that concern two or more active calls are described in Handling two or more calls on page 44. End call End the active call. Hold call/retrieve call Put the active call on hold /retrieve the held call. This is useful if you want to make a new call during a call. Add to contacts Create a new Contacts entry if the phone number of the active call is known, and not already stored in Contacts. Show contact Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that corresponds to the phone number of the active call. Transfer sound Transfer the call to a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. Turn On/Off tones You can send DTMF tones with the keypad, Controlling tone-based services on page 47. Microphone mute On/Off Turn the microphone on or off. Copy number Copy a phone number for exchange with other text fields or applications. Paste number Paste a copied number into a field. Speakerphone On/Off You can use the P900 as a speakerphone. See Speakerphone on page 46. Applications Open another application, and, for example, paste a copied phone number into a Jotter entry. Press and hold reactivate the microphone. to mute the microphone. Press again to Call handling with the Flip open You use the stylus and the virtual keypad to handle calls with the Flip open. Outgoing calls To make a call 1. Select opened. in the application picker. The Speed dial view is on the button bar. 2. Tap 3. Enter the digits with the virtual keypad and tap right of the keypad, or press the Jog Dial inwards. on the To delete a typed character - select

. If you do not want to show your phone number to the party you are calling, select Phone > Hide my number after you have entered the digits. Select Show my number, if you want to show it. Phone 41 If a call is not successfully connected, the P900 can be set to automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is successful, the P900 alerts you with a single ring signal. To make a call using Speed dial Speed dial is a fast way to call one of your special speed dial numbers. See Set up speed dial numbers on page 46. This is the default phone view. 1. Select on the button bar. 2. Use the Jog Dial or tap with the stylus to select an entry. To make a call using the Call list 1. Select from the button bar. Phone Edit Chat Edit Sony Ericsson Sony Ericsson 1 2 3 John Sandra Susan(w) 4 5 6 Mike Julia(h) Robert 7 8 9 Elizabeth Empty Empty 2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it inwards. You can also tap the entry using the stylus. 3. Select

. Note Calling from the Call list is only possible in Compact mode, Edit > Compact mode. To make a call using the Contact list 1. Select in the application picker. 2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it inwards. 3. Select a phone number by rotating the Jog Dial. 4. Press the Jog Dial inwards. You can also tap the contact and/or number using the stylus. To make a call using voice control 1. There are three ways to use the voice recognition function. Press and hold the Jog Dial. Say the Magic word. Press the call button on the headset. When the Magic word function is activated, the appears in the status bar. icon 2. When you hear a short tone, say the voice command connected to the number you want to call. See To record a voice command on page 51. The P900 will connect you with the matching contact. You can use voice control when the P900 is handheld, used with a handsfree set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. Magic word cannot be used together with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. For more information, see Voice control on page 50. 42 Phone To end a call Select End call, or press the Jog Dial. Incoming calls When you receive a call, if the calling party is found in Contacts, the name of the caller will be displayed. If there is a picture, it will also be shown in a small or large version. See Incoming call picture on page 50. To handle an incoming call Use the screen buttons to select what to do. Answer Answer the call. Send Busy Reject the call. The calling party will hear a busy tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call. Mute Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged as a missed call. You can also answer by voice control, see Voice control on page 50. Options during or after a call There are several options available, depending on the situation. You can access some of them using the screen buttons, by tapping the field with the calling party details, or on the menus. Options that concern two or more active calls are described in Handling two or more calls on page 44. End call End the active call. Hold call/retrieve call Put the active call on hold/retrieve the held call. Add to contacts Create a new Contacts entry. This option appears automatically after a call if the phone number of the call is known, and not already stored in Contacts. See Add to contacts on page 51. Show contact Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that corresponds to the phone number of the active call. Zoom in/out Enlarge/reduce the view. Copy number Copy a phone number for exchange with other text fields or applications. Paste number Paste a copied number into a field Tap to make the following adjustments:

Call volume Adjust the volume in the phone. This is easier to do with the Jog Dial. Silent mode All sound ring signals will be turned off. Speakerphone Activate the P900 as a speakerphone. Mute microphone Turn the microphone on or off. Phone 43 Handling two or more calls During a call, you can make a second call, or answer an incoming call. The ongoing call is put on hold and the new call becomes active. The held call is shown with a grey background. If someone calls when a call is on hold, you will be asked if you want to release the held call and answer the incoming call. When an active call is finished, you are asked to retrieve the held call. If you do not respond within a few seconds, the held call will also be finished. To make and handle a new call during a call 1. During a call, make a second call, or answer an incoming call. 2. Press Chat Edit Phone Edit 11:03 John Smith 0123456789012(h) to get a list of call handling options with the Flip closed. With the Flip open, choose options by tapping the screen buttons, by tapping the field with the calling party details, or selecting from the menus. End active call End the active call, the held call becomes active. Anne Jones (w) End active call Switch calls Join calls Switch calls Switch between the active and held call. Join calls Join the two calls for a conference call. Transfer calls Connect the held call to the active call and disconnect yourself from the call. Release all End both calls. Show contact Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that corresponds to the phone number of the active call. Conference calls A conference call can be started when you have an active call and a held call. The conference call view is automatically displayed whenever a party has been added to the conference. If an incoming call is answered during a conference call, the conference call will be put on hold. Note Conference calls are only available if they are supported by your subscription. Phone Edit Chat Edit 1 2 3 John Smith Tom Clark Ann Jones

(w)

(w)

(h) 11:03 End conference Hold conference Hide parties 44 Phone To start a conference call With one active call and one held call, tap the Join calls button, or select Phone > Join calls from the menu. To add a new conference party 1. During a conference call, tap a new call. 2. Select Join calls. To manage a conference call Use the screen buttons:

on the button bar and make End conference End the conference for all parties. Hold conference Put the conference on hold. The other parties can still talk to each other. Show / Hide parties Switch between the standard call control view and conference call view. To speak privately to a specific conference party Tap a party in the list to get the following options:

Extract Make the selected party the active call, the rest of the parties will be put on hold. Release End the conference call for the selected party. Call list and call log The Call list shows calls made, received, rejected, or missed. The log keeps track of date, time, length, and cost information

(if available) for each call. The List view of the call log shows the calls in order with the most recent call at the top. To view the Call list with the Flip closed:

1. Press 2. Select Call list. or 1. Select 2. Press display. on the standby screen to open the Call list. and select which calls in the list you want to The currently selected view is not shown in the options menu. Tip With the Flip closed you can press call list. Press twice to call the last number used in the P900. once to view the To view the Call list with the Flip open:

1. In the Phone application, select 2. Select a listed call to see more detailed information about it. from the button bar. Phone 45 To delete calls from the Call list To delete all calls, select Phone > Delete all calls. To delete old calls, select Phone > Delete entries older than >

Enter a date > Delete To delete one call, open the detailed view on the call > Phone

> Delete this entry. Hints and smart functions Speakerphone If you open the Flip during a call, the speakerphone function is activated and the volume will increase. This lets you continue the conversation while using other functions of the P900. Close the Flip or tap to switch off the speakerphone. Note The speakerphone does not work while the phone is in silent mode. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure to excessive volume may damage hearing. Silent mode In silent mode all sound ring signals and sound alarm signals are turned off. When the Flip is closed, press and select Turn on silent to put the phone in silent mode. Press and select Turn off silent to turn off silent mode. When the Flip is open, tap the sounds icon in the status bar to open a dialogue where you can switch silent mode on or off. The vibrating alert still works in silent mode if not deactivated. Set up speed dial numbers Speed dial is a fast way to call one of nine selected phone numbers. The view contains nine speed dial positions. Each speed dial entry consists of a picture or an icon, and a name or a number. The names, numbers and pictures shown in the Speed dial view are derived from the Contacts application, see Contacts on page 94. If the contact has a picture stored then this picture is used. A default icon is used if the contact does not have a stored picture. from the button bar. To set a Speed dial number 1. Select 2. Select an empty position. 3. Select the desired contact. 4. Select Done. 46 Phone

, on the button bar. To edit or delete a Speed dial number 1. Select 2. Select Edit > Edit speed dial. 3. Select the contact to edit or delete. 4. To change the name, enter the new name. To delete a contact, tap Delete. 5. Select Done. Flight mode In flight mode the radio function is turned off so that it does not disturb sensitive equipment, for instance in an aeroplane or in a hospital. You cannot make and receive calls, but most of the other functions in the P900 are available. Note The phone and other communication functions must never be used in an aircraft unless otherwise instructed by the aircraft personnel. If the use of equipment without a radio transmitter is permitted, you can turn on the flight mode on the product. Doing so turns off the radio function. You can set a Power menu to ask you if you want to start the P900 in normal mode or flight mode each time you turn on the P900. See Flight mode on page 139 on how to activate this function. To use the Power menu The Power menu has the following options:

Phone Phone on Start the P900 in the normal way. Flight mode Start the P900 in flight mode. Power off Turn the P900 off. To set flight mode on and off when Power menu is selected 1. Press the On/Off button. 2. On the Power menu, select the option you want. 3. Press the Jog Dial,

, or tap Done. To set flight mode on or off 1. Select Control panel > Device > Flight mode. 2. Select Flight mode. 3. Select Flight mode now / Phone on now. 4. Tap Done. Controlling tone-based services You can use your P900 to control phone banking services or other tone-based services that use DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency). The P900 provides different ways of sending tones during a call:

Pressing keypad keys during an active call. 47 Including a tone sequence in the call setup. After the phone number, but before the digits, press and hold to insert a pause, represented by the character p. Then press your digits. Finally make the call by pressing

. Contacts Edit Unfiled Chat Edit Bank

+4613244500 p1#1234567890 p10#0#34#56789 (w) p30#1234#56 (w) p10#1#567890123 (w) p20#123456789 (w) Program digit sequences into a Contact card for the service. Each digit sequence to be sent as tones must begin with pc. Once your call to the service has been established and you want to send one of your pre-

programmed digit sequences, choose Show contact on the Phone menu to get to the Contact card with the tone sequences. Note It is not advisable to program any personal codes into your P900, in case your phone is stolen or lost. Support for TTY Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is an aid for people with speech impairments. To use the TTY device together with the P900 1. Connect the TTY device to the accessories connector at the base of the P900. 2. In Phone, go to Edit > Preferences > TTY Accessory and select the check box to set the P900 into TTY mode. Refer to the TTY device user manual to find out how to use the device. It may be necessary to use an adapter between the TTY device and the P900. You can still make normal calls with the P900 in TTY mode but other accessories such as handsfree will not work properly. Do not open the Flip during a TTY call. It will impair the quality of the connection. Note Support for voice carry over (VCO) and hearing carry over (HCO) is handled through the TTY device and not through the phone. Support for ALS Alternate line service (ALS) allows you to have more than one line, and more than one phone number, to one SIM subscription. If you are not subscribed to ALS, these dialogues and settings are hidden. Using ALS, you can select which line to use for outgoing calls. You can use the first line for any function, while the second line can be used for speech only. 48 Phone If you know what numbers and codes your PBX accepts, you can send these without the phone manipulating them. Start any number or command with a p. This is done by pressing and holding the Contact card, it should be stored with a leasing p, and a command (to the PBX or for example to a phone bank) with a leading pc. key. When storing such a number on a When using it at home, the call will still be dialled as an internal call via the PBX. Note When travelling abroad, use your phone as a normal GSM phone, by clicking the PBX status bar icon and set the calling card to Off. Incoming calls can be received at both lines at any time. The name of the line is shown and the ring signal defined for the line is used. To select a line for outgoing calls The preset line is shown by the icon in the status bar. If you want to use the other line:

With the Flip closed, press and select Switch to line 1 or Switch to line 2 depending on the previously preset line. With the Flip open, tap and select Switch to line 1 or Switch 2 to line 2 depending on the previously preset line. Corporate phone services in P900 The P900 can be used as a corporate phone in an Ericsson MD110 or Business Phone PBX, if this is equipped for mobile extensions. To place calls to colleagues, use the internal extension numbers. When dialling an external number, you do not need to dial the external line prefix; it is added automatically. Dial the switchboard operator or corporate voicemail as from any other corporate phone. It is recommended that when storing numbers in Contacts you use the international number format, starting with +. This also allows you to use the Contact card when you do not use the PBX, when you are abroad, and when you are sending SMS or MMS messages. Phone 49 Incoming calls via the PBX may be routed to the P900 as well as to your fixed extension, and you can answer in either telephone. During a call, the P900 can activate PBX features, such as making a new call, conference calls, inquiry calls, and call back.

When the phone is idle, click the status bar PBX icon Command to send other commands to the PBX, such as In meeting until..., Course, or Business trip. Phone Edit Chat Edit John Smith

+44274555140 (w) PBX call 02:00 End call New call Call back Conference PBX PBX PBX

... PBX Your PBX administrator controls call routing, feature buttons and commands in your phone via the settings file. Preferences In this menu you can change the settings for the phone options.

(Settings on your P900 that are system-wide and affect more than one application are made from the Control panel, see Control panel on page 138). To set the phone preferences 1. Select Phone > Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the item to set up. Incoming call picture If an incoming caller has a picture stored in contacts it will be shown on the screen. Select the checkbox to show a large version of the picture over the whole screen. Voice control The voice control option lets you manage calls using your voice. With Voice answer you can use words recorded for answer and busy to answer or send a busy signal to an incoming call. With Voice dialling, you can make a call by saying the contacts name. Say a magic word and then the name of the person you want to call, and the P900 will try to call the person. Instead of the magic word you can also press and hold the Jog Dial or press the handsfree set call button. Note Magic word is not supported with the Bluetooth headset/

car kit in the P900. Instead of magic word, push the button on the Bluetooth headset. After a confirmation tone, you should say the name. The magic word ensures that the P900 will not call somebody whose name has just been mentioned by chance. 50 Phone Voice dialling Select On or Off. Magic word Select the cases where you want to use the magic word when you use voice dialling. You must, however, record a magic word before you can select to use it. Using Magic word will increase battery drain. Voice answer Select On or Off. Tap On if you want to answer or reject incoming calls by voice commands. You must first record voice commands for Answer and Busy. Play caller name If you have recorded a name for a person in Contacts, the P900 will tell you the persons name when he or she calls you. This is useful when using your P900 together with a handsfree. Voice commands A list of the voice commands. A balloon means that a voice command is recorded for the command. To record a voice command 1. Select one of the options, Magic word, Answer, or Busy and tap Record. 2. Say the magic word, the answer command or the busy command after the tone. If you are recording a magic word, make sure that you choose a long unusual word, which can easily be distinguished from ordinary background speech. 3. Select Play to check the quality of your recording. 4. Select Done to exit. You are advised to record voice commands in a quiet environment to maximise recognition.You also have to select the voice commands carefully, so it does not activate by mistake from environment sounds. To record voice commands for individual contacts, see Creating and editing contacts on page 97. Add to contacts This is a function for adding called and calling parties to Contacts. After a call has ended, if the phone number is not already stored in the Contacts, you are asked if you would like to add it. Set the function On or Off. Handsfree Specify how to manage calls when the P900 is used with a handsfree kit connected. Answering mode Select the option you want. Normal Answer calls as normal. Any key Press any key (except

) on the keypad to answer. After 5 seconds P900 answers automatically after five seconds. Phone 51 You can also select to use a Bluetooth headset as the preferred sound device. See Pairing on page 128 for information on how to establish connection with the headset. Bluetooth: Preferred sound device Select the option you want. Phone Use the keypad to manage incoming and outgoing calls. Headset Use the headset or the keypad to manage incoming and outgoing calls. Divert calls You can divert incoming calls to another number if for any reason you are unable to answer them. To divert calls 1. Select the type of call you want to divert. 2. Specify the phone number you want to divert to. 3. Select Done. The settings are stored in the network. Tap Refresh to receive the current settings. Tip Normally the data/fax options should not be changed. Accepted callers You can specify who should be able to call you. All other callers will be rejected. Your options are:

All callers Everybody can phone you. Listed callers only Only people on the Accepted callers list can phone you. Contacts Only people in your Contacts address book can phone you. Speed dial list Only people in your Speed dial list can phone you. No one No one can phone you. To add a contact to the Accepted Caller list 1. Select Add new. 2. Select Lookup and chose a contact, or write the name and number of the contact. 3. Select Done. Call waiting Use these setting to control how P900 handles incoming calls during an already ongoing call. On You will be alerted by incoming calls. Off The P900 sends a busy tone to the calling party. 52 Phone Restrict calls You can set restrictions for calls made from or to your P900. You can, for example, protect it from being used for long-

distance calls. To restrict incoming calls 1. Select the Incoming tab. 2. Set restrictions for:

All incoming calls. Incoming calls when roaming. Use this to avoid costs for incoming calls when travelling abroad. To restrict outgoing calls 1. Select the Outgoing tab. 2. Set restrictions for:

All outgoing calls. Outgoing international calls. Outgoing international calls except to your home country. Voice mail For easy voicemail access, enter the number of the voicemail of your operator. With the Flip closed, press and hold to call this number. With the Flip open, select Phone > Call voice mail. Calling cards Calling cards are used together with some phone services. These settings specify how P900 handles calling cards. Most Calling card settings are protected by the Device lock, see Device lock on page 35. Calling card mode Select how to use calling cards. Calling cards A list of your calling cards. Selected card Select which of your calling cards you want to use. Please consult your calling card operator for more details. To create a new calling card account Select New and enter the account information. Access tab:

Name Enter a name for the calling card account. Access number Enter the phone number of the calling card server. Verification code Enter the verification code. International prefix Enter the international prefix used in your country. Set up tab:

Phone 53 Sending order Number then code means that the P900 first sends the phone number you have started to call, and then sends the verification number. Code then number means the opposite order. Delay for number/code Set a time delay between the moment the calling card answers the call and the P900 starts sending tones. Some international calling card services instruct their users to select a language by pressing a digit. When using the P900 calling card feature, you can insert such a digit in one of these places:

Immediately after the access number, but preceded by a pause sign, p. In the verification code. In the phone number that is dialled. Corporate phone services Corporate phone services are set up using the calling cards setting. To set up corporate phone services You set up corporate phone services by importing a .pbx type settings file. This file can be received via e-mail, stored on the Memory Stick or downloaded from Internet. Note Make sure the file is authentic before you import it. 1. Place the file in the Document > Unfiled area of the P900 or the Memory Stick. 2. Select Edit > Preferences > Calling cards. 3. Tap Import. 4. Select the settings file and tap Import. 5. Select the card among the imported cards in the Selected card control. 6. Activate the card by setting the Calling Card Mode to either Always use calling card or Prompt before call. TTY Accessory Select the check box when you want to use the P900 together with a TTY accessory. Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is an aid for deaf and speech-impaired people. AoC - Call meter settings Advice of Charge allows you to keep track of the cost of calls and to stop the P900 from making chargeable calls when a certain credit limit has been exceeded. The Advice of Charge option only appears in the list if it is supported by your current subscription. If the credit is limited, a Low credit warning is displayed, when there is approximately thirty seconds of credit left. 54 Phone To set the line tags 1. Select the ALS settings dialogue. 2. Edit the names for line 1 and 2. 3. Tap Done. When the credit runs out, Credit expired is displayed and ongoing, chargeable calls are stopped. Please refer to the onboard help for detailed information about the Call meter settings. Note PIN2 is required from your network operator for storing any changes you make to the Call meter settings. Not all networks provide charging information to the phone during a call. If your network provides this service and your subscription is for Advice of Charge Charging, you cannot make or receive any chargeable calls if you are roaming in a network that does not provide charging information. This restriction does not apply when your subscription is for Advice of Charge Information. You cannot change the type of subscription from your phone settings. Please consult your operator for more details. ALS settings If the user is not subscribed to ALS, these dialogues and settings are hidden. Some of the phone settings are used on a per line basis. In most cases, the settings displayed apply to the selected line. This is then indicated in the dialogue title bar. In other cases, the lines correspond to separate settings or tabs in the dialogues. Phone 55 MEDIA CommuniCorder With the built-in CommuniCorder camera you can record video clips and take pictures, view them on your phone screen and send them directly to friends or colleagues via multimedia messaging. You can also send the video clips and pictures you have saved in your P900 via messaging, infrared communication or Bluetooth wireless technology to, for example, a PC. It is also possible to exchange video clips and pictures between the P900 and the Web. The pictures in your P900 can be set as wallpaper or they can be added to the contacts in your phone book. See Personalizing your P900 on page 135 to find out more about using pictures. on the camera activates the A button CommuniCorder application and acts as the shutter release when taking pictures. The Jog Dial is used to set the CommuniCorder working mode:

Video camera Video Automatic setting Still camera Auto Automatic setting Still camera Night Set for dark environment Still camera Indoor Set for indoor light Still camera Outdoor Set for outdoor light Still camera Message picture Video camera Message video Set for picture size 160x120 pixels Set for video clips to be appended to messages Recording video clips You can record a video clip with the Flip open as well as closed. To record a video clip 1. Press the camera button application. to activate the CommuniCorder 2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the Video mode or Message video if the video clip is to be sent in an MMS. 3. Press again to start recording. The status indicator flashes red during the recording. 4. Press the Jog Dial to stop recording. The video clip is automatically saved in Video. You can also press the Jog Dial, or, when the Flip is open, tap the capture button at the bottom of the screen to record a video clip. 56 CommuniCorder By default the video clips you record are stored internally in the Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to change the storage location to another location, for example, on a Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27 for more information on using folders. To send a video clip you have just recorded in Flip closed, select Send as MMS from the Flip closed context menu. In Flip open, tap

. Note Most operators only accept video clips of 10 seconds length or 95 KB size.Use the Message video mode, or the Video limit setting in Video mode to limit the file size. Open the Flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder settings. With the Flip open, the CommuniCorder is activated by selecting

. To delete the last video clip 1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete clip. 2. Confirm the delete operation. To delete a video clip you have just recorded in Flip closed, select Delete from the Flip closed context menu. To manage video clips, tap Video player on page 64 for more information. to go directly to Video player. See Delay timer CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds. The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the shutter release and the moment when the recording starts. To set the delay time 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences. 2. Tap and set the desired delay time To record video with delay timer 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer. 2. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and a timer icon is shown before the recording is started. When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon

. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer. Video status Above the viewfinder, you will find the video status. Icons show whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, video quality, and audio quality. A number indicates how much time you have left. The calculation is based on the current settings plus available space on the storage location you have selected (internal or the Memory Stick Duo). CommuniCorder 57 Taking pictures You can take a picture with the Flip open as well as closed. To take a picture 1. Press the camera button application. to activate the CommuniCorder 2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the desired mode. 3. Press again to capture the image on the screen. The picture is automatically saved in Pictures. You can also press the Jog Dial, the Flip is open, tap the capture button screen to take a picture. button, or when the at the bottom of the By default the pictures you take are stored internally in the Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to change the storage location to another location, for example, on a Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27 for more information on using folders. To send a picture you have just taken in Flip closed, select Send as MMS from the Flip closed context menu. In Flip open, tap

. Open the Flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder settings. With the Flip open, you activate the CommuniCorder by selecting or pressing the camera button

. To view the last picture 1. Select CommuniCorder > View picture. 2. Select Done to return. To delete the last picture 1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete picture. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Delete to delete the picture. To delete a picture you have just taken in Flip closed, select Delete from the Flip closed context menu. To manage or edit the picture, tap See also Pictures and Image editor on page 60. to go directly to Pictures. Delay timer CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds. The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the shutter release and the moment when the picture is taken. To set the delay time and the picture freeze time 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences. 2. Tap and set the desired delay time. In this dialogue box you can also set the picture freeze time. This specifies the time the picture stays unchanged in the screen after you have taken it. 58 CommuniCorder To take a picture with delay timer 1. Select 2. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer. 3. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and

. a timer icon is shown before the picture is taken. When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon

. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer. Image status Above the viewfinder, you will find the image status. Icons show whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, delay timer status, picture size and picture quality. A number indicates how many pictures you have left. The calculation is based on the current settings plus available space on the storage location you have selected (internal or the Memory Stick Duo). Camera settings You may want to change some of these settings if, for example you are taking a picture in daylight or in dark surroundings. You can also choose what resolution, size and quality, you want for the pictures you take. Note Depending on which mode you are using, some settings may be fixed (and not user adjustable). To change preferences for the camera 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences. 2. Select the setting you want to change:

Move the slider to change the brightness of the picture. Move the slider to change the contrast. Turn the backlight On when the light behind the subject is brighter than the light in front of the subject. Turn the flicker free function On to reduce the effects of flicker from, for example, fluorescent light. Choose white balance according to the lighting conditions you are in when taking the picture. For pictures, choose quality and size. The picture sizes, 640x480, 320x240 and 160x120, are displayed in pixels. For video, choose quality for video and audio. Larger size and higher quality use more memory. Choose delay time and freeze time for the still camera, and delay time and Video limit for video. The icons in the upper right corner of the main view reflects the quality and size settings of the pictures and video clips and also the sound quality of video clips. To restore default CommuniCorder preferences 1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences. 2. Tap Default. 3. Tap Yes. CommuniCorder 59 Pictures and Image editor In Pictures you can manage all pictures saved in your P900. The pictures can be taken using the CommuniCorder, received via e-

mail, Bluetooth wireless technology or infrared communication, downloaded via the browser or transferred from your PC via a cable. Your P900 supports JPEG, GIF, PNG, WBMP and BMP picture formats. In the Image editor you can perform basic editing of your pictures. Pictures The pictures can be sent in multimedia messages, added to the contacts in your phone book, or used as a wallpaper image and screensaver. Thumbnail view The thumbnail view gives an overview of all the pictures in your P900. You can search for specific pictures and sort your pictures by name, date, size or type. Pictures Edit All Chat Edit Brioney At home Mont Blanc 309F0003 12 pictures (890Kb) Move between the pictures with the arrow buttons or Jog Dial. Change between a thumbnail view and a list view of the pictures by tapping or

. At the bottom of the screen you can see how many pictures you have saved in your P900. Tip To take a new picture, tap to go to the CommuniCorder. To sort the pictures Tap Edit to choose how to sort the pictures in your folders. Detail view Tap a picture to go to the detail view. In the detail view, you can rename your pictures and sort them into folders. This makes it easier for you to keep track of your pictures. To rename a picture 1. Select Pictures > Rename picture. 2. Enter a picture name > Done. Note Two or more pictures cannot have the same name. Chat Edit Pictures Edit Photos Snow 10:15am,21/06/04 60 Pictures and Image editor Tip Use the Folder function to organise your pictures. Read more about organising files in Folders on page 27. At the bottom of the screen you can see the picture information, for example, the size of the picture and the date the picture was taken. Actual size means each pixel of the image is displayed on one pixel of the screen, so a 640x480 image will be displayed with scroll bars as it is larger than the display area. and Use the current folder. view. or the Jog Dial to move between the pictures in takes you back to the thumbnail or list Sending and receiving pictures You can send pictures to other phones or to a PC via multimedia messaging, IR or Bluetooth use Pictures > Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. You can also save pictures that you have received via e-mail and in multimedia messages. See Incoming multimedia messages on page 85 and Receiving attachments on page 90. Note Pictures with Forward lock can not be sent further. Zooming pictures, widescreen and full screen From the detail view of the picture you can:

to zoom in. Tap Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in the picture. to zoom out. Tap Select Edit > Preferences and specify the picture orientation in widescreen. Tap a picture to display it over the whole screen. Tap it again to go back. Rotate the Jog Dial to browse the pictures in widescreen and full screen views. Deleting, moving, and copying From the detail view of the picture you can:

Select Pictures > Delete picture to delete it. Select Pictures > Copy picture to copy the picture to a clipboard so that you can paste it into an item in another application. Select Pictures > Copy to to copy the picture to another folder

(internal or on a Memory Stick Duo). See Folders on page 27 for more information. Use the folders menu to move a picture to another folder

(internal or on a Memory Stick Duo). See Folders on page 27 for more information. Pictures and Image editor 61 To copy, delete or move multiple pictures In the thumbnail and list views, select the pictures you want to delete, move or copy, by selecting the check boxes beside the picture names. Then select Pictures > the command you want. To delete you can also use the Storage Manager found in the Control panel. For more information, refer to Folders on page 27. Image editor Edit Image editor Using the Image editor, you can edit your pictures. You can crop and resize the pictures. You can also rotate the pictures by 90 at a time. You can also write and draw on them, using different colours. To start the Image editor From a picture opened in Pictures, select Edit > Edit picture. Editing pictures Editing is controlled from the toolbar below the picture. Tapping the tool icons will bring up a palette with choices:

Zoom in Zoom out Select colour Select one of the 16 colours Select pen Select one of the 4 pen sizes Select drawing tool Select one of the tools:

- Pen for freehand drawing

- Undo last action

- Undo all actions

- Add text

- Crop picture

- Resize picture Select rotation Select rotation counter-clockwise or clockwise You can save the edited image by selecting Image editor > Done. You can copy and paste by selecting Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste. You can only copy and paste whole pictures. If you make an error when editing the picture, you can undo the last by Edit > Undo. You can also undo all actions since the picture was saved, by selecting Edit > Undo all. 62 Pictures and Image editor To zoom in and out to zoom in. Tap Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in the picture. Note As soon as you tap outside the text item, the text is merged with the picture and cannot be edited or moved. To crop a picture 1. Tap and select the cropping tool

. to zoom out. Tap Select Edit > Zoom, and select between Fit to screen and Full A frame with 8 handles is placed around the picture. 2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define how the picture size. To draw on a picture 1. If desired, tap 2. If desired, tap 3. Tap 4. Draw with the stylus on the picture. and select the pen tool

. and select the desired colour. and select the desired pen size. and select the text tool To add text to a picture 1. Tap 2. Tap the place where the text should be put on the picture. 3. Enter the text in the text field. 4. If required, change the text properties, using the choices on

. the text, style and colours tabs. 5. Tap Done to place the text on the picture. You can move the text on the picture by tapping and dragging on the text. You can return to the text editor by tapping on the text item. should be cropped. 3. Tap anywhere, except on the handles, to crop the picture. To resize a picture 1. Tap and select the resizing tool

. A frame with 4 handles is placed around the picture. 2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define the new size of the picture. When you lift the stylus, the picture will be resized. Sony Image Station You can exchange pictures between your P900 and Sony Image Station on the Web. Use the browser in your P900 to go to the relevant Internet site and sign up:

For Europe: http://www.sonystyle-imaging.com For Japan: http://www.imagestation.jp For USA: http://www.imagestation.com Pictures and Image editor 63 Video player You can play video content that is recorded with the CommuniCorder, stored in your P900 or streamed. You can also play audio-only material which is encapsulated within an MPEG file or streamed. You can download video clips from an Internet site or transfer from a PC via a cable, or from a Memory Stick Duo. You can also exchange video clips with other phones or PCs via infrared communication, Bluetooth wireless technology or multimedia messaging. You do not have to download a complete video clip to be able to view it. You can use the streaming function and view the video clip from the Web site where it is located. The video clip is played with only a short time delay. The video player supports files in the MPEG-4 file format, for example name.mp4. You can store video clips both internally and externally. You can also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27. To adjust the volume Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to decrease the volume. Video clips A video clip is a short video sequence. Playing video clips The Video player opens in the list view. In this view, you get an overview of all the MPEG-4 video clips in your P900. You can search for specific video clips, zoom the video clip names and sort them by name, date, or size. At the bottom of the screen you can see how many video clips you have saved in your P900. To view a video clip 1. Select

. 2. Select a video clip in the list.

Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume levels may damage hearing. While a video clip plays, tap the screen to display the video clip in widescreen. Tap the screen again to go back. Specify the screen orientation in Edit > Preferences > Display. 64 Video player To copy, delete or move multiple video clips In the list view, select the video clips you want to delete, move or copy, by selecting the check boxes beside the picture names. Then select Video > the command you want. To delete you can also use the Storage manager found in the Control panel. For more information, refer to Folders on page 27. To sort the video clips Select Edit and choose how you want to sort the video clips in the current folder. To record a clip using the CommuniCorder Press the camera button CommuniCorder application. view. or select to activate the takes you back to the list Managing video clips The detail view is intended for managing one clip at a time. You can play and pause the clip by tapping

, and stop by tapping and

. The slider under the video area shows the current play position within the clip. Tap and drag the slider to move to another position. In this view you can send, rename, delete or move your video clips. Only the video clips saved in your P900 or on the Memory Stick Duo

(that is not streamed) can be handled in the detail view. To rename a video clip 1. Select Video > Rename clip. 2. Enter a video clip name >

Done. Two or more video clips cannot have the same name. Tip Use the Folder function to organise all your video clips. Video Edit All Chat Edit Diving in the ocean Playing 0:09 To copy the current video clip to another folder, select Video >

Copy to, then select a folder from the list. To view the video clip information Select Video > Info. To delete a video clip 1. Select the video clip you want to delete. Video player 65 2. Select Video > Delete clip. Saving video clips When you play video clips that you have received via e-mail or multimedia messaging, or that you have downloaded to your P900 from the Web, the viewer detail view is automatically launched. From the viewer detail view you can then save the video clip to your P900. To save a video clip from another application 1. Select the video clip you want to save. 2. Select Video > Save clip. 3. Select the folder you want to save the video clip in > Save. Sending and receiving video clips You can send and receive video clips using Video > Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Streaming Streaming is a data transfer method making multimedia available in real-time. You can, for example, listen to audio and watch video almost at the same time as it is sent. The data in the file is divided into small packets that are sent in a continuous flow, a stream.You can then begin viewing the file from the beginning as the rest of the packets are sent. The short delay at the start is to enable a small amount of data to be buffered. Your P900 can receive streaming multimedia. Applications Streaming applications can be classified into on-demand and live applications. Examples of on-demand applications are:

Streaming of music. Streaming of news (video and audio). Streaming of movie trailers. Streaming and download of video. Live streaming of music or video (broadcast). How to connect to a streaming service If you know the URL of the streaming service:

1. Select Video > Open location. 2. Enter the URL of the streaming service, or select a service from the drop-down list. 3. Tap Done. 66 Video player If you do not know the URL of the streaming service:

1. Open Internet and browse to the site where the service is. 2. Select the item you want to play, for example a video. The site server will download part of the video to the P900 buffer memory. This will take a short while. When the buffer memory is filled, the Video player will open the detail view, described above, and play the video seamlessly. Preferences When you view a video clip in full screen mode, you can select the orientation of the picture To change the orientation of the picture in full screen mode 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Display tab. 3. Tap Left handed or Right handed orientation > Done. When you view a video clip from a Web site, using the streaming function, a media buffer is used to provide a steady flow of data. Increasing the size of the media buffer may improve the play-back of the video clip. To change the media buffer size 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Buffering tab. Video player 3. Select Custom setting and move the slider left or right > Done. When you download a video clip to your P900, it is saved in the download cache memory. When this memory is full, you have to empty it to be able to download new video clips to your P900. To clear the download cache 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Buffering tab. 3. Select Clear cache > Done. When you view a video clip from a Web site, you may have to set the proxy settings. To change the proxy settings 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Proxy tab. If the proxy settings set in the control panel are to be used, tap Automatic configuration. If the manual settings are to be used, enter the relevant information. 67 Music player Your P900 has mobile music in the form of a stereo music player. With the music player you can listen to single music tracks or entire folders with tracks. You can download tracks to your P900 from a PC, the Internet or Memory Stick Duo, and create different folders with tracks. Your P900 supports a number of different sound files, including the popular MP3 format. See Technical data on page 185 for more information on supported file types. You can store sound files both internally and on the Memory Stick Duo. You can also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27. When you receive a phone call while listening, the playback will be paused. When you end the call, you must navigate back to the Music application to restart playing. Tip To listen to more music you can store music on several Memory Stick Duos and carry them with you. Playing sound files You can play MP3 music both in Flip closed and in Flip open. In

, select Music player, and Flip closed, with the Jog Dial, select select the track you want to play. Press commands. to find other If you navigate to the standby screen while you play music, you can press to pause. Press it again to play. If you launch another application the music will still play. If this application requires dedicated audio, the playback will be paused. Jog Dial control Rotate the Jog Dial to select a sound track. Press it inwards to play. Press it again to stop. To adjust the volume Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to decrease the volume. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume levels may damage hearing. 68 Music player Track-folder view This view is intended for playing entire folders with MP3 files. In the track-folder view you can Pause, and Play, Stop the playback of the current folder, and see the duration of the track. Selecting a track and will play the tapping selected track and all the following tracks in the folder. Use the slider to move forwards and backwards in the track. Select Music >

Manage tracks to move to the file list view. Music Edit All Sony Ericsson 0:00/3:35 Aeroplane Beautiful Night Rooster Song for you Sony Ericsson theme Standing Still Loop and random With the loop function you can decide if you want to listen to the tracks in the current folder only once, or if you want to loop them until you manually stop the play-back. Select the random function to play the tracks randomly. To loop a list Select Music > Loop. Music player To play a list randomly Select Music > Random. Managing sound files File list view In the file list view you can see how many tracks you have in the current folder. Tapping a file name will open the detail view, and allow you to play and manage that file. To copy, delete or move multiple files, select the files you want to delete, move or copy, by selecting the check boxes beside the file names. Then select Music > the command you want. Music Edit All Aeroplane Beautiful Night Rooster Song for you Sony Ericsson theme Standing Still Stuck with You... Walk on 8 tracks (6806 KB) To delete you can also use the Storage manager found in the Control panel. For more information, refer to Folders on page 27. Tap to move directly to the track-folder view. 69 Detail view The detail view is intended for managing one file at a time. Tap a file name to open the detail view. You can also play and pause the file by tapping and

. In the detail view you can move tracks between your different folders using the folder function, or rename or delete them. The detail view displays the name of the track, the artists name, the album title, the track number, the copyright year, the sound file type and the duration of the track. Note The amount of information displayed depends on how much information is available on the sound file. Move between the tracks in the current folder using the and buttons. Music Edit Unfiled Aeroplane Artist:

Album:

Filename:

Aeroplane Date and Size:

6:02pm, 21/06/04 2107KB Duration:

3:35 0:00 To rename a track 1. Select Music > Rename track. 2. Enter a track name and tap Done. Two or more tracks cannot have the same name. To delete a track from the P900 1. Select Music > Delete track. 2. Select Yes. Viewer If you play sound tracks remotely, for example music on an Internet site, a view similar to the Detail view displays. The commands you find in this view are similar to those in the Detail view. Managing track folders In the track-folder view, the Music player plays the MP3 files of the selected folder. (With one exception, the All folder. If you select this folder, all MP3 files in all music folders will be played.) Using the folder function you can create new folders for sound tracks. You can create folders on the Memory Stick Duo. You can also use several Memory Stick Duos for your music, for example. In any Music player view, you can create a new folder using the Edit Folders command in the Folder Menu. Then you move or copy your sound files to the new folder. You can add more folders with sounds as long as there is memory available. You can also sort the files using commands in the Edit menu. 70 Music player Note You can send WAV and AMR sound files in multimedia messages, and MP3 and AU sound files as attachments to multimedia messages. Preferences You can choose if you want all types of sound files to be displayed in the file list view, or if you want to display only a certain type of sound file. To select sound file types 1. Select Edit > Preferences from the file list view. 2. Check the boxes next to the sound files you want to include in the track folders and tap Done. Saving sound files When you receive sound files in other applications, such as e-mail and multimedia messages, you activate the viewer in your P900. From the viewer you can then save the sound file to your P900. To save a track from another application 1. Tap Save or select Music and tap Save. 2. Select the folder you want to save the track in and tap Save. Sending and receiving sound files You can send and receive sound files using Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Music player 71 Internet You use Internet, the P900 browser, to:

Connect to the Internet to view and access Web and WAP pages. Receive and view Push messages from your WAP service provider. Download Java applications, images and audio. The browser can open Web pages that use Java script or frames, but functions that use Java script in the Web page will not work properly. You can save bookmarks to viewed pages, to be able to access them easily. You can also save pages in the P900 for off-line viewing. The browser uses folders for categorising information. The folders used are bookmarks, saved pages, signed documents, and Push messages. Push messages is a service that gives you notifications about, for example, weather forecasts, sport results, and stock quotes. The notification is sent to you as a message that contains a WAP link to the site with the information you subscribe to. Before you can use Internet, you need to set up an Internet account in the Control panel. If you intend to use certain WAP services it might be necessary to set up a WAP account in the Control panel as well. See Getting started with Internet and Messaging on page 162. To start the browser Start the browser by:

pressing the Internet button. selecting selecting selecting a URL in another application. in the application picker. in the application launcher

. Note If required, you have to enter your username and password to log in to your Internet account. While opening a page, the P900 might not receive incoming calls. However, when the page is properly opened you can receive a call and the page will still be open. The application has two views:

Browser view The base view of the application, where you can Bookmarks view view Web and WAP pages. A list view where you can save shortcuts:

to Web and WAP sites on the Internet to locally stored pages to documents digitally signed by you. 72 Internet Using the browser view The P900 can display the Internet page in normal view or full screen view. Use the Internet button to change between the views. In full screen view, press the Jog Dial short forward to display a menu with the most frequently used commands. Sony Ericsson P900 Internet E dit Chat Edit Sony Ericsson C D A B E 0:03 K J H G F A Internet menu. B Edit menu. C Go to the next page. D Go to the previous page. E Shift between the browser view and the bookmarks view. F Disconnect or get information about the connection. G Go to the home page. H Stop loading the page. J A secure connection is established. K Progress bar, shows the loading progress. Browser view options Internet menu Open page Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down list. Add to bookmarks Enter the name of the bookmark and select the folder to save it in. Save page Enter the name of the page and select the folder to save it in. Send as Send the current URL via text or multimedia message, e-mail, Infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology. Find Enter text and search for the text in the page. Find next Search for the next occurrence of the search text. Scan text Go to the area populated with the greatest amount of text. Reload page Reload the page. Load all images Load all images of the page. Page information Show the page information. Bookmarks Open the bookmark view. Edit menu Cut Cut out the marked information from an input field. Copy Copy the marked information. Copy all Copy all information on the page. Paste Paste the copied text into the selected field. Internet 73 Full screen Expand the browser view. Zoom Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large. Preferences Set the preferences of the browser. Help View help on Internet. Internet button Full screen When you have opened an Internet page, press the Internet button to display the page in full screen. Normal browser view Press the Internet button again to go back. Handles on the screen The browser will outline a Web page as you are used to seeing it on your PC. Use the handles on the screen to scroll:

Scroll up and down Tap the handle to the right of the screen and drag it up or down. Scroll left and right Tap the handle at the bottom of the screen and drag it to the left or to the right. Jog Dial Scroll up and down When you have opened an Internet page, rotate the Jog Dial to scroll up and down. Short forward In Normal view, change between the Internet and the Edit menus. In full screen view, show a menu with the most frequently used commands. Scan text function Press the Jog Dial inwards to scan the page for text. The screen will navigate to the area populated with the greatest amount of text. Repeat the operation to find the next most populated area. Context-sensitive menus The context-sensitive menu is opened when you keep the stylus pressed on a link or a picture. Text link and picture link Open link Open the active link. Link information Show information on the link. Add to bookmarks Add the active link URL to the bookmark list. Loaded picture (with or without link) Save image Save the picture in the P900. Copy image Copy the picture to the clipboard. View image View the picture adapted to the screen

(enlarged or reduced). Send image as Send the picture as text or multimedia message, e-mail, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology. Not loaded picture (with or without link) Load image Load the picture. Voice call link Call Place a call according to the link. 74 Internet New SMS Send an SMS message according to the link. New MMS Send an MMS message according to the link. New contact Create a contact with the link information. To save a page for off-line browsing 1. Select Internet > Save page. 2. Change the page name, if required, and select a folder to save Mail to link New e-mail Send an e-mail according to the link. New MMS Send an MMS message according to the link. New contact Create a contact with the link information. Icons within a page Picture not loaded (can be loaded manually). Damaged picture (not possible to load). Note If images are not loaded, select the picture icons or select Internet > Load all images. To open a specific Web page 1. Select Internet > Open page. 2. Enter the page URL or select a previously viewed page from the drop-down list. 3. Select Open. To navigate through recently opened pages 1. Select 2. Select to move back to previously viewed pages. to move forwards again. it in. 3. Select Done. To create a bookmark to the open page 1. Select Internet > Add to bookmarks. 2. Change the bookmark name, if required, and select a folder to save it in. 3. Select Done. To download and upload files, for example, applications When you select a link to a downloadable file, for example, applications, images and so on, information on the file is displayed. Select Yes to start the download. When you select a link for uploading a file, a form for submitting the file is displayed. Select the file and select Yes to start the upload. To view information on the open page 1. Select Internet > Page information. 2. Select the Content tab to view the page information. Internet 75 3. Select the Connection tab to view information on the connection. 4. Select the Certificates button to view the information on:

Server User To disconnect from the Internet 1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD or GPRS

) in the status bar. 2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu 3. The dialogue Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears. 4. Select Yes. WIM Access When the browser requires access to the WIM card, for example, when establishing a secure connection, you have to enter the correct PIN. For more information, please contact your service provider or IT department. Signing documents You have to enter the signing PIN each time a signing operation is going to be performed. 76 User authentication request Whenever a user authentication is requested, you have the possibility either to select a certificate and confirm the user authentication, to select to continue anonymously or to cancel the connection. If Connect anonymously has been set, the browser will instead automatically try to connect anonymously. Using the bookmark view B A Folder menu. B Edit menu. C Internet menu. D Select an icon to view information on the bookmark. E Checked bookmarks can be deleted from the Internet menu. F Select the bookmark text to open the page. G Select to go to the home page. H Shift between browser and bookmarks views. A C D E F All Internet E dit Chat Edit Search I nternet My home page SonyEricsson News Webmail Project home 711 time table CSS fonts G H Internet Bookmark view options Internet menu Open page Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down list. New bookmark Enter the URL, the name of the bookmark and select the folder to save it in. Delete Delete the selected bookmark. Edit menu Edit Edit the selected bookmark. Sort on date / name Sort the entries. (Available for Push messages and Signed documents only.) Zoom Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large. Preferences Set the preferences of the browser. Help Open the help for Internet. Folders menu All Show all contacts in the list. Bookmarks Show all bookmarks. Saved pages Show all saved pages. Unfiled Show the bookmarks that are not in a folder. Edit folders Categorise your contacts in folders (business, personal and so on). The contents in the Folders menu can change depending on the pages and bookmarks stored in the P900. Icons Bookmark Saved page Push message from the WAP service provider Signed document To open a bookmark 1. Select the bookmark text. 2. The bookmarked item is opened. To view bookmark information 1. Select the check box of the preferred bookmark. 2. Select Edit > Edit. Information on the bookmark is shown. From the information screen you can:

Edit the bookmark. Delete the bookmark. Send the bookmark as e-mail, SMS message, Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared, or MMS message. To delete several bookmarks 1. Select the check box of the bookmarks to delete. 2. Select Internet > Delete. 3. Select Yes to confirm. Internet 77 Preferences The browser is initially set up to work, but you have to set up your own account. A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to use the Web configurator on www.SonyEricsson.com. See also Internet accounts on page 146 for more information. The easiest way to set up Internet and WAP accounts is to ask your Internet service provider to send you an auto setup message containing the required setup information. The accounts will then be set up automatically on your P900. To guarantee the integrity of the settings, a PIN may be used. For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for example on-line banking, can only be accessed from a particular WAP account. See WAP accounts on page 155 for more information. Note Proxy settings for MMS messages, and for a WAP gateway should be set in the WAP account. Other proxy settings should be set in the Internet account. To set up the browser 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Perform the setup according to the following:

Basic settings Enter the URL for the page to be shown when the browser is started from the Internet button; either a page stored in the P900 or a page on the Internet. Select the WAP account to be used when the home page is loaded. The accounts are set up in the control panel. Select if a new page should be displayed over the whole screen. Select if you want to use a vertical scroll bar to scroll the pages up and down. Otherwise you can use the Jog Dial. Select if images should be loaded. If images are not loaded, the page will be loaded faster. Non-loaded images can be loaded manually when viewing the page. Select if sounds should be played when the page is opened. Select if animations should be played when the page is opened. Security settings Select if you want to save signed documents. Select if you want to connect without giving away your identity. Select if you want to connect using the WIM card. Select if you want to allow cookies. 78 Internet Advanced settings Select if you want to be able to receive messages from your WAP service provider. Select if you want to automatically open the URL in WAP Push messages. Select if you want to remove out-of-date messages automatically. Select a sound that notifies you when a Push message arrives. Set the size of the cache memory. The cache is the part of the memory where viewed pages are stored. Stored pages will load faster when you visit them again. Select Clear history to empty the list of pages visited and cookies stored. Select Clear cache to empty the cache memory. Internet 79 Games There are two pre-installed games in your P900. Traditional Chess and the card game Solitaire. Played Select if you want to play locally against your P900 or against another P900 user. More games are available on the Multimedia for P900 CD in your original P900 box. You can also install games from other developers, see Installing applications on page 123. Chess You can play Chess against the P900, or against another P900 user via SMS. Please read the help texts for detailed information on how to set up and play Chess. To start a new game 1. Select Chess > New game to initiate a game. 2. Enter details as desired in the New game dialogue. You can return to these details later. Name Give the game a name so you can return to it later if you have to interrupt it. Notes Write a note about the game. You play Choose to play white or black. Against Select the level of your opponent. 3. Tap Play to start the game. To play Chess 1. Select the piece you want to move. The square where it is standing will now be marked with an triangle. 2. Select the square to which you want to move the piece and piece will move to it. Closing the Flip closes the game temporarily and saves the session status. Your opponent will be sent an end-of-game text message. Solitaire Solitaire is a card game played with a standard deck of 52 cards and up to 4 Jokers. The purpose of Solitaire is to remove all the cards from the piles to the layout card whilst scoring as many points as possible. 80 Games The game will either start with a new game or with the layout for an earlier, interrupted game. (The game data is saved on return to desktop, when the Flip is closed or when the battery is low.) 2. Select the card you want to move and it will be higlighted. 3. Select the card to which you would like to move the higlighted card. To restart the game during a game Select Solitaire > New game. To undo/redo a move Select Edit > Undo move / Redo move. Points are awarded for playing pile cards and bonus points are awarded for unbroken, ascending or descending runs of four or more rank cards. When you cannot play any more cards and cards still remain in the piles, the game is over. If all the pile cards are removed, bonus points are awarded and the hand is won. You are then challenged to play a Hi/Low game to acquire more bonus points. After the challenge, the game continues and a new hand is dealt with one less Joker. Rules When the game starts, 35 cards are dealt from the deck into 7 piles of 5 cards. A further card is then dealt face up from the layout card. Cards can only be played from the bottom of the piles. To play a pile card it must have a face value of one more or one less than the layout card. Aces are low and may not be played onto kings. Jokers can be played onto any card and any card can be played onto a joker. Play Solitaire Solitaire is only available with the Flip open. 1. Select the icon for Solitaire. Games 81 BUSINESS Messaging With types of messages:

Messaging you can create, send, and receive different SMS (Short Message Service) messages are text messages sent and received via the network operator's message centre. When a text message has pictures, sounds, melodies and animations inserted, it becomes an EMS (Enhanced Message Service). MMS (Multimedia Message Service) messages. A multimedia message can contain text, graphics, animations, photographic images, audio clips and ring melodies. E-mail messages. Your P900s mail client supports POP3 and IMAP4 mail servers, MIME attachments and SMTP for sending mail. You also use Messaging to receive:

Area Information messages.These are text messages broadcast to all subscribers in a network area, for example local road reports or local taxi phone numbers. (Area Information services are not available from all operators). BIO (Bearer Independent Object) messages. There are different types of messages:

Setup (e-mail, Internet, WAP accounts). E-mail notifications. Files for exchanging electronic business cards (vCard) and calendar information (vCal). Auto setup files for OTA (Over The Air) configuration. Beamed messages. These are files received via infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. The different types of messages are handled by separate messaging accounts. Select Messaging accounts to see the details of the messaging accounts on your P900. Control panel > Connections >

You can have any number of e-mail accounts - a typical configuration will be one business and one personal account. When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for synchronized e-mails is automatically created on your P900. With the Flip closed, text and multimedia messages can be sent and received using the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced tasks are, however, best handled with the Flip open. 82 Messaging To save an e-mail message to Outbox 1. After composing your message, select Send. 2. Select Save to outbox. Messages that you send from an e-mail synchronization account are always saved to Outbox and sent from your PC after your next synchronization. Draft Draft contains messages that are not ready to be sent. To store a new message in Draft Create the message and exit without selecting Send. To move a message from Outbox to Draft Open the Outbox message list and select Message > Move to Draft. Sent Sent contains messages you have sent from your P900. Tip Regularly delete old messages from your Sent folder, especially those with attachments, to clear storage space. Before using Messaging Before you can send and receive any messages (except for SMS) you need to set up the necessary accounts. A simple way of setting up an Internet or e-mail account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your P900. You can also use the Web configurator on www.SonyEricsson.com. Received auto-configuration messages are stored in the Auto setup inbox. See Getting started with Internet and Messaging on page 162. Folders in Messaging Messaging accounts can have the following folders: Inbox, Outbox, Draft and Sent. Inbox Inbox contains received messages. You can reply to, forward, and delete messages, but not edit them. Outbox Outbox contains messages that are ready to be sent. If you are creating several e-mails, and not using GPRS, you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and send them all at the same time. Messaging 83 The accounts in Messaging When you open Messaging, a list of your accounts appears. The top items in the list, Create SMS, and Create MMS, are shortcuts for directly creating new text messages (SMS or EMS). An asterisk next to an account indicates that a message has arrived since you last opened the accounts inbox. Handling text messages A text message is sent via SMS (Short Message Service). It can contain up to 160 characters (70 characters if you use non-Latin characters). If you create a longer message it will be sent as two

(or more) separate messages (concatenated), but usually received as one message. If you add pictures, sounds and other items to your message it becomes an EMS message. Text messages can be sent to one or more people, and you can request a delivery report when your text messages have been delivered to the recipients. The delivery report arrives on your P900 as a text message. If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which was already located in Outbox). To write and send a text message 1. In Messaging select Create SMS. (You can also select SMS >

tap Message > New.) 2. Enter the recipients number or select To and select recipient or recipients from your contact list and select Done. 3. Write your message. 4. Go to the address tab delivery report or not. 5. Tap Send. and specify whether you want a To add an EMS item to your text message Use the icons at the bottom of the screen to select the type of item you wish to add. Tap Tap to insert one of the smilies that appears. to insert a picture or an animation. The last used picture or animation appears. Tap More to get more animations to use. Tap New to draw a picture of your own. Tap to insert a sound. The last used sounds appears. Tap More to get more sounds to use. a a Tap Tap to write bold text. to change the size of the text you write. 84 Messaging To format the text in the message using EMS features 1. Highlight the text you want to format. 2. Tap Edit > Format text. 3. Tap General tab to change the Alignment and Font. 4. Tap Style tab to check the character style check boxes: bold, italic, underline, or strike-through. 5. Select Done. You can also use the icons a a and described above. To save a received EMS item 1. Tap the item. 2. Select Edit > Save object. Handling multimedia messages MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) messages can include real pictures, animations and sound, organised like a slide presentation with time-based control of the playback. Composing a multimedia message is like building a small slide presentation. A typical page will consist of a picture, some text and sound. Refer to Technical data, section MMS on page 187 for supported file types that you can add. You can take a picture with the CommuniCorder and send it as a multimedia message using the Send as command from Pictures. Multimedia messages can be sent to a mobile phone or an e-mail account. How a recipient receives an MMS you send depends on your MMS service and how the receiving phone complies to MMS specifications:

Compliant and conformant phones can receive pictures of size 160x120 pixels. Compliant and non-conformant phones can receive pictures of almost any size. Partly compliant phones can read the message on the Internet, using WAP. Non-compliant phones will receive an SMS notification. Incoming multimedia messages To play a received multimedia message Open the MMS inbox and select the new message. The first time a multimedia message is opened it plays automatically. The next time you open the message you can play it by pressing the Play Button (Flip open) or by choosing Play from the menu (Flip closed). Messaging 85 To forward an MMS 1. Open the message. 2. From the Message menu, select Forward. 3. On the address tab, select To and enter the recipients mobile number or e-mail address. 4. Select Send. To store a received MMS item, for example a picture 1. Open the message. 2. Select the picture you want to save. 3. Select Save picture or select Edit > Save picture. 4. Select the storage location. 5. Select Save. You can store items both internally and externally. You can also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27. Creating and sending multimedia messages To create a new multimedia message 1. In Messaging select Create MMS. (You can also select MMS

> Message > New. or open an existing message and select Message > New ). 2. From the Select template dialogue, tap the name of the template you want and tap Select. The Blank template will open a blank message. 3. The first page of the new message is now displayed. Select an item from the menu that appears. Tap to open the menu if it does not open automatically. If you select Add scribble the Image editor presents a white background onto which manual graphics can be added. This includes controls for pen, crop, colour, scale, rotate and pen width. 4. Tap again to add text, audio or voice to the page. Tap the page to return to it. 5. Tap if you want to change the time this page should be shown. Default time is 5 seconds. 6. Select Edit > background colour to give the message a background colour. 7. Tap to add a new page to the multimedia message in which you can insert items. 8. Select Edit > Page order to Message E dit Chat Edit 1/1 Draft 2 CommuniCorder Add video Add picture Add scribble Add text Add sound Add recording Send change the page order in the message. 86 Messaging To enter the recipients phone number 1. Select the 2. Select To and select the recipient from Contacts. address tab. or:

Select the line beside To and enter the recipients mobile number or e-mail address. To insert an attachment 1. While creating your multimedia message, select the attachment tab, select Add. 2. Select the type of attachment you want to add. 3. Select the attachment. To send the multimedia message Tap Send. Preferences to a multimedia message Select Edit > Preferences to set the preferences to a multimedia message. The following settings are available:

Hide number Prevent your phone number from being displayed in the recipients phone. Read report Request a receipt when the recipient has open your message. Delivery report Request a receipt when the message has been delivered to the recipients phone. Editing multimedia messages Here you can see the first page with an inserted picture. Message E dit Chat Edit 1/1 Draft 5 To delete, replace or edit an inserted item Select the inserted item and choose an action. While editing an image you can add scribble, resize, crop or rotate your image. To undo your changes, select Edit >

Undo all. Note If you have accepted changes by selecting Done, you will not be able to undo them. E dit picture E dit time Delete Copy Send To edit item time For each item in a page, it is possible to set the time when the item appears and for how long it is displayed or played. 1. Select the item so it is highlighted 2. Select Edit time Messaging 87 3. Set the Start time, which is the number of seconds before the On means that the multimedia message is downloaded and item appears after the start of the page. The default is 0, meaning show or play immediately. 4. The default Duration is for the item to continue for the remaining duration of the page. To change this, un-check Page time and change the duration to the required value in seconds. Start time + duration cannot exceed total page time.

, or select Edit > Page time to see the time You can also tap settings for all items in a page. Tap the time bar to adjust the time settings for each item. To add or delete a template To make a template from a message, select Save as template, give the template a name, and tap Done. To delete a template, tap the name of the template you want in the Select template dialogue and tap Delete. To set the download method for receiving multimedia messages, manual or automatic Control panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >

In MMS > Automatic. Off means that only headers will be downloaded and can be viewed. Home only means the same as for On below, but only valid in your home country. can be read like any other message. There is no intermediate step. Handling e-mails Writing e-mails To write a new e-mail Select an e-mail account and select Message > New. If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which was already located in Outbox). To mark an e-mail as urgent On the address tab, select High in the Priority list. To enter addresses from Contacts when writing an e-mail 1. Select To:

2. In the Select contact dialogue select the check box for each entry you want to send the e-mail to. 3. Select Done. Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an e-

mail: enter a comma between each address. 88 Messaging Sending e-mail To send an e-mail message Select Send > Send immediately. If your P900 is connected to the Internet when you send an e-

mail, it will be sent immediately and your P900 will remain connected to the Internet. If not, your P900 will connect to the Internet and then send the e-mail. Tip If you are creating several e-mails, and not using GPRS, you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and send them all at the same time. To save an e-mail message and send it later Select Send > Save to Outbox. To move an e-mail message from Outbox to Draft In your list of Outbox messages, tap to the left of the e-mail (a tick appears), and select Message > Move to draft. If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically be stored in the Draft folder (unless it was created from Outbox). Adding attachments To attach an entry to an e-mail message 1. On the attachment tab, select Add. 2. Select the type of attachment you want to add, and select the item. Messaging Send as e-mail You can send the entry you are viewing as an attachment to a new e-mail from the following applications:

Music player, Video, Tasks, Viewer, Jotter, Internet, Sound recorder, and Calendar, Contacts, Pictures. To attach a Calendar entry to an e-mail message 1. Open the entry in Calendar and select Calendar > Send As. 2. Select Email > Done. 3. Complete the e-mail message and select Send. To attach a Contact to an e-mail message 1. Open the contact details for the contact you wish to send and select Contacts > Send as. 2. Select Email > Done. 3. Complete the e-mail message and select Send. Receiving e-mail E-mails must be fetched from the e-mail server on the Internet or at your office. This can be done manually using the Get & send function or automatically by requesting the P900 to check for new e-mail at certain times. When you forward an e-mail, you can choose whether or not to forward the attachment. Large attachments increase the size of an e-mail and consequently the connection time needed to send it. 89 Receiving attachments Any attachments to an e-mail message are displayed on the tab. The icon next to an attachment in the list identifies the type of attachment. To view an attachment you need a viewer for that type of file.Your P900 comes with pre-installed viewers for Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files. More viewers are available from the Multimedia for P900 CD. To save an attachment, for example a picture 1. Open the e-mail message and select the 2. Tap the attachment, which opens the Pictures application. 3. Select Pictures > Save. 4. Select the location where you want to store the message. 5. Select Save. tab. You can store items both internally and externally. You can also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick Duo. See Folders on page 27. Reply with history If messages is set up to reply with history, the original message is included when you reply to it, see Messaging accounts on page 150. Downloading You can choose not to download large e-mails and receive just a header instead. A header contains the subject line, senders details, and date, but not the full message. To specify a size limit for e-mail, above which you only receive a header 1. Select Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >

Email (select the e-mail account) > Edit. 2. Select Inbox. 3. Select an option from the Download list. In your list of messages, headers are denoted by

. To download the full message 1. In your list of messages, select the header. 2. Select Get & Send. To download a series of messages 1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of each entry (a tick appears). 2. Select Get & Send. Note If you delete a header, or a whole message, the message will no longer be visible in your message list. 90 Messaging A scheduled download will fail if your P900 is engaged in a voice call. It may fail if it is connected to another ISP, that is, through a different Internet account than specified for the e-mail account. If e-mail messages are not downloaded because a scheduled download fails, they will be downloaded during the next successful connection. More about messaging Finding messages In both the list of accounts and list of messages, Find searches through the subject lines, senders details, the text of the message, and dates. In an open message, Find searches through the text of the message and highlights the text it finds. You can only search through e-mail messages that have been fully downloaded. Downloading e-mails automatically You can schedule your e-mail messages to be downloaded automatically at certain times. To download your e-mails automatically 1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >

Email. 2. Select the required e-mail account and select Edit. 3. Select Inbox > Schedule. 4. Set time or interval for scheduled download and select Done. Disconnecting and connecting If your P900 is already connected to the Internet when you send an e-mail, it will remain connected after sending it. If your P900 is not connected before sending an e-mail, it will connect and send the message. Note You can send text messages while connected to the Internet. If your connection is CSD or HSCSD it must be disconnected before you can make or receive a phone call. If your connection is GPRS, it may be suspended to enable a phone call to be made or received. You may need to repeat the data activity (Web page fetch, get e-mail) after the call has ended. If your P900 cannot connect to the e-mail account, automatic download will fail, and account. will be displayed next to the e-mail Messaging 91 Get and send To get and send messages for one specific account 1. Select 2. Select the desired account (MMS or e-mail for example). 3. Select Get&send. Messaging. To get and send messages for all your accounts 1. Select 2. Select Message > Get&send. Any unsent messages in your Messaging. Outbox will now be sent and new messages not yet downloaded will be downloaded to your P900. Note If the e-mail account is set up to access the mail server through a Secure access connection (see Secure tokens on page 159) you must have the Flip open when you use Get&send. If the Flip is closed you will see an error message. Saving contact details When you receive a message, you can save the contact details of the person who sent you the message. To save the senders details On the messages address tab, select From. Note If you save an address from an e-mail synchronized from your company PC, the corporate version of the address, rather than the full Internet e-mail address, will be saved to Contacts. If the corporate version of the address is not an Internet address

(an X.400 address, or just the sender's name, for example), you can use it to send e-mails from your synchronized account, but you cannot use it in e-mails that you send directly from your P900. Connecting and disconnecting from the Internet To disconnect from the Internet 1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD or GPRS

) in the status bar. 2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu 3. The dialogue Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears. 4. Select Yes. If your service provider or network is unavailable Sometimes a message cannot be sent because your P900 cannot connect to a network. Please check that the Messaging Account and Internet Account information in the Control Panel is correct. 92 Messaging the availability of area information services and area information channel numbering. See Area tab on page 154 for more information. If you have both GPRS and Dial-Up Internet accounts, try sending the e-mail message using an account of the other type. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network and Dial-Up Internet accounts use the GSM network. Synchronized e-mails When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for synchronized e-mail messages is automatically created on your P900 and indicated by

. You can have more than one account for synchronized e-mails. If you send an e-mail as PC mail, the mail will be sent via the PC when you have synchronized your P900 with the PC. If you set up a POP or IMAP account which accesses the same mail server, the two accounts will contain the same messages. Note that there is no connection between the accounts; the copies in each account are separate. Area information Area information messages are text messages that are sent to all subscribers in a certain network area, for example, a local traffic report. When you receive an area information message, the message automatically appears on the screen. When you dismiss the information, it will be stored in the Area info Inbox until it is replaced by a new message received on the same channel. Please consult your service provider for more information about Messaging 93 Contacts Contacts is like an address book, in which you can store names, phone numbers, e-mail addresses and other useful information, including photographs. The information stored in the SIM is also accessible. SIM entries can be copied to Contacts and Contacts entries can be copied to the SIM. Some SIM cards have Information numbers and Service numbers stored on the SIM card by the operator. These numbers are useful for service and information, and are accessible from the SIM within Contacts. You can synchronize the contents in Contacts with one of the PIM applications in your PC supported by the P900. See Synchronization and backup on page 131. Using Contacts with the Flip closed With the Flip closed, you can make calls and send text or multimedia messages. Contacts has two views when the Flip is closed:

List view An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the starting point for finding a contact. Detail view The details for a contact. Menus In both list view and detail view, you can use to access some of the P900s contact functions. The options will vary depending on the situation. Menu options in list view SIM Display the contacts of the SIM card. Send owner card Send your owner card (See Making an owner card on page 100) via infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. Find Search for a specific contact. Undo delete Restore the last deleted contact. Will appear only if there is something to undo.

# Applications Access the application list view. Menu options in detail view Menu options in detail view: (availability depends on the type of contact detail, for example mobile number, that is highlighted.) Send MMS Send a multimedia message to the active contact Send SMS Send a text message to the active contact. Call Call the active contact. 94 Contacts Send as Send the active contact using infrared or Bluetooth 3. Select a contact and press the Jog Dial or press to open wireless technology. Delete contact Delete the active contact.

# Applications Will access the application list view. Menu options in SIM View all Switch to Contacts list. Service numbers Display the service numbers on the SIM card. This option is only displayed if there are service numbers stored on the SIM card. Information numbers As for service numbers above. Find Search for a specific contact.

# Applications Will access the application list view. Selecting a contact with the Flip closed To select a contact 1. Select

. 2. Then either:

Scroll down to the desired contact. Press a number key. The first contact corresponding to the first letter of the key appears. To search further, continue to enter the letters with the keys. Select Find from the menu and search for the contact. the detail view for a contact. To return to the list view, press

. Note To make a call to a contact in the SIM, select SIM from the options menu. If there are service numbers or information numbers stored on the SIM card, you can also access them. To make a call 1. Select a phone number. 2. Press the Jog Dial or press

. or 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Call from the options menu. To send a text message 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Send SMS from the options menu. To send a multimedia message 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Send MMS from the options menu. Contacts 95 To add a contact You can create a new contact using information from a recently received voice call or message. See also Add to contacts on page 51. 1. Select Yes when asked to add to contacts. 2. Enter contact name and edit the number, if required. To delete a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Delete contact from the options menu. To restore a deleted contact, select Undo delete from the options menu. Using Contacts with the Flip open Open the Flip and tap launcher to open Contacts. or select Contacts in the Application Contacts has three views when the Flip is open:

List view An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the starting point for finding a contact. Detail view The details for a contact. Edit view Contact details, displayed in a way that allows you to add and change the information. Tabs at the bottom of the list view provide a fast way to locate information. To highlight the first entry that begins with the first letter on a tab, select the tab once. To highlight the first entry that begins with the next letter on the tab, select the tab again, and again for the third letter on the tab. abc def ghi jkl mno pqr stu v-z Making a call with the Flip open To open Contacts Tap or select Contacts in the Application launcher

. To make a call 1. If required, change folder from the Folders menu. 2. Scroll down to the desired contact. If the contact list is long, first select a tab at the bottom of the view. 3. Select the contact to display the contact details. 4. Depending on what you want to do, select according to the following:

Select Select or the phone number to make a call. or or the e-mail address to send an e-mail. 96 Contacts Select Select Select or the URL to open a Web page. to send a multimedia message. to send a text message. Using service and information numbers To call an Information number or Service number on the SIM card 1. Select SIM in the folders menu. 2. Select Contacts > Information numbers / Service numbers and select a phone number or select a sub-category and then a phone number. 3. Select Call. Creating and editing contacts You can sort the contacts according to first name, last name or company. The contact entries can also be filtered by folder, such as Business or Personal. To create a new contact 1. Select Contacts > New. 2. Enter the desired information. When applicable, select from the drop-down menus. To add a field to a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Select Edit > Add field. 4. Select the field to be added from the drop-down list. 5. Select Add. To add a DTMF tone sequence 1. Select a field and set it to Phone (h). Add a new field if necessary. 2. Enter a p and then the tone digits. Enter a p to insert a pause. It is necessary to start the tone sequence with a p so the phone recognises it as a tone sequence. To send a DTMF tone sequence during a call 1. During a call, open the contacts detail view. 2. Tap at the tone sequence. Read more about DTMF tones in Controlling tone-based services on page 47. To add a voice dialling command Contacts with a voice dialling command are shown in Voice commands in the folders menu. 1. Select 2. Select a number. at the bottom of the screen. Contacts 97 3. Tap the Record button and record a voice command after the 1. Against Ring Tone, select Find sound from the drop-down tone. 4. Tap Play to check the quality of the recording. To remove a voice command, select the Del button. To add a note to a contact 1. Select 2. Enter the text. 3. If you do not want the note to be included when you send, beam, or synchronize the contact, select the Private check box. To add a photo or other picture to a contact 1. Select the photo view tab 2. Tap the picture space. 3. If required, change folder. 4. Select the picture to use. 5. Tap the Select button. menu. 2. If required, change folder. 3. Select the required sound. 4. Tap 5. Tap Select to set this sound for the contact. to preview the sound. and Note The selected ring melody will only be played if the network provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) to enable the contact to be identified, otherwise the Default Melody will be played. Note If the ring melody selected for this contact is later deleted or moved, the Default Melody will be played. To change the details of a contact 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact, or tap the tab. 3. Change the desired information. When applicable, select from the drop-down menus. To change a picture, select the picture and select Replace image. To remove a picture, select the picture and select Delete image. To personalize the ring melody for a contact Contacts with a personalized ring melody are shown in Personal ring type in the folders menu. To delete a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Contacts > Delete contact. To create or edit a contact on the SIM card 1. Select SIM from the Folders menu. 98 Contacts 2. Create or edit the contact as described above. All options are, however, not available for the SIM card contacts. Managing contacts You can use Contacts manager to move contacts between the folders, send contacts as a Vcard to another device, or to delete them. You can also send or delete contacts on the SIM card with the Contacts manager. See Sending and receiving items on page 29 for information about how to receive contacts from another device. To move, send or delete a contact 1. Select Contacts > Contacts manager. 2. Select the contacts you want to manage.

(If required, change folder from the Folders menu. Selecting All will show all the contacts from all the folders except the SIM. Clicking the Select all check box will select all the contacts in the current folder.) 3. Select Send / Move / Delete. 4. Follow the instructions, for example, select a folder or a sending method. 5. Tap Done or Yes to confirm the action. To search for an entry containing specific text 1. Select Contacts > Find. 2. Enter the text string you wish to search for. 3. Select either In all fields or In Names & Company and tap Find. 4. When the search is complete, all results will be displayed. Note Searching is not case sensitive and you do not have to enter an entire word to locate a matching entry. Copying contacts to and from the SIM card You can also copy information between the contacts list and the SIM card. To copy contacts from the SIM card 1. Select SIM in the folders menu to the right in the menu bar. 2. Select Edit > Copy all to Contacts for copying all SIM entries or Tap a SIM entry to open it and select Edit > Copy to Contacts to copy the selected SIM entry. To copy contacts to the SIM card 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Copy to SIM card. 3. If the contact has multiple phone numbers, select the number to copy. Contacts 99 4. Select Done. Making an owner card You can create an electronic business card, containing your contact details, including notes and a photo. You can then send this card to another device. To create your owner card 1. Select Contacts > New and enter your details. 2. Select Contacts > Set as owner card. Tip You can also create an owner card by viewing the detail view of a contact and selecting the menu option Set as owner card. To send your owner card 1. Open the list view, and then select Contacts > Send owner card. 2. Send the card using Send as. Read more about sending items in Sending and receiving items on page 29. To view or edit your owner card Select Contacts > View owner card. Preferences Contacts tab To sort the contact list and show the preferred phone number 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the desired sorting option (first name, last name or company) and tap Done. 3. If you want a phone number to be shown next to the name in list view, select Show preferred phone number. If no preferred number has been set up for the contact, the first phone number will be used. 4. Select Done. To change the preferred phone number 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Select Edit > Show in list. 4. Select the number to be shown from the list. 5. Tap Done. Note If no number appears, ensure that Show preferred phone number is checked in preferences. 100 Contacts Calendar The Calendar function helps you to keep track of appointments and events, and you can also set reminder alarms for the entries. A reminder is denoted by a

. Different views You can see your Calendar entries in three views with the Flip open: Day, Week and Month. With the Flip closed you will see the Day view. To change view in Flip open Tap Tap Tap Tap to display the Day view. to display the Week view. to display the Month view. to navigate to the present day in the displayed view. If you tap an entry in week view, the subject and time for that entry are shown. To navigate backwards or forwards in the current view Tap the left and right arrows in the button bar at the bottom of the screen. You can also rotate the Jog Dial. To navigate to a specific date in the current view Tap the day, week or month heading at the top of the display to show a calendar pop-up in which you can select a specific date. Creating calendar entries To create a new calendar entry 1. Select Calendar > New and enter a short description of the entry. This is the description you see in the calendar. 2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the entry in. 3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail page. Type - Specify if the entry is an appointment, reminder or all day event. Date - Select the date to get a calendar where you can set a date for the entry. Time - Set start and end time for the entry. Location - Specify a location or select a location you have used before. Alarm - Select the check box if you want your P900 to alert you about the entry with a sound. Select the time and date that appears for your settings. Repeat - Specify if you want to repeat the entry or not. Read more about this below. Calendar 101 Private - Select the check box to prevent the item from being viewed by others than yourself if you synchronize your calendar with, for example, your PC. 4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry. 5. Select to save and close the entry. You should delete old entries regularly to release memory. To create re-occurring entries 1. When the entry is open, select Repeat. Set repeating to Daily, Weekly, Monthly by date, Monthly by day, Yearly by date or Yearly by day. Interval - Specify how often the event will happen, for example, by selecting Weekly and Interval 2 means that the event will go off every two weeks on the specified day. Forever/Until - Set the time limit for the alarm or select forever. 2. Select days - Weekly repeated events can be set to occur twice or more in a week. For example, eating lunch with a friend Tuesday and Friday every week. Note You cannot repeat All Day Events To edit an entry 1. Open the entry by tapping it in the calendar. 2. Make the changes in accordance with the instructions above. Managing calendar entries To find a certain entry 1. Select Calendar > Find. 2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears. 3. Select where to search (Everywhere, Future, Past). 4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed. 5. Select an entry on the result list to open it. To delete an entry Open the entry and select Calendar > Delete entry. A deleted entry may be restored with Edit > Undo delete. To delete all entries in a period of time 1. Select Calendar > Delete entries. 2. Select the time period and select Done. All entries from that time period are deleted from the Calendar. Note Repeated entries will not be deleted. To copy, cut or paste an entry 1. Open the entry. 2. Select Edit > Copy entry/ Cut entry. 3. Go to the day where you want to place the entry. 4. Select Paste entry. 102 Calendar To move a Calendar item to Tasks 1. Open the entry and select Calendar > Move to Tasks. 2. The entry is moved, not copied. If you move an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also sound in Tasks. To cut or copy Calendar entries to the Tasks application 1. Open the entry and select Edit > Cut entry or Copy entry. 2. Open Tasks. 3. Select Edit > Paste entry. Sending and receiving calendar entries You can send and receive calendar entries using Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Preferences You can customise the calendar views and alarm settings to suit your own needs. To customise the calendar view, General tab 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the General tab, and fill in the required details. To customise the alarm settings 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Alarm tab. Now, you can change the Alarm precedes event by setting - the length of time before an entry that the alarm goes off. To assign colours to your entries using the folders 1. In Calendar, select the folders menu to the right in the menu bar and select Edit folders. 2. Select a folder and select Edit or create a new folder by selecting Add. 3. Select the colour box and select colour for that folder and select Done. Entries in a folder with a specific colour appear in that colour in Day and Week views (but not in Month view) so that you can see the pattern of events in your diary. Reminders appear as whatever the folder colour. Saving changes If you leave Calendar while editing an entry, your changes will be saved automatically. Calendar 103 Tasks With the Tasks function you can make a list of things you need to do. The folders help you to separate different types of activities. You can move entries between Tasks and the Calendar, which is useful when you come to schedule a Tasks entry. You can also send an entry via text message, infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology, multimedia message or e-mail. Creating task entries The Tasks list shows a short description of the task. Select a task to see its full information. A task entry consists of two pages. One detail page where you set the properties for the task, and one page where you can add notes. To create a new task entry 1. Select Tasks > New and enter a short description of the task. This is the description you see in the task list. 2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the task in. 3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail page. 104 Completed Select the check box when the task is done.This can also be done directly in the Tasks list. Priority Set a priority for the task. You can sort the tasks by priority. Due date Select the check box to set a deadline for the task. Select the date that appears to get a calendar where you can set a due date. Alarm Select the check box if you want your P900 to alert you about the task. Select the time and date that appears for your settings. Private Select the check box to prevent the task from being visible by others, when synchronized with shared calendars or tasks in other devices, for example your PC. 4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry. 5. Select to save and close the task. Note Delete will delete the whole task entry. To edit an entry 1. Open the entry by tapping it in the Tasks list. 2. Make the changes according to the instructions above. Tasks Managing task entries To open an existing entry Select the entry in the Tasks list. To restore a deleted entry Select Edit > Undo delete. To delete all completed entries In your Tasks list, select Tasks > Delete completed. To mark an entry as completed Select the check box to the left of the entry in the Tasks list. Note When you delete All Completed Entries, they are deleted permanently and cannot be restored. To sort the entries Select Edit > Sort on priority or Sort on date. To find a certain entry 1. Select Tasks > Find. 2. Enter a search word. 3. Select in which folder to search or use the default value All folders. 4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed. 5. Select an entry on the result list to open it. To make a copy of an entry or paste an entry 1. Open a task and select Edit > Copy entry. 2. In list view, select Edit > Paste entry. To delete an entry Open the entry in the task list and then select Delete. Moving task entries To move an entry to the Calendar Open the entry and select Tasks > Move to Calendar. The entry is moved, not copied. To copy a task entry to Calendar 1. Open the entry and select Edit > Copy entry. 2. Open Calendar. 3. Enter the day you wish the task to appear. 4. Select Edit > Paste entry in Calendar. Note If you move or copy an entry to the Calendar, it will lose the priority it was assigned in Tasks. Tasks 105 If you do not set a due date for the tasks entry, the current date will be used for the new Calendar entry. If you move or copy an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also be moved to the Calendar. Sending and receiving task entries You can send and receive task entries using Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Preferences Select Edit > Preferences to alter the settings. The following settings are available. Display due dates Select whether or not to display them in the Tasks list. Display completed Select whether or not to display them in the Tasks list. This will not delete the completed tasks. 106 Tasks Jotter The Jotter works as a notebook where you can write notes and draw pictures. The folders help you to separate different types of notes. A Jotter entry consists of two pages. One text page and one drawing page. With the Flip closed, you can read and edit your notes, but you cannot view or edit pictures. When opening Jotter you will see a list of entered notes, with the first words of each text note. Select a note to see its full information or edit it. Creating and editing notes To create a new note 1. Open Jotter and select Jotter >New. The new note will automatically start as a text note. Select A to create a bullet list. to get bold text and 2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the jotter in. 3. Select the drawing page tab to draw a sketch for this note. 4. Select to save and close the note. To edit a note while working with it For text, select Edit > Revert. The text returns to its original state. All changes are lost. For sketches, select Edit > Undo. This choice removes your last pen stroke. If you change your mind, select Edit > Redo. To create a new note from text or sketches copied from another application Open the list of notes and select Edit > Paste. Note If you paste a sketch over an existing sketch, the existing sketch will be deleted. Create a note with the Flip closed (text only) 1. Select Applications >Jotter with the Flip closed. 2. If you have previous notes stored, these will now be listed. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it. 3. Press if you want to create a new note. Select New. Insert your text by using the keypad. Edit a note with the Flip closed 1. Select Applications >Jotter with the Flip closed. 2. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it. Jotter 107 Managing notes To delete a note 1. Select the note in the notes list. The note opens. 2. Select Jotter > Delete note. Sending and receiving notes You can send and receive notes using Send as. See Sending and receiving items on page 29. Note Selecting Send as SMS will send the text only. 3. Press

. Select Edit. Insert your text using the keypad. Drawing pictures You can draw with different nib widths and colours. The main window is the paper where you may draw with your stylus in the same way as you draw with an ordinary pen. Jotter Edit Unfiled Select to change colour. Select virtual nib. to change the to activate the Select eraser. Tap the eraser again to re-activate the pen. All jotter files (both text and drawings) are automatically stored in the P900. The list view will be presented to you as soon as you start the Jotter application. 108 Jotter TOOLS Sound recorder In Sound recorder you can record and listen to your own sound recordings. You can also send your recordings to other devices via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, e-

mail or multimedia message, and use a sound recording as a ring signal. Each memo is identified by the date and time it was recorded and by its position in the list of sound recordings. Making sound recordings To record and save a sound recording 1. Select

> New.

A new sound recording is created. 2. Select 3. Select and start recording after the beep. to finish the recording. The new sound recording is automatically saved in the list of sound recordings with the current date and time. To append to the end of a previous sound recording 1. Select the required recording. 2. Select 3. Select and start recording after the beep. to finish the recording. Key functions Select... To... start recording a sound. listen to the current sound recording. stop the current sound recording. go to the previous sound recording in the list. go to the next sound recording in the list. To delete a sound recording 1. Select a sound recording you want to delete. 2. Select Delete > Yes. Sound recorder 109 Using sound recordings as ring signals You can set a sound recording as a ring signal.Your sound recordings will appear in the list of sounds that can be selected as ring signals. They will take the form voicenote and a number, for example voicenote1470. To set a sound recording as ring signal see Sounds and alerts on page 140. Sending sound recordings You can send Sound recorder recordings via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, e-mail or multimedia message. To send a sound recording 1. Select Sound recorder > Send as. 2. Select how you want to send the sound recording. See To send an item using Send as on page 29 for more information. Note All other sound media on your P900 is handled via the Music player application. You can send sound items from Music player and all received sound items are played using Music player. 110 Sound recorder Calculator The Calculator is a standard 12-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages. It also has a memory function. To use the calculator

. 1. Select 2. Enter the calculations by tapping the digits.

All calculations, except percentage calculations, are performed as they are entered, for example: 5+5x5=50, not 30. Percentage calculations are performed backwards. To calculate, for example, 10% of 50, enter 50x10%. The result is displayed when you tap the %-key. Key functions mr m+

m-

C Tap once to retrieve a value from the memory and enter it into the screen. Tap twice to clear the memory. Tap once to store an entered value in the memory. If you already have entered a value in the memory, tap once to add the value on the screen to the value in the memory. Tap once to subtract the entered value from the value in the memory. The memory is adjusted but not displayed. Tap once to delete the last digit you entered. Tap once to reset the screen to 0. You can copy and paste values to and from other applications by selecting Calculator > Copy or Paste. Values stored in the memory are retained while using other applications. Calculator 111 Time The time and date are always displayed on the Flip closed standby screen. You can customise the display of times and dates throughout your P900. You can set your current location and another location of your choice. It is also possible to set three different alarms. Setting time and date Confirm by tapping outside the time picker. 6. Select Done. Format You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen, and if you want to use the 12- or 24-hour time format. To set the current time and date 1. Select 2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the

. current time and date settings. 3. Tap the Date box, then use the arrows to set the current year and month. Then select the current day. 4. Tap Summertime, then select the check box next to the zone that currently has summer time and tap Done. This is only required if you are currently in a country/region with summer time. 5. Tap the time box, then tap the upper half of the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower half to decrease the number. Use the am/pm box to switch between am and pm. (This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.) To set the time and date display format 1. Select 2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the

. current time and date settings. 3. Select Format. 4. Tap the Date Format box and choose a format. 5. Tap the Date Separator box and choose a separator. 6. Select a Time format. 7. Tap the Time separator box and choose a separator. 8. Select Done. 112 Time Specifying workdays You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also specify the first day of your week to customise the display of both Week and Month views in Calendar. To specify your workdays 1. Select 2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the

. current time and date settings. 3. Select Workdays. 4. Select the check boxes next to the days you normally work. 5. Select First day of week and choose a day. 6. Tap Done. Setting locations Specify the country/region and city you are currently in. The city you select will be displayed next to the clock in Time. If you are away from home, for example travelling in another country/region, it can be useful to know what the time is in your home country/region as well as the country/region you are in. The city you select as Other City will be displayed below the clock in Time. To set the locations 1. Select

. 2. Tap Time > Set location. 3. Tap the Current Country/Region box and select the country/

region you are in at that moment. 4. Tap the Current City box and select the city you are in at that moment. If the city you are in is not listed, select the city closest to you. 5. Tap the Other Country/Region box and choose a country/

region. 6. Tap the Other City box and choose a city. 7. Tap Done. Setting number formats You can choose how you want the measurements and numbers in your P900 to be displayed in all your applications. Distances can be displayed using the imperial or the metric system and different punctuation marks can be used as separators. To set the number details 1. Select 2. Select Time > Set location. 3. Select Numbers.

. Time 113 4. Choose separators and symbol positions from the drop-down lists. You can tap the keyboard icon to find currency symbols. 5. Tap Done. Setting alarms You can set up to three different alarms in your P900. You can choose to activate one of the preset alarms, or set a new alarm with your own definitions. You can choose to set a silent alarm, where only a message is displayed when it goes off, or you can set a sound alert. Alarms requires that the P900 is turned on. If you want to get alarms in an environment where radio transmitters are not allowed, you can set the P900 to flight mode, see Flight mode on page 47. Note If you have connected a stereo headset to the P900, the alarm will only be heard in the headset. To activate an existing alarm Select the check box in the alarm slot. status bar on the screen. is displayed on the To set a new alarm

. 1. Select

114 2. Select one of the alarm slots. 3. Select Time and choose at what time you want the alarm to go off. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker. 4. Select When and choose how often you want the alarm to go off:

Once The alarm will go off once only, at a time more than 24 hours from now but within the next eight days. Next 24 hours Within the next 24 hours. Daily Every day at the specified time. Weekly Every week at the specified time. Workdays Every workday at the specified time. 5. Select Alarm sound and choose a sound. 6. Select Message and choose a preset message or write a new one. 7. Tap Done. 8. Make sure the check box next to the alarm is selected. When the alarm goes off, select Snooze to postpone the alarm for five minutes or Silence to turn off the alarm sound. To turn off the alarm completely, tap Done. Time Viewer With Viewer you can view Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint documents as well as Adobe Acrobat (PDF) documents. Support for additional file types can be installed from the Multimedia for P900 CD. When the Flip is open Viewer has two views:

List view An alphabetical list of files, for selecting a file to view. Detail view The contents of a file, for viewing and manipulating the file. Viewer is also started automatically when selecting and opening attachments to messages. The required view is selected based on the type of attachment. To save documents to another location (internal or on the Memory Stick Duo) you use folders, see Folders on page 27. The functions available differ depending on the document type. General functions are similar between the document types and are therefore described first. Common viewer functions To open a document from an e-mail or Internet page Select the document link. The document viewer is started, showing the detail view of the document. To save the document in the P900 1. Select Document > Save from the menu. 2. Select where to save the document and select Save. To open a document from the list view 1. Select the Application launcher icon 2. Select the Document viewer icon 3. If required, change folder. 4. Scroll to the desired file and select the file name. The document is shown in the Detail view. To save the document to a different location 1. Select Edit > Copy to from the menu. 2. Select where to save the document and select Save. Viewer 115 Viewing Word documents Viewing Excel spreadsheets To copy text from the document 1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the document, select Edit > Select all. 2. Select Edit > Copy. To copy text from the document 1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the document, select Edit > Select all. 2. Select Edit > Copy. The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed. The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed. To search for a text in the document 1. Select Document > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Document > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear search hits. To change the document view 1. To display the document as formatted text without pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Draft view. 2. To display the document as formatted text including pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Normal view. 3. To display the complete layout of the document, select Edit >

Page view. Note Data copied from a spreadsheet cannot be pasted into the Calculator application if they include non-numerical values

(such as currency symbols or formatting characters). To search for a text in the document 1. Select Spreadsheet > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Spreadsheet > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Spreadsheet > Clear search hits. To switch between draft view and complete layout Select Edit > Draft view. To show/hide the spreadsheet grid lines Select Edit > Show gridlines. 116 Viewer To show/hide the spreadsheet headings Select Edit > Show headings. 2. To go to the previous slide in the presentation or page in the PDF, select Edit > Previous slide. To navigate in the workbook 1. To go to the next sheet in the workbook, select Edit > Next sheet. 2. To go to the previous sheet in the workbook, select Edit >

Previous sheet. Viewing PowerPoint presentations and PDFs To search for a text in the document 1. Select Drawing > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Drawing > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Drawing > Clear search hits. To navigate in a multi-page presentation/PDF 1. To go to the next slide in the presentation, select Edit > Next slide. Viewer 117 File manager With the File manager you can view, rename, copy, move, and delete files and folders on the P900. You can also add folders, send files and rename and format the Memory Stick Duo. Initially, the root view is shown, with the sub folders:

Audio, where all audio files are stored. Document, where different document files are stored. Image, where all images, pictures as well as drawings, are stored. Other, where all files not applicable for the other folders are stored. Video, where all video clips are stored. Using the folder menu, you can select between the internal storage and the external storage, that is, the Memory Stick Duo. The file path area at the top of the window shows the path to the shown folder. Note There is an important distinction between External media and External other. External other lets you view folders that have been placed on the memory card by other equipment, such as digital cameras. This is the only place where these folders can be viewed. From the file manager it is possible to reach the Control Panel Storage Manager, see Storage manager on page 159. You can also format the Memory Stick Duo, see Formatting a Memory Stick Duo on page 22. To move within the folder structure To move up in the hierarchy - tap the top folder. To view the contents of a folder or a file - tap the top folder. Folders are opened in the file manager while other files are opened in the applicable application. To add a folder 1. Select File > New folder. 2. Type a folder name and tap Done. To copy or move one or more folders or files 1. Select the folders or files to handle. 2. Select the required activity from the File menu. 3. Select the destination and tap Done. 118 File manager To delete one or more folders or files Note Only empty folders can be deleted. 1. Select the folders or files to delete. 2. Select File > Delete. 3. Tap Delete. To change properties for one or more folders or files 1. Select the folders or files to change. 2. Select File > Properties. 3. Change the properties, as required. 4. Tap Done. File manager 119 Online services Online services is a customised service offered by a network i operator. This function is network- or subscription-dependent. Online services provides a mechanism that allows applications that exist on the SIM to interact and operate with the P900. It may provide services ranging from weather forecasts to the latest information from the stock market. Online service are placed on your SIM card by your operator. Note Contact your operator to find out which services are available for your account. Note If this service is available on your SIM, the Online services application will appear in the application list under a name defined by the SIM provider. However, the icon used to will not change. represent the Online services application i 120 Online services ADVANCED FUNCTIONS PC Suite and multimedia for P900 PC Suite for P900 The PC Suite for P900 CD delivered with your P900 contains a set of useful applications to install applications and manage your P900:

Synchronization Synchronization of Calendar, Notes, Contacts and Tasks against MS-Outlook, Lotus Notes and Lotus Organizer. Backup and Restore Make safety copies of your data via SyncStation. File Manager Transfer files (images, documents, music) via Windows Explorer between your P900 and PC. Install software Install applications in the P900. Download Language Change the language in the P900. Dial-Up Networking Wizard Wizard for GPRS and HSCSD settings for using your P900 as a modem. User Guide Manual for your P900. Quick Guide Quick Guide for your P900. Drivers Drivers for modem and the USB cable connected SyncStation. Refer to the online help for each specific application. Installation of the PC Suite for P900 The PC Suite for P900 programs can be used with Windows ME, 98, 2000 and XP. When inserting the CD in the PC, a start menu is automatically shown. Select language and then start the PC Suite for P900 Setup. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard. If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run command in the Windows Start menu to start Start.exe from your CD drive. By default the PC Suite for P900 is accessed from Start menu >

Programs > Sony Ericsson > P900. The Setup application also can be used later to add or delete components. You can download the latest PC Suite software from www.sonyericsson.com/support PC Suite and multimedia for P900 121 Multimedia for P900 The Multimedia for P900 CD contains a number of applications and files to be installed in, or downloaded to, your P900 and used together with its applications. Games. Audio files. Pictures. Video clips. MMS templates. Opening the Multimedia CD for P900 When you insert the CD in the PC, a start menu opens automatically. Select an item from the menu and follow the instructions on the PC screen. If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run command in the Windows Start menu to start CDBrowser.exe from your CD drive. 122 PC Suite and multimedia for P900 Installing applications It is possible to install new applications in your P900. These applications can be obtained in several ways, for example:

from the Internet. from a CD. from a Memory Stick Duo. as an e-mail attachment. from other devices. There are two types of installation files for applications:

SIS (Symbian Standard Installation) made for P900 or other Sony Ericsson devices. MIDP JAR (Mobile Information Device Profile Java Archive). Note SIS and JAR files are installation packages containing one or several files. This chapter also applies to other types of software to install, for example, system components and add-ons. Applications from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called third-party developers, might be able to be installed in the P900. Applications which are not approved by Sony Ericsson are not guaranteed to work correctly or securely, and users install them at their own risk. Product failures caused by applications not approved or made for Sony Ericsson will not be covered by your warranty. Installing applications on your P900 Installation file security Installation files in SIS format are typically used for installation of Epoc or PersonalJava applications or other content into the P900 file system.The vendor who prepared the SIS file decides where in the file system the various content of the SIS file will be installed. This means that you need to decide if you trust that the SIS file does not contain harmful content. If you know for sure who produced the SIS file then you can take an installation decision based on what you know about that vendor. Your P900 supports cryptographic verification of vendor identity. During installation the P900 verifies a digital signature and certificate in the SIS file against a root certificate in the phone. Successful verification means that you can trust who produced the SIS file and that the content has not been modified after it was created. If the SIS file does not contain a digital signature Installing applications 123 you will be given a warning about the problem but you can still decide to proceed with installation at your own risk. In general it is recommended that you install only from SIS files where the vendor identity and file integrity can be verified. Note Installation of uncertified applications may cause your system to crash and all your data will then be lost. MIDP applications run in a protected environment with no access to sensitive information so no signatures are required for MIDP JAR files. From a PC PC Suite for P900 must be installed in your PC and the P900 must be connected to the PC via SyncStation, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology in order to install applications from your PC. Installing applications from your PC 1. Connect your P900 to the PC via SyncStation, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. When connected, an icon is shown in the status area to the right in the taskbar on the PC. 2. Start the PC software Install Software and select the application (.sis file) to install. 3. Confirm to install the application in the P900. 4. Select target drive (phone memory or Memory Stick Duo). Download to the P900 begins. 5. Installation starts when the download is complete. From the P900 Program packages, for example, games, can also be downloaded to your P900 from the Internet or from a Memory Stick Duo. When downloading a file from the Internet, the installation will start automatically when the file is completely downloaded to your P900. The procedure below describes installation of application packages already in the P900 but not yet installed. See To download and upload files, for example, applications on page 75 for information about how to download files from the Internet. Installing applications in the P900 1. Select 2. From the menu, select Applications > Install. 3. Select the software from the list. 4. Select Install. If the software is certified, an information dialogue will be shown with the name of the software, version and supplier. Select Install again. 5. Now, depending on the software, you may be prompted to replace a previous installation, select language, memory location and select other installation options. 6. Installation is complete. Select Done. 124 Installing applications Removing applications from your P900 It is sometimes necessary to remove installed applications and user data to free up memory. Removing applications in the P900 1. Select 2. From the menu, select Applications > Uninstall. 3. Select the application to be uninstalled. 4. Select Uninstall. 5. Tap Yes to confirm. 6. Select Done. Tip See also Master reset on page 158 and Storage manager on page 159 in Control Panel for more options regarding removal of applications and user data. Some removed applications could be reinstalled from the PC Suit for the P900 and the multimedia CD. Installing applications 125 Connecting to other devices Your P900 can be connected to other devices with similar interfaces such as PCs, other P900s and handheld computers. The connection can be made via:

Bluetooth wireless technology (not together with Windows 98) Cable Infrared (IrDA) Once it has been connected, you can perform various tasks, depending on what type of connection you have chosen, such as:

Using a cordless headset (Bluetooth wireless technology) Sending and receiving files via (infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology) beaming Making Backup/Restore and Synchronization of your data and file transfer. (Cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless technology) Using the P900 as a modem for Dial-Up Networking.

(Cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless technology) PC connectivity software Your P900 is delivered with a CD, PC Suite for P900. This software must be installed in the PC you want to connect to. See Installing applications on page 123 for more information. You do not need to install the PC Suite for P900 if you only want to perform beaming with the PC or use a cordless headset. Connection via SyncStation Connect the SyncStation to your PC with the USB cable. A wizard helps you to install the USB cable the first time. The PC Suite for P900 CD contains necessary software. Put your P900 in the SyncStation. A new wizard starts which helps you to connect your P900 if this is the first time. appears in the status area to the right on the taskbar when the P900 is connected. When connecting via cable, the P900 can be set in PC Connect mode or Modem mode. The setting is made in Control panel >

Connections > Cable, see Cable on page 145. Set the P900 in PC connect mode for Synchronization Installation of software 126 Connecting to other devices Backup and restore Set the P900 in Modem mode when using P900 as a modem Dial-up network wizard You should disable the USB cable connection in these three cases. In your PC select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone Monitor Options > COM Ports and disable the COM port to which the cable is connected. Sony Ericsson Update Service Sony Ericsson Update Service (SEUS), is a way for the end user to update the firmware of their phone on their own, using a SEMC desk stand and any Internet-connected (preferably via broadband) PC. To update the P900 firmware 1. Connect the desk stand to your PC. 2. Visit the Sony Ericsson customer support site on the Web. 3. Download the SEUS application and run it. Detailed instructions on how to proceed with the update sequence is displayed. You can also take a backup of the P900. Connection via Infrared port When connecting via the infrared port, make sure that both devices are placed within one metre from each other and that the infrared ports have a free line of sight between them. Both your P900 and the device you connect to must have their infrared ports activated before communication can begin. To activate the infrared port on the P900 1. Go to Control panel > Connections > Infrared. 2. Set the P900 to PC connect or Modem as required. 3. Set the port state to On or On for 10 minutes. You can also change the infrared port state with the Flip closed, in the Connections application. in the status area to the right on the taskbar. To activate the infrared port on the PC 1. Right click 2. Select Properties 3. Select the Infrared check box 4. Click Close. Note Clear the Infrared check box when ready. Connecting to other devices 127 Send and receive You can send items via the infrared port, beam, in any application if there is a Send as command. To send, select Infrared. If you receive a beamed item, a dialogue box appears with two options. View or Done. View opens the associated application which shows the item; Done saves it in the Beamed folder in Messaging. Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology You can connect your P900 to other products equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, for example PCs or other mobile phones, and exchange data. Since Bluetooth wireless technology is radio-based, there does not have to be a free line of sight between transmitting and receiving devices. This means that your P900 can stay in your pocket while communicating. However, items between transmitting and receiving devices might weaken the signal. Connection to another device can be made within a range of up to 10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will have an effect on the performance. For all tasks, except beaming, it is necessary that you first set up a permanent and trusted relationship between your P900 and the other device. This process is called pairing (other documentation may refer to it as bonding). The paired devices are remembered by your P900 even after you have turned it off so you do not need to repeat the process for every connection with those devices. The reason for pairing is to simplify future connections and to make them secure only paired devices can connect to your P900. Activating Bluetooth wireless technology Activate Bluetooth wireless technology on your P900 in Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings. Set Operation mode to On, and set if your P900 should be Visible by other devices or not. See Bluetooth on page 144 for more information on Bluetooth wireless technology settings. The Bluetooth wireless technology operation mode can also be changed with the Flip closed, through the Connections application. When the Bluetooth wireless technology is activated, of your P900 flashes blue. appears on the screen and the left indicator on top Pairing To let your P900 initiate pairing with another device, such as a headset 1. In Control panel > Connections> Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to On. 2. Set the other device to be on or discoverable. 3. In the Devices tab, tap Add. Your P900 searches for all devices in the vicinity and lists them. 128 Connecting to other devices All enabled devices that are visible to others within range, are shown with their name and icon. You can use Show: to restrict the list to one category (only PC, for example). Paired devices that are within range are shown with regular text. Non-paired devices that are within range are shown with their names in italics. Devices that are within range but unknown are shown with a preset name. 4. Select the device you want your P900 to pair with, and enter a passcode when asked for it. When the passcode is accepted, the pairing process is complete, see Passcodes on page 130. 5. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect to your P900 without you explicitly approving each connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices, then select a device and the check box Allow to connect without confirmation. To let another device initiate pairing with your P900 1. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to On. 2. Follow the other devices manual to initiate pairing. 3. When asked for a passcode, enter the same on both devices. 4. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect to your P900 without you explicitly approving each connection you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices, select a device and the check box Allow to connect without confirmation. Tip You can change the name of a paired device. When you pair with other Bluetooth wireless technology enabled phones, it is very useful to include the user's name as part of the device name. This will make it very easy to beam information to the desired recipients. To let a headphone initiate pairing with your P900 1. Check that the device you want to pair with your P900:

Is on and within range. Has its Bluetooth function activated and that it is in visible mode. 2. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to On. 3. Follow the headphones manual to initiate pairing on the headphone. 4. In the Devices tab tap Add. Your P900 searches for all devices in the vicinity and lists them. 5. When asked for a passcode, enter the headphones passcode on your P900. Connecting to other devices 129 Bluetooth share You can make it possible for other users to transfer items from your P900. To make an item accessible, select Send as > Bluetooth Shared. The item is then copied to the Shared folder, accessible by other users. When a user requests to access your Shared folder, a request dialogue is shown, where you can Accept or Reject the transfer. 6. If in the future you want to allow the headphone to connect to your P900 without you explicitly approving each connection, you should select Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth >

Devices, select the headphone and the check box Allow to connect without confirmation. To remove a paired device from your P900 Select a device in the list and select Remove. Passcodes Passcodes ensure that the device you pair with really is the device you think it is. A passcode is a set of numbers and/or letters (at least four characters) that you agree to exchange with the owner of the other device. Simply agree a passcode with the other user and each enter the same code into both devices when asked for it. The actual code is up to you; the important thing is that you both enter the same code. Accessories like headsets often have a default passcode, usually 0000, see the specific user guide. Send and receive You can send items via Bluetooth wireless technology in any application if there is a Send as command. To send, select Bluetooth. If you receive an item via Bluetooth wireless technology, a dialogue box appears with two options: View or Done. View opens the associated application which shows the item; Done saves it in the Beamed folder in Messaging. 130 Connecting to other devices Synchronization and backup With PC Suite for P900 installed in your PC, your P900 can synchronize with the following PC applications, also called Personal Information Managers (PIMs):

Lotus Organizer 5 & 6 Lotus Notes 5.0, 6 Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, 2002 Synchronization is divided into local and remote. Local synchronization is performed directly to a connected PC while remote synchronization is done over the air with a remote server in, for example, a corporate network. The manual describes the easiest way to perform the tasks but you can also carry out most of them by selecting Start > Programs

> Sony Ericsson > P900 in the PC and then select the desired command. Refer to the online help find in Help in the menu bar in the PC software to get more information about synchronization and backup. Note If you have imported SIM phone book entries into Contacts in your P900, these entries will not be synchronized with the corresponding entries in your PC when synchronising your P900 and PC. You will instead get duplicates in your P900. Local synchronization Bluetooth IrDA Cable Local synchronization is done with either cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. The functionality is the same. E-mail, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Jotter notes (only text) can be synchronized locally. Local synchronization settings Local synchronization is initiated from the PC and all settings are made in the P900 PC software (included on the PC Suite for P900 CD). Synchronization and backup 131 The easiest way to synchronize is to set the Synchronization to automatically make a synchronization every time your P900 is connected. 2. In the PC, click on on the PC taskbar and select Synchronise. The synchronization starts. in the status area to the right in the To make the synchronization settings In the PC, click on taskbar on the PC and select Sync Station Settings. A dialogue appears where you can make the synchronization settings. Click Help in the dialogue to get more information about the settings. Making a local synchronization To make an automatic synchronization 1. Connect your P900 via SyncStation, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. For more information, see Connecting to other devices on page 126. 2. Synchronization starts automatically. 3. After a short time, the PC application you want to synchronize with might ask you to allow the P900 access to it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues. To make a manual synchronization 1. Connect your P900 via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. For more information, see Connecting to other devices on page 126. 3. After a short time, the PC application you want to synchronize with might ask you to allow the P900 access to it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues. Remote synchronization Remote synchronization takes place over the air and is the ideal way to keep the P900 up-to-date while on the move. Using GPRS, the P900 can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization server. GPRS, HSCSD or CSD PIM Application Sync Server Firewall Internet/Intranet 132 Synchronization and backup Synchronization services may be offered by mobile operators, third-party service providers and as added capability to corporate PIM applications. Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks can be synchronized remotely. 3. Fill in the Task name or leave default. 4. Fill in the Server database (contact your corporate information services help desk or your service provider). 5. The item you selected to be synchronized is now above the divider in the list. (Disabled items are below the divider.) Remote synchronization settings Repeat for other items. To configure the remote synchronization server In Applications, select in the following parameters:

Remote Sync > Edit > Preferences and fill Server address Username Password You might also need to fill in whether to use transport login under the Protocol tab. Contact your corporate information services help desk or your service provider for information on these parameters. You also need to have at least one configured Internet account that remote sync can use to connect, see Internet accounts on page 146. To select items to synchronise 1. In Remote Sync, select one item in the list you want to be synchronized. 2. Select the Enable task check box. Synchronization and backup Making a remote synchronization Open Applications > Remote Sync and tap the Sync button. When ready, the Task status column shows today's date for all successfully synchronized items. Backing up data You can use the P900 Backup and Restore PC software to back up the contents stored in your P900 to your computer. Keeping backups of your P900 contents on your computer means that you have a separate copy of the contents of the P900, which can be restored into the P900. Backups should be made on a regular basis. See the online help for P900 Backup and Restore for more information on how to use the application. Note All user data will be deleted when the P900 software is upgraded by a Service Partner. Always back up your data before handing over the P900 for upgrading, so that you can restore it afterwards 133 Preconditions The PC Suite for P900 must be installed in the PC and the P900 must be connected to the PC via cable. Note Backup and restore does not work via infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. Performing a backup To make a backup 1. Turn on your P900 and connect it to the PC via cable. 2. In the PC, click on on the PC taskbar and select Back up and restore. 3. Select your P900 in the menu that appears. Several P900s can be backed up to the same PC. 4. Select Backup and choose what to back up: P900 and/or Memory Stick. Restoring data Lost data or accidentally deleted information in your P900 can be restored from an earlier backup. A backup from the phone can only be restored to the phone, and a backup from a Memory Stick can only be restored to a Memory Stick. To restore a backup 1. Turn on your P900 and connect it to the PC via cable. 2. In the PC, click on on the PC taskbar and select Back up and restore. 3. Select your P900 in the menu that appears. Several P900s can be backed up to the same PC. 4. Select one of the backups in the list of previously saved backups and click Restore. 5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the P900. 5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the 6. The restore is complete. P900. 6. The backup is complete. Note Everything in your P900 will be overwritten by the chosen backup. Once you have clicked Yes to start the restore, you cannot cancel the procedure. Note If you have used your Secure Tokens (Secure Access files) since you made your backup, you must reconfigure these. If you restore another P900, you must reconfigure your Secure Tokens. For more information see Secure tokens on page 159. 134 Synchronization and backup SETTINGS Personalizing your P900 There are a number of ways you can give your P900 a personal touch and change its settings to suit your requirements. Themes Themes control the colour of screen and text, the icons, and the wallpaper picture. Sound themes control the notification alerts. Four themes are pre-loaded in the P900. Extra themes can be found on the Multimedia for P900 CD. To change the theme, select see Themes on page 142. Control panel > Device > Themes, Changing your application shortcuts You can change and rearrange the five shortcuts to applications, shown in the standby screen when the Flip is closed, and the five first shortcuts in the Application picker area in Flip open (not the Application launcher

). The Flip closed shortcuts can even be hidden, if you wish. Setting a wallpaper picture You can change the background image (wallpaper) for the standby screen in any image stored internally or on a Memory Stick Duo. Control panel > Device > Display. You can use Tip More wallpaper images can be found on the Multimedia P900 CD, delivered with your P900. You can obtain suitable wallpaper picture files by downloading, MMS, beaming using Bluetooth or infrared, or transferring them using a cable from your PC. Wallpaper picture images are 208 x 144 pixels and the picture can be seen in the standby screen.(Any chosen picture will be scaled to fit the screen).The images can be JPEG, GIF, BMP, WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Setting a screen saver You can set a screen saver picture to be displayed after a period of inactivity. See Display on page 138. Key lock and device lock may be used in combination with the screen saver. When you press a key or touch the screen, you will be prompted to activate keys and/or enter the device lock code. Personalizing your P900 135 The images can be JPEG, GIF (including animated), BMP, WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Image format for the screen saver is 208 x 320 pixels. Note Using animated GIF uses more power. Adding images to your Contacts You can store a picture with each entry in Contacts. See Creating and editing contacts on page 97. 11:03 John S mith

+4613244500 (h) Pictures are easily taken using the CommuniCorder

(see CommuniCorder on page 56) though of course other images can be used. End call If your network operator provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) service, your P900 can display the contacts picture together with the other information when an incoming call is received with a CLI matching that contact (not all numbers can be displayed). The contacts picture is also displayed when you make a call to that person. To choose the contacts picture size 1. Select 2. Select the Show large pop-up picture for incoming calls check Phone > Edit >Preferences > Incoming call picture. box. 3. Tap Done. Ring signals Your P900 can play both iMelody format and polyphonic ring signals in WAV, AU, AMR, MIDI, RMF, and MP3 sound file formats. When you choose a ring signal, your P900 will scan the internal and Memory Stick storage and present you with a list of ring signals that are in these formats. Recordings you have made using Sound Recorder can also be selected. Ring signals can be added by downloading from the Internet, beaming using infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology file transfer from a PC and by using a Memory Stick. Extra ring signals can be found on the Multimedia for P900 CD-ROM. You can add as many ring signals as desired, subject only to available storage space. Tip Sound Recorder recordings are listed as voicenote and a number, for example voicenote1470. A ring signal may be selected for an entry in Contacts, so that the caller can be identified by the ring signal that is played. See To personalize the ring melody for a contact on page 98. 136 Personalizing your P900 Note If you use an audio file as alarm or notification signal, it will be played using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring volume setting will not effect the sound volume. Note The mobile network must provide the CLI (Calling Line Identity) of the caller to enable the contact to be identified. You may change the default ring signal that is played in all other cases. To do this, see Sounds and alerts on page 140. Note If your P900 finds that you have renamed, moved or deleted a ring signal, it will play the default instead. Note If you use an audio file as ring signal, it will be played using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring volume setting will not effect the sound volume. Alarm tones and sound notification You can choose different sounds for alarms and notifications in these applications:

Time Calendar Tasks Messaging See Setting alarms on page 114. Set a sound for reminder alerts, see Preferences on page 103). Set a sound for reminder alarms. See Preferences on page 106. Set a different sound for each type of message as notification of a new message:

See Sounds and alerts on page 140. Personalizing your P900 137 Control panel The Control Panel is the location for all the main settings on your P900 that are system-wide and affect more than one application. This is the main place to go to initially set up your P900, and to change settings at any point thereafter. To access it, select Control Panel. Applications >

Tip You can find settings that apply to a single application in the Preferences menu of the application, for example: Phone > Edit

> Preferences, CommuniCorder > CommuniCorder > Preferences, Internet > Edit > Preferences. The sections below describe the settings available for each of the default items in the Control panel. THE DEVICE TAB The device tab contains settings related to the behaviour of your P900 device itself. Application shortcuts Use this dialogue to configure the application shortcuts shown in the Flip closed Standby view, and the Application picker shortcuts in the Flip open mode. See Standby view on page 15 and Navigation on page 16. You can change the five shortcuts shown. If you feel that the Flip closed shortcuts obscure your wallpaper, you can choose to have them hidden when you do not need them. To change an application shortcut 1. In the Application shortcuts dialogue, select the Flip open or Flip closed tab depending on the shortcuts you intend to change. 2. Select the icon you wish to change. The name of the application is shown in the Set Application pick list. 3. Choose the application you want to replace it with from the list. To hide the Flip closed application shortcuts when your P900 is inactive Clear the Shortcuts always displayed check box. Display Use the Display settings to control the screen and power functions of your P900. Wallpaper tab You can set a picture to be the wallpaper for the standby screen. 138 Control panel 1. Select if the Flip closed or Flip open wallpaper should be changed. 2. Tap the image showing the current picture. 3. Browse to see picture files available on your P900. 4. Select a picture and tap Select. Read more about wallpaper in Personalizing your P900 on page 135. Screen tab You can set a picture to be the screen saver. 1. Select a picture for the screen saver. 2. Set the activation time for the screen saver. If you select the Screen saver device lock check box the device lock will activate when the delay runs out. Read more about the device lock in Device lock on page 35. If you set a time for the Automatic input lock, the keyboard lock will activate when the time runs out. Read more about the automatic key lock in Automatic key lock on page 36. Power tab You can set the screen light settings for car use and handheld use. Auto On Off Light switches on when you tap the screen, press a key, or receive an incoming call Light is always on Light is always off You can set if the power save should switch off the screen, blank the screen or show a clock on the screen. You can also set the power save time between 1 and 30 minutes. If you set times for both screen saver and power saver, the power saver time will commence after the screen saver is displayed. Flight mode In flight mode the radio function is turned off. You cannot make and receive calls but most of the other functions in the P900 are available. Use these settings to turn the flight mode on or off and also to activate the Power menu. When activated, the Power menu will ask you if you want to start the P900 in normal mode or flight mode each time you turn on the P900. Also, when you press the On/Off button when your P900 is on, the Power menu will ask you if you want to turn off the P900, or switch to another mode. Control panel 139 To activate the Power menu Select the Prompt me... check box and tap Done. To cancel the selection of Power menu Clear the Prompt me... check box and tap Done. International Use these settings to set the locations shown in as the units for distances, numerical separators, and how currency values should be shown.There are two tabs: Locations and Numbers. Time, as well On the Locations tab Set Current country/region and Current city to your current location. Set Other country/region and Other city to an alternative location (for example your home location if you are abroad). If the city you want is not listed, select another city in the desired time zone. On the Numbers tab Set the decimal separator and thousands separator you desire. Locks Locks contains options for activating the locks on the device, the SIM card and the keys on the keypad, and for changing the lock codes, see P900 locks on page 35. Sounds and alerts Use these settings to control sounds and alerts of your P900. Calls tab Sets ring tones and volume. Messages tab Sets notification alerts for messages. Other tab Sets button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms, and other notifications. You can choose to use any sound recording or audio file. You can select ring signals that are stored on your local storage or on a Memory Stick. If the selected file is later deleted or moved, the Default Melody will be played instead. Note If you use an audio file as a ring tone, alarm or notification signal, it will be played using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring volume setting will not affect the sound volume. To listen to the selected ringtone or alert 1. Tap the icon to listen to the signal. 2. Tap again to stop playback. 140 Control panel To change the default ring tone or alert 1. Tap the drop-down menu. 2. Select Default Melody for the P900 default or Find Melody to select a new one. Ring volume Set the preferred sound level for handheld, handsfree and car use. Increasing ring Select the checkbox to use increasing ring signals. This disables the other volume settings. 3. If required, change folder. 4. Select the required sound 5. Tap 6. Tap Select to set this sound. and to preview the sound. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure to excessive volume may damage hearing. Note To set vibrating alert, silent mode, speakerphone or mute the microphone, tap the volume icon on the status bar. Calls tab These settings set incoming call alerts. For more information see Ring signals on page 136. You may personalize the ring melodies further for individual contacts, see To change the details of a contact on page 98. Ring (voice) Select a ring signal for incoming voice calls. Ring (data) Select a ring signal for incoming data calls. Messages tab These settings set messaging alerts. Display notification message Select the check box to receive notification of a received message. SMS Select an alert for received SMS messages. Email Select an alert for received Email messages. MMS Select an alert for received MMS messages. Area info Select an alert for received area information messages. Auto setup Select an alert for auto setup messages. Other tab These settings set button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms, and other notifications. Button clicks Select the sound used when you press a key on the keypad. Screen taps Select the sound used when you tap the screen. Control panel 141 Reminder Select an alert to be played for reminders. Voice messages Select an alert to be played for voice messages. Default alarm sound Select the default alarm sound. Text input There are several standard ways of entering text in your P900. See Entering text with the Flip closed on page 31 and Entering text with the Flip open on page 32. Use the settings on the Primary, Alternative and Flip Closed tabs to set methods for entering text in your P900. Primary Alternative The method that you select here is activated automatically when you need to enter text into your P900. The method that you select here is activated if you tap at the bottom of the screen. Flip closed The method that you select here is activated when you need to enter text with the Flip closed. If you load other text input software, select it and adjust its settings here. Themes You can set the look of the user interface by changing the theme. To change the theme, select a theme from the list. The picture shows the Flip closed standby wallpaper. Tap Select. To change sound, select from the drop-down list. Tap the trumpet to listen to the sound. Tap again to stop playback. To send a theme, select the theme and tap Send as. To delete a theme, select the theme and tap Delete. Time & date Adjusting the time and date here sets these throughout your P900. The dialogue has three tabs. You can set:

Time & date Format Workdays The current time and date. Here you can also turn Summertime (daylight saving time) on or off for your location. Specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen. Specify the days in your working week. Note These settings are also available in the application. Time 142 Control panel Time & date tab To set the current date 1. On the Time & date tab, select the date. A calendar view opens. Tap the arrows to set the current year and month. 2. Select the current date. To set the current time 1. On the Time & date tab, select the time. Select the upper half of the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower half to decrease the number. 2. Select the am/pm box. This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format. 3. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker. If the locations you have set under Control panel >

International are in a country/region that currently has summertime (daylight saving time), you can adjust the time and date. To turn daylight saving time on 1. On the Time &date tab, select Summertime, select the check boxes for the zones that currently have daylight saving time. Select Done. 2. Format tab You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen, and if you want to use the 12-hour (am/pm) or 24-

hour time format. To set the time and date display format 1. Select Date format and choose a format. 2. Select Date separator and choose a separator. 3. Select a Time format. 4. Select Time separator choose a separator. 5. Select Done. Workdays tab You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also specify the first day of your week to customise the display of both Week and Month views in Calendar. User greeting Your P900 can show a user greeting on the standby screen when you turn it on. Use this dialogue to turn this function on or off. You can define your own user greeting text (up to 32 characters). Control panel 143 THE CONNECTIONS TAB The connections tab contains settings related to how your P900 communicates with other devices. Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio waves to enable wireless connections between your P900 and other Bluetooth-

enabled devices. This method of linking works well at a range of up to 10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will have an effect on the performance. Read more about connecting to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology in Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology on page 128. Bluetooth settings are shown on two tabs:

A device name for your P900. Bluetooth on or off. If it should be visible to other Bluetooth equipped devices. A list of all the Bluetooth-enabled devices that your P900 is paired (bonded) with. To change the name of a device, and to allow for connection without confirmation, select the name in the list. To remove a device from the list, select the name and select Remove. To locate other devices in the vicinity, and add them to the list, tap Add. Settings Devices 144 Tip You will probably find that the preset name of your P900, and of devices you pair it with, are not very meaningful or easily recognisable. It is a good idea to change these names to something more useful. The name you choose for your P900 appears on any devices you pair it with. See Pairing on page 128 for instructions on how to connect to another device using Bluetooth wireless technology. Security On the Settings tab you can set the Bluetooth security related settings of your P900. Bluetooth on Visible to other devices All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from your P900 works. Visibility according to the Visible to other devices setting. Set Bluetooth to Off if you do not use Bluetooth, it will decrease battery drain. Bluetooth will automatically switch on if you use Send as >

Bluetooth from the applications Yes: All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from your P900 works. No: All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from your P900 works but you cannot receive beamed items, and other devices cannot initiate pairing with your P900. You cannot use your P900 as a modem, it is not possible to connect from a PC and voice dialling from a headset is not possible. Control panel Cable Use Cable to set the cable connection mode and the connection parameters used when communicating through your P900's cable port. Set the cable connection mode. Please note that you must set the mode to Modem when using the P900 as a modem and when using the DUN (Dial-up Networking) Wizard. Set the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, character length and type of flow control required for the connection. When connecting your P900 via the desk stand to a USB port on your PC, use the following (default) settings:

Baud rate Parity Stop bits Character length Flow control 460800 None 1 8 CTS/RTS Tip You can set the cable connection mode when the Flip is closed by selecting Connections >

Applications >

Cable. GSM Networks This option lets you choose what net to use when you are outside your operators area. Choose if you want to search for a new network or use a preferred one. You can also make a list of preferred networks. Search mode Select between automatic or manual search for a network. Select network Tap the button to get a list of available networks. New search Tap the button to search for available networks. Preferred list Show the networks that your P900 will search for when you are outside your home network. Note Your operator may not allow you to access all available networks. To add a network to the preferred list 1. Tap Add network. 2. Select a network from the displayed list. 3. Select a position in the Preferred list and tap Done. Infrared Use this setting to control the state of the infrared port of your P900. Control panel 145 Set the infrared status to PC connect or Modem, as required. There are three types of Internet account:

You can set it Off, On or On for 10 minutes. Read more about connecting to other devices using infrared in Connection via Infrared port on page 127. Internet accounts You access the Internet using an Internet Service Provider (ISP), who supplies you with account details including: a username, a password, and the phone number or Web site address that your P900 automatically uses to access the Internet. You need to set up an Internet account before you can:

Access Web pages and download multimedia messages. Set up an e-mail account to send and receive e-mail messages. Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your P900. Dial-Up:

For Dial-Up (CSD, Circuit Switched Data) connections, you are charged for the length of time that you are connected to the Internet. High-Speed Dial-Up: For High-Speed Dial-Up (HSCSD, High Speed Circuit Switched Data) connections you are charged for the length of time you are connected but you can increase the connection speed so that information is transferred faster. The service must be included in your subscription and billing rates from your network operator may increase as you increase the connection speed. For a GPRS connection you are charged for the amount of information you view, download, or send. GPRS :

The dialogue has two tabs: Accounts and Other. Accounts tab The Internet accounts dialogue lists all the Internet accounts that have been set up on your P900. You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. 146 Control panel If you want to select an Internet account every time you connect to the Internet, select the Show connection dialogue check box. This may be useful if you use different Internet accounts for Internet and Messaging. Whenever you connect to the Internet, your Preferred account is the account that your P900 prompts you to use. To create a new Internet account 1. On the Accounts tab, select New. 2. Give the account a name. This will be the name shown in your list of accounts. (In dialogues that appear while a connection is being established the text -GPRS is automatically added to names of GPRS accounts.) 3. Choose the Connection type for the type of account that you want to create, GPRS or Dial-Up. 4. Continue entering settings as required. These will differ depending on the type of account: GPRS, Dial-Up or High-

Speed Dial-Up:

GPRS account New For some accounts you may need to make advanced settings, provided by your ISP. Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described below GPRS Advanced tabs Server Username and password Normally, you do not have to enter a username and password when you connect to a GPRS account. However, some service providers may require you to enter these details. If you select the Username and password required check box, but do not enter a username and password, you will be prompted to enter these when the P900 connects. Address Enter the Internet address of your access point. The address is supplied by your service provider. Control panel 147 GPRS Advanced tabs Log in The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses. The DNS address uniquely identifies your Internet Service Provider (ISP)'s computers, which your P900 uses to connect to the Internet. Your P900 can normally fetch these addresses automatically from most ISPs. If, after setting up an Internet account, you cannot connect to the Internet and you suspect these addresses are incorrect, ask your ISP for their primary and secondary DNS addresses. An IP address consists of four 3-digit boxes and valid input is between 000 and 256 in each box. A proxy server is a computer connected between your P900 and the computer you communicate with. This arrangement can be used for connections to Remote Sync servers, or within a company network. If this setting is needed, your company's Information Services department or Remote Sync provider must give you instructions. If your ISP supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow your P900 to provide features such as encryption, which increases the security of your Internet connection. Proxy Other 148 GPRS Advanced tabs Authentication is used by some network operators to identify the mobile phone connecting to their GPRS network. There are different methods, or protocols, for doing this. Normal: PAP (Password Authentication Protocol). The user's username and password are transmitted over the network in an unencrypted form. Secure: CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). The user's username and password are never transmitted over the network. None: No authentication is required by the network operator. Check with your network operator before changing any of the QoS (Quality of Service) settings. If your operator supports the use of Header compression, selecting On can speed up your connection. The settings Precedence, Delay, Peak rate, and Mean Rate are all by default set to Subscribed, which means that your operators default QoS (Quality of Service) values will apply. Reliability is set as Class 3 by default. QoS Dial-Up or High-Speed Dial-Up account New Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your Username, your Password, and their Phone number, which your P900 dials to connect to the Internet. If you have a High-Speed Control panel Dial-Up account with your network operator you can increase the speed of your connection by making settings on the Speed tab under Advanced. Tip To avoid having to change the phone number when you travel abroad: enter the international dialling prefix (for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your ISP. For some accounts you may also need to make advanced settings. Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described below Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs Log in The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses. For an explanation of these settings, see Log in in the GPRS Advanced tabs on page 147. As an alternative to entering your username and password to access the Internet you may need to use a login script stored on your P900. Although uncommon, scripts may be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Select the Use login script check box and enter the script text in the Script editor If you select the check box Plain text authentication

(required by some ISPs), the security of your connection will decrease during the connection process. Once you are connected, the security of your connection will be restored. Script Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs Select the check box Post connect terminal if:

The login script of the account that you are setting up requires that you input certain information or you will need to respond to prompts from the Internet account. You are connecting to a Dial-Up account that uses Secure Access generated by a separate smart card or password generator. For an explanation of these settings, see Proxy in the GPRS Advanced tabs on page 147. You can only increase the speed of your connection if you have a High-Speed Dial-Up account with your network operator. To enable secure access for this Internet account you must link it to a vendor-associated Secure Token in this dialogue:

1. Select the Enable secure access check box. To create or delete Secure Tokens on your P900, select Control panel > Other >Secure tokens. 2. Select the vendor and token names of the Secure Token that you want to link to this account from the drop-down lists. If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow your P900 to provide features such as encryption, which increases the security of your Internet connection. Proxy Speed Secure Other Control panel 149 To edit an Internet account 1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Edit. 3. Change your settings as desired. 4. Select Done. Note If you change the Connection type, all account data for that account will be deleted. To delete an Internet account 1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Done. Other tab You can use the Dial-Up timeout and GPRS timeout settings to set up your P900 to disconnect automatically from the Internet, if you are not using it. The connection is broken after the period you specify has lapsed. Preferred Mode (bearer preference) Please note that your P900 can be used for either voice (or GSM data) calls or transferring GPRS data, but not both at the same time. It may, however, still be connected to GPRS. As an example, during GPRS data transfer (Icon:

not receive incoming calls. As soon as the transfer stops

(Icon:

) incoming calls will be accepted.

) your P900 may Setting the Preferred Mode lets you choose how you want to use your P900:

Select GPRS only if you do not want to be disturbed by incoming phone calls while browsing the Web. All incoming voice (and GSM data) calls are rejected. If you disconnect from the Internet, incoming calls can be received. Outgoing calls are possible, except during data transfer. This mode is useful if you are using sensitive Internet services, such as banking. If you select GSM only, your P900 will not be connected to the GPRS network. If you choose to download e-mail or browse the Web, your P900 will connect to GPRS only as long as is needed for the data connection. If you select Automatic, your P900 will let you answer incoming GSM calls while having normal GPRS functionality. A GPRS data connection will be temporarily interrupted by a voice call. Messaging accounts The of messages, but you must first set up accounts and make settings as described below. Messaging application can handle many different types 150 Control panel The Messaging accounts dialogue has four tabs, one for each type of messaging account:

Email SMS MMS Area You can have any number of e-mail accounts. To receive and send e-mail, you must first set up an Internet account

(if one is not already set up). See Internet accounts on page 146. You can only have one SMS (Short Message Service) account.The settings on this tab also apply to EMS

(Extended Message Service) messages. You can only have one MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) account. To receive MMS messages you must first set up Internet and WAP accounts (if not already set up). SeeInternet accounts on page 146. You can only have one Area info account. The number of Area Information channels that you can subscribe to is limited by the space on your SIM. Tip A simple way of setting up an e-mail or multimedia message account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your P900. Read more about the different types of messages in Messaging on page 82. Email tab The Email tab shows a list of the e-mail accounts on your P900.You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. You can choose one of your e-mail accounts as Preferred. This will be the e-mail account that your P900 uses when you use Send as to send an entry as e-mail directly from one of your P900 applications To create a new e-mail account 1. On the Email tab, select New. 2. Enter the following settings on the tabs:

E-mail account basic tab settings Account name Your name This is the name you give to your e-mail account. This name appears on your outgoing e-mail messages. Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your e-mail address. Email address Connection type Select POP3 or IMAP. POP3 is most common. Internet account Select the Internet account to access your e-mail messages. Control panel 151 E-mail account Inbox tab settings Username Password Incoming server address Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your username, your password, and its incoming server address, which identifies the computer where your incoming e-mail messages are stored. If you want to limit the data traffic, you can choose to receive just Just headers (the sender, subject, and date only) or set a size limit (if a message is larger than the e-mails smaller than limit, only the headers are downloaded). You can download the complete message later. Select Schedule to schedule an automatic download of your incoming e-mail messages. Messages that are waiting in your Outbox will not be sent at the same time. Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with its Outgoing server address, which identifies the computer through which your outgoing e-mail messages are sent. Some SMTP servers might also require authentication when sending e-mail. In that case, select the check box Use SMTP authentication and enter your Username and Password. If the SMTP server accepts using your Inbox login information for authentication, select the check box Use Inbox login details. Download Schedule Use SMTP authentication Use Inbox login details 152 E-mail account Outbox tab settings Outgoing server address E-mail account Advanced tab settings Secure connections Outgoing mail port Use MIME encoding Incoming mail port Secure password authentication Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will tell you whether you can use either a Secure connection or Secure password authentication. Normally 25. Do not change unless your ISP instructs you to. MIME encoding is a standard that allows non-

textual information (for example graphics) and accented characters to be sent in e-mail messages. If you should not wish to Use MIME encoding, clear the check box. Normally 110. Do not change unless your ISP instructs you to. A secure connection means that all information

(including your username, password, and all messages) is encrypted to maximise security while you are connected to the Internet. In contrast, secure password authentication means that only your password is encrypted. To edit an e-mail account 1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Edit. 3. Change your settings as desired. 4. Select Done. Control panel To delete an e-mail account 1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Done. SMS tab Use these settings to set up text message and EMS messaging:

Messaging accounts SMS tab settings SMS Service centre address The Service centre address is the phone number where your text messages are stored. It is normally imported from the SIM card but if that fails, your network operator can provide you with the service centre address. Your network operator may also specify the Character Set. You can set a time limit after which text messages are deleted from the network by choosing a value in the Messages stored for list. Character Set Messages stored for Connection type Specify if you prefer to use GPRS or GSM connection as directed by your network operator. Tip If you send and receive text messages in several countries, you can avoid having to change the service centre address when you travel abroad by entering the international dialling prefix

(for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your network operator. MMS tab Use these settings to set up multimedia messaging:

Messaging accounts MMS tab settings Service centre address WAP accounts Automatic Download size and Smaller than The Service aentre address is the URL to the server on which your multimedia messages are stored. Your MMS service provider or your network operator can provide you with the service centre address. Specify which of your configured WAP accounts you wish to use. WAP accounts are created in Control panel >

Connections > WAP accounts Select between:

Home only - messages are downloaded automatically when you are connected to your home network. On - messages are also downloaded automatically when you are roaming outside your home network Off - automatic download is off, you will receive notifications of incoming messages and have to download them manually. Set whether or not to have a size limit for incoming messages:

No restrictions - the size of the incoming messages does not matter, all messages will be received. Less than - messages smaller than the limit will be received, bigger messages will be deflected. Control panel 153 Advanced settings Select Advanced to make settings about how your P900 will send and receive multimedia messages. MMS Advanced settings tabs Send The values you give these settings will be default for all multimedia messages that you send. You can of course choose other values for an individual message in Messaging. You can set the Validity period for your messages, that is, how long they should be available to the receiver. Maximum is the default. You can give your messages a Priority of Low, Normal

(default) or High. You can set a level of Conformance for the multimedia messages that you send to make sure that they will be played back correctly on different products. If checked, a warning message is displayed whenever you add a non-conformant item to a multimedia message. You have the option to send anyway. Select the check boxes to provide the function you want:

Hide number prevents the sent message from showing your number. Read report requests a read notification from receivers of your messages. Delivery report requests a delivery notification from receivers of your messages. Reply with history includes the original with your reply. MMS Advanced settings tabs Receive These settings apply to multimedia messages that you receive. Select the Play full screen checkbox, when you want to play MMS messages in full screen. Select the check boxes to send a notification message to the sender when a message is:

Delivered to you: Allow delivery notification Read by you: Allow read notification You can filter reception of incoming messages by message class (Advertisements, Information, and Anonymous senders) as well messages from senders listed in Contacts. Selecting a check box will filter out messages of that category. To receive multimedia messages only from senders listed in your Contacts, select all other check boxes and clear the check box for Anonymous senders. Area tab On the Area tab you make settings related to Cell Broadcast Services. These include both Area Information and Cell Information services. The availability of Cell and Area Information Services is operator-dependent. Your network may broadcast the area code as cell information. Your P900 can to display it below the network name in the Flip closed standby view. 154 Control panel Area Information is a type of text message that is sent to all subscribers in a certain network area, for example a local traffic report. To enable Cell Information Select the Cell information check box To turn Area Information on 1. Check the Area information check box. Received messages will be automatically stored, and displayed in the list when dismissed. 2. The list shows all the channels that you have defined on your P900. The check box for each channel shows if it is on

(checked, ready to receive messages) or off (cleared, not active):

To add a new channel 1. Select New. 2. Enter the number of the new channel in the New Channel dialogue. Channel numbers can be from 0 to 999. If there are too many channels defined, New will be disabled and you will see a message: Maximum channels on SIM. Channel numbering is operator-dependent. Please consult your network operator for information. To turn a channel on or off Select the channel in the list and check the check box. To turn it off, clear the check box. To delete a channel Select Delete. Since deleting a channel cannot be undone, you will be asked to confirm the delete. Deleting the channel will also delete any stored Area Information messages for that channel in your Area Info Inbox. WAP accounts Use these settings to set up and manage WAP accounts on your P900. WAP accounts are intended for multimedia messages and for accessing the Internet through a WAP gateway. (Such gateways make use of proxy port 9200-9203.) All other proxy settings should be included in your Internet accounts. For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular WAP account. The dialogue has two tabs: Basic and Preferred. Basic tab The dialogue shows a list of all the WAP accounts on your P900. You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. Control panel 155 Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a new one. To create a new WAP account 1. Enter the name of the WAP account. 2. Select the Internet account you want to use. Preferred indicates the account set as preferred in the Internet setup. 3. If you are going to use a WAP gateway or a proxy, select the Use proxy check box. 4. Enter the IP Address of the gateway or proxy. 5. Enter the Port address of the gateway or proxy. For a WAP gateway use:

9201 for a normal connection. 9203 for an encrypted secure connection. If the gateway/proxy requires Username and Password, which is very unusual, fill in the last two fields in the dialogue. Preferred tab Select the check box to set a preferred WAP account. It will be used when you use the Open page command in the application and when a page is opened from another P900 application. Internet If you do not set a preferred WAP account, the preferred Internet account will be used when connecting to the Internet. THE OTHER TAB The other tab contains all settings that are not related to the device or connections. This is also where settings from system components and add-ons, developed by third-party developers, will be found. Certificate manager Digital certificates ensure that the Web or WAP pages you visit, or any software you install, really are created by the person you expect. Certificates may be present on the pages that you view or the software that you download. Your P900 compares these certificates with a set of certificates that are stored in Certificate manager to ensure the authenticity of the page or software. If the certificates do not match, your P900 informs you, and gives you the following choices:

Prevent the page being loaded or the software being installed. Continue at your own risk. The certificates on your P900 have been created and issued by an independent organisation that ensures their authenticity. 156 Control panel Security information Security information is displayed when Certificate manager cannot be sure of the origin of the page or software. For example, security information will be displayed if:

The certificate on a page has expired. The identity of a software manufacturer cannot be verified. Security information is also displayed when a certificate on your P900 has:

Expired. Been revoked by the independent organisation that issued it. Adding and deleting certificates Your P900 handles certificates automatically so, most of the time, you can browse the Internet securely without using Certificate manager. If you do need to add or delete a certificate, you will usually be informed by your network operator or system administrator. You should delete a certificate from Certificate manager if you are informed, or suspect, that:

The certificate does not belong to the person who supplied it. The certificate was issued incorrectly by the independent organisation that created it. Type of certificate The type can be either User or Certificate Authority. User certificates contain your identity. This type of certificate is used when the server asks for client authentication. The client application requests you to identify yourself by choosing a user certificate. Certificate Authority certificates contain server details. This type of certificate is handled by your P900 when the server only requires server authentication. This means that your identity remains anonymous. Flip removed This dialogue lets you enable the use of the Virtual flip when the flip of your P900 has been removed, see Virtual flip on page 17. Format disk This dialogue primarily lets you rename and format any Memory Stick Duo that you install in your P900. Your P900 comes with one Memory Stick Duo. Control panel 157 When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it, including any applications that you may have installed. You also delete all information placed on it by other devices (these folders are hidden except in File Manager). IP security manager The IP security manager displays stored policies and only one policy can be activated at a time.This is used for secure connections over the Internet, typically to a corporate intranet. If needed, your company information services department will supply the necessary information. There are two types of passwords needed:

IP security password: is to be set when activating the very first policy, that is, this password is only set once, but it is possible to change it later at any time by tapping the Password button. Activation password: is needed when a policy is activated for the first time and the supplier of the policy gives this. Language selection Use this list of all languages stored on your P900 to change language. The highlighted entry is the language presently in use. You can delete all languages except English. To conserve storage space only a limited set of languages is loaded on your P900 at delivery. When you select one of the languages from the list the unused languages in the set are deleted from the memory of your P900. You can, at any time, use the Download Language utility on the PC suite for P900 CD to load and delete languages.The utility will guide you through downloading the language from your PC or the Internet. When you have selected a new language, you have to turn the P900 off and then on again for the change to take effect. Master reset Use Master reset to reset your P900. Note All user data, as well as pre-installed media files and application data files (including, for example, wallpapers, ring signals and pictures), will be deleted and settings will be set to the state they were, after you selected the language. The selected local language will be restored. If you have backed up your user data, you can restore it from the backup, see Restoring data on page 134. You can restore media files and application data files from the Multimedia for P900 CD, or from the Web. If you want to keep installed applications, clear the Delete user installed applications check box. 158 Control panel Secure tokens If you need access to a network that requires secure access

(often known as strong authentication), for example a corporate intranet, you can set up the Internet account you use to log in to that network to use secure access and generate the required one-time password when you make the connection. Your P900 supports the following secure access systems:

SecureID from RSA SafeWord from Secure Computing It is also possible to add other access systems through third-

party software. If you have a separate device or application that requires one-

time passwords according to one of these systems, you do not need a separate hardware token generator (Hard Token). Your P900 can generate passwords that are not associated with an Internet account. You manage secure access in your P900 using Secure Tokens. Each token is associated with one vendor/system and may be associated with one or more Internet accounts (or none, when you use your P900 as a Hard Token). You can configure as many tokens as needed. Tip Dialogue details when using secure access are vendor, system and network-specific. You should contact the administrator of the network you wish to access to get the correct information. Storage manager The list shows the applications on your P900 and the space they occupy. Tapping the Files button lets you manage general files stored internally on the P900 or on a Memory Stick Duo. Deleting information from applications To delete information from an application: select an application in the list. This application is then displayed. Delete the old or unwanted entries or information. Here are some housekeeping tips for different applications:

Delete any unwanted recordings as even short ones occupy a Messaging, delete any old messages from your Inbox lot of space. In or Sent folders. In selecting Calendar > Delete entries in your list of entries. In Tasks, delete all completed entries by selecting Tasks > Delete completed in your list of entries. Calendar, delete all entries in a specified time period by Control panel 159 Throughout your P900, use folders as you create and receive information to speed up housekeeping later. 2. Select the application to uninstall. 3. Select Uninstall. Deleting or copying general files Tap Files to see lists of all stored general file types on your P900 and the Memory Stick Duo. You can copy files to a specified folder, delete unwanted files, and launch the appropriate application to view or play a file in the list. To delete files or copy files between folders 1. Select Files. 2. Select the Type of file to move or delete. 3. Select the Location folder. 4. Tap one or more check boxes to select the files to copy or delete. 5. To copy files, tap Copy and select the destination folder. To delete files, tap Delete. You will be asked to confirm. Uninstalling applications If you uninstall an application, you can always reinstall it if you want to use it later. To uninstall applications 1. Select Uninstall. A list of applications that can be uninstalled is shown. Note You cannot uninstall the standard applications that came with your P900. WIM PIN settings WIM (WAP Identity Module) is used for performing security functions, especially to store and process information needed for user identification and authentication. It is a tamper-resistant store for private keys, certificates and other items that may require a PIN for access or modification. The WIM management dialogue consists of a PIN choice list and a WIM items list. You can select a PIN from the PIN choice list. The WIM items list changes content dynamically, displaying only the keys that are protected by the selected PIN and also have an associated certificate. Other keys that are protected by the selected PIN but do not have an associated certificate are not shown in the WIM item list. This is the case when WIM PIN (PIN-G) is selected. Note The PIN-G applies to the whole WIM and any items that do not have a different PIN. This means that no specific items on the WIM are linked to PIN-G. You can change status of a PIN:

160 Control panel Enable PIN A PIN code that is enabled is requested for authorisation of an operation. To proceed with the operation you must enter the PIN code. Disable PIN A PIN code that is disabled is not requested to authorise an operation to proceed. To change the PIN code 1. Select the PIN you want to change from the choice list. 2. Select Change PIN. If a PIN code has been blocked, you must unblock it before it can be used again. Select the PIN and select Change PIN. Control panel 161 Getting started with Internet and Messaging Introduction Before you can use Internet and send or receive messages, you will need to make some user-specific settings in the Connection type When your P900 connects to a service provider, it will use a GSM or GPRS network provided by a network operator. Many network operators offer both GPRS and GSM services. Messaging to access the Control Panel. Internet and Service provider You will need a service provider to connect your P900 to the network.The service provider could be:

An Internet Service Provider (ISP) which connects you to the Internet. An access point provided by your network operator. A private service provider such as your company or your bank. You will need to enter specific service provider details into your P900 to set up an Internet account. It can hold the details of multiple service providers, for example, you may have separate Internet and corporate accounts. Your network operator or retailer may have pre-installed services, check with them. The connection type defines which network your account uses to connect to the Internet. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network, and Dial-Up Internet accounts use the GSM network. GPRS If your network operator supports GPRS, a GPRS Internet account allows you to:

Remain permanently connected to the Internet without being charged for connection time. With a GPRS account, you are charged for the amount of information you view, download or send when your are connected to the Internet.Check your operator for details of your subscription. Avoid having to reconnect to the Internet if the connection is broken. Dial-Up For both Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up accounts, you are charged for the length of time you are connected. If your network operator supports them, you can increase your connection speed (at a cost) by setting up a high-speed account. 162 Getting started with Internet and Messaging Automatically set up service provider and messaging The easiest way to set up your P900 is automatically, through your service provider. Messaging settings your P900 supports automatic setup For of:

e-mail accounts MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service) settings. Check your service provider's Web site for information or contact their support desk and ask about automatic remote configuration of ISP (Internet Service Provider) settings, e-mail and MMS message settings. Accepting new Internet or Messaging settings New configuration messages will appear in the Auto setup account inbox of Messaging. (Configuration messages for e-mail accounts will, however, be found in your SMS message inbox.) When an auto setup message appears, select it. A dialogue with a brief text and operator message appears on the screen. You can accept the new settings or leave the message in the inbox. If the name of the new account is the same as that of an existing account you can choose to create a new account with the same name or replace the existing account. If remote configuration is possible, they will send you the auto-

configuration messages required by SMS message. Note Never accept remote configuration messages if you are not expecting them or are unsure where they have come from. Settings valid for your network operator and one or more of these services may also be available through the phone configurator utility at www.SonyEricsson.com To check that your SMS messaging settings are correct 1. Select Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >

SMS. 2. Check the information, for example the address of the service centre. Manually set up service provider As an alternative to setting up an Internet account automatically, you can enter the settings manually from Connections > Internet accounts. Control panel >

Getting started with Internet and Messaging 163 First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from your ISP (Internet Service Provider), or if you are connecting to a corporate network, your information services department. All settings are described in Internet accounts on page 146. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new Internet account on page 147. Manually set up Messaging As an alternative to setting up Messaging automatically, you can enter the settings for the messaging services you want to use yourself from accounts. Control panel > Connections > Messaging First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from the following sources:

If your network operator offers an e-mail service you can get the necessary details from them. Your Internet service provider. Your information services manager in the case of connecting to the corporate network to access your work e-mail account. Your network operator in the case of SMS message and Cell Broadcast Services. The dialogue has four tabs, one for each type of messaging service:

e-mail SMS message MMS message Area The provider of your e-mail service, or for a corporate account, your information services manager can provide you with the necessary details. All settings are described in Email tab on page 151. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new e-mail account on page 151. Short Message Service The necessary settings are usually provided on your SIM card. All settings are described in SMS tab on page 153. Multimedia Messaging Service Your MMS messaging provider will be able to provide you with the necessary information. Before you set up MMS messaging you need to set up an Internet account in Control panel > Connections > Internet accounts and a WAP account in Control panel >

Connections > WAP accounts All settings are described in MMS tab on page 153. Cell Broadcast Service: Area and Cell information Your network operator will be able to inform you if these services are available. All settings are described in Area tab on page 154. 164 Getting started with Internet and Messaging Setting up WAP accounts A WAP account (sometimes called a WAP profile) defines a service provider and gateway that should be used when making a connection to WAP services. You also need a WAP account when you use MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service). The WAP gateway sits between your P900 and the WAP site coding and decoding information. You can set up details of more than one gateway if necessary, for example one for your MMS messaging, one to access corporate data over WAP, and another to access your bank's WAP service. The easiest way to set up a WAP account on your P900 is automatically, through your service provider. Check your service provider's Web site for information or contact their support desk and ask about automatic setup. You can also find more information, and settings for many operators on:

http://www.SonyEricsson.com/support. Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a new one. Manually set up a WAP account Alternatively to setting up a WAP account automatically, you can enter the settings manually from Connections > WAP accounts. Control panel >

First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from the WAP service provider, or if you are connecting to a corporate network, your information services manager. All settings are described in WAP accounts on page 155. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new WAP account on page 156. Using your P900 as a modem Your P900 contains a complete GSM/GPRS modem, so you can use it to connect your PC to the Internet or corporate intranet.Your P900 appears to the laptop like a normal modem. You link the laptop to your P900 using Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared, or cable (USB or serial).The connection over the air can be by any of the bearers that your P900 supports:

GPRS HSCSD (High-speed Circuit Switched Data) CSD (Circuit Switched Data). A Windows modem driver file and a PC utility, the Dial-Up Networking Wizard, is provided on your PC Suite for P900 CD. The wizard will help you configure DUN (Dial-Up Networking) entries on your PC for GPRS and HSCSD connections. Getting started with Internet and Messaging 165 Once paired with a Bluetooth-enabled laptop, your P900 is ready to make a connection to the Internet or corporate network. Because Bluetooth is wire-free and requires no line-of-sight alignment, you can place the laptop in a comfortable position and let your P900 remain in your pocket, briefcase, or even be placed up to 10 metres away. If you wish to use an infrared link, the range is typically up to 1 metre. The two infrared ports must be kept in line of sight, at an angle of no more than approximately 30 degrees. The Dial-Up Networking Wizard The wizard simplifies creating GPRS DUN connections by setting the proper values in the PC DUN entry and linking the entry to one of the GPRS configurations in your P900. You can also view and modify the GPRS settings in the P900. For HSCSD DUN entries, it updates the modem settings such that the specified data rate and type of bearer (ISDN / Analogue) will be used when you make a DUN connection. You can view or change the DUN entries created with the wizard using the standard Windows DUN user interface. The Dial-Up Networking Wizard software included in the PC Suite for P900 must be installed in your PC and your P900 must be connected to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. See Connecting to other devices on page 126. Make sure that you have any information concerning, for example, phone numbers, names of servers or domains, that the server that you want to connect to may require. To set up a GPRS or HSCSD (High-Speed Circuit Switched Data) connection using the Dial-Up Networking Wizard 1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson folder of the Start menu on your PC. 2. Choose Create a new Dial-Up connection. 3. Follow the instructions in the wizard. To edit a previously created DUN entry 1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson folder of the Start menu on your PC. 2. Modify a Dial-Up connection. 3. Select the desired connection from the list. 4. Follow the instructions in the wizard. To define P900 as a modem To set up a CSD (GSM Data) or HSCSD connection you will need to install your P900 as a modem manually. To set up a Dial-Up entry for CSD or HSCSD 1. On the PC, open the Control Panel. 2. Choose to install a new modem. 166 Getting started with Internet and Messaging 3. Choose your P900 as the modem. 4. Select the port where the P900 is connected. 5. Confirm the selection. A new DUN connection has been created. Connecting To connect using a DUN entry created by the wizard 1. If you are connecting by cable, set your P900 to Modem cable connection mode, see Cable on page 145. 2. Use any conventional method to make a connection:

Click the Desktop shortcut created by the wizard. Select the entry from within the system DUN folder. Run an application that has built-in support for using DUN entries (for example a browser or e-mail client). GPRS - connection information Icons on the status bar let you overview the information on data connection calls. A combined signal strength and GPRS signal icon provides information on the GPRS service status. The GPRS connection status appears above the signal strength icon. There are three states for the icon, unavailable attached

, available and

. and GPRS The HSCSD/CSD icons are displayed during a data connection. Where GPRS is suspended, for example, the GPRS suspended state is indicated by a combined icon There are three states for the GPRS icon: Active active transferring data (alternates between and suspended activates the GPRS active icon for 5 seconds. Any data transfer either received or sent and

, Connection information When you select the data connection icon, during an active data connection, a menu appears with the choices Information and Disconnect. Select Information to view information on the connection. Select Disconnect to end the connection. GPRS status information When the signal strength icon is selected, network, GPRS status information and, if applicable, GPRS error text appear. GPRS data log A new GPRS data log entry is created when a GPRS account establishes a connection for the first time. It does not wait for transfer data. If there is an existing data log associated with the current GPRS connection, this is updated. Getting started with Internet and Messaging 167 Session data When the connection is deactivated, for example when the current Internet account is disconnected, the total data sent and received in the last session is displayed. The information is displayed for a couple of seconds. To dismiss the information when the Flip is closed, press

. The GPRS data log shows a list of GPRS Internet accounts. Where one account is active or suspended, the relevant status icon is displayed to the left of the account. To view information on an account 1. Select an account in the list. 2. Information on the account is shown. The data log is updated dynamically. Buttons allow you to delete or reset the current data. These buttons are disabled during an active or suspended connection. To delete the log for an account 1. Select an account in the list. 2. Select GPRS data log > Delete. To reset the log of an account 1. Select an account in the list. 2. Select GPRS data log > Reset. To delete or reset the log of several accounts 1. Select the check boxes of the accounts in the list to be deleted or reset. 2. Select GPRS data log > Reset or GPRS data log > Delete. 168 Getting started with Internet and Messaging REFERENCE Troubleshooting This chapter consists of a selection of suggestions for solving possible problems with your P900. If this does not help, please try the Solution Finder on www.sonyericsson.com/support. There you can also find other information that can be helpful. Start-up problems P900 will not start Handheld phone: recharge or replace the battery. Make sure the contacts on the battery and charger are clean and avoid charging the battery in extreme temperatures. Vehicle Handsfree: check that the P900 is properly inserted into the holder and check the fuse in the fuse holder (connected to the battery cable). Lock problems Insert card Make sure a SIM card is activated and inserted into your P900. See SIM card on page 11. Blocked SIM card If your PIN is entered incorrectly three times in a row, the SIM card will be blocked. You can unblock it by using your PUK. See SIM card lock on page 35. Device lock Phone locked is displayed followed by the prompt Enter lock code. Your P900 is locked to prevent unauthorised use. To unlock the P900:

Enter your device lock code, 0000 by default, then press or

. Key symbol Indicator light Flashes red The keypad is locked to prevent unintentional key action. Press keys. to unlock the followed by This indicates that the battery is running low and soon needs recharging or replacing with a spare. With Vehicle Handsfree (VHF) equipment, make sure that the following are inserted or connected:

your P900 and its holder, the fuse in the fuse holder, and/or the external antenna. Does not flash If the indicator light at the top of your P900 does not flash and no network is displayed there is no network within range. See Telephone does not work on page 170. Troubleshooting 169 Communication problems Telephone does not work The received signal can be too weak, possibly because you are being shielded from the signal. Check your display signal strength indicator. Move outdoors or up from the ground to obtain a sufficiently strong signal. Make sure the P900 is not set into Flight mode. Your P900 might be busy sending or receiving data or e-mail. Check the settings for diverting or restricting calls. See Divert calls on page 52, Accepted callers on page 52 and Restrict calls on page 53. If Emergency calls only is displayed on the screen, you are not allowed to use the network within range. You can, however, usually make an emergency call using the emergency number. If No network is displayed on the screen, you are in an area that is not covered by a network or the received signal is too weak. Cannot hear incoming call Increase the ring signal volume. Increase the ring signal volume. The persons I talk with has problems hearing what I say Make sure you do not cover the microphone when you talk. You find the microphone at the bottom, next to the connector. You could be almost out of network range. The sound improves with a better network connection. Cannot use WAP Your subscription does not include WAP. Check with your service provider. Cannot send nor receive SMS or MMS The settings are not correct. Enter new settings. Contact you service provider or visit www.sonyericsson.com/support and use the WAP configurator. Your subscription does not include SMS or MMS. Check with your service provider. Check with you service provider that you have entered the correct Service Centre phone number. Check the settings in the Control panel. Contact you service provider or visit www.sonyericsson.com/support and use the MMS configurator. Make sure that Flight mode is deactivated. Phone memory might be full. Delete some pictures or music, for example. 170 Troubleshooting Fax calls Your P900 does not support fax transmission. Even if your operator subscription supports fax transmission, fax calls will be rejected. However, they can be diverted to another number such as the office fax number, see Divert calls on page 52 for more information. Make sure potential fax callers do not try to send a fax to your P900 as they can experience a number of retries before the fax transmission is stopped. Problems to connect to a PC or another device Not possible to establish connection using cable correctly connected to the PC. Make sure that the Sync Station and cable is Make sure that the correct COM port on the PC is enabled. Right-click the P900 link symbol in the PC taskbar, and select Properties. Select the USB COM port. Uninstall PC suite for P900. Connect the Sync Station with the P900 to the PC. Reinstall PC suite for P900, following the installation procedure thoroughly. Check for PC suite for P900 updates on www.sonyericsson.com/support. If you find a new version of the program, download it and install this instead of the old one. Cannot transfer pictures Place the P900 in the Sync Station. In the PC, open My P900 and browse through the P900 file system to find the picture. Cannot transfer items with Bluetooth wireless technology Cannot establish connection with a Bluetooth wireless technology handset or handsfree Memory full Make sure that Bluetooth wireless technology is activated. Make sure that the devices are in range with each other. Maximum range is 10 metres. Make sure that the devices are correctly paired. See Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology on page 128. Make sure that the handset or handsfree is charged. Make sure that the devices are in range with each other. When your P900 has no more space available to save or store information, a message is shown. You must then free up memory to ensure the proper functioning of the P900. Make sure regular backups are made with Communications Suite to reduce the risk of lost or corrupted information. Storage manager Use the storage manager to move items from the P900 internal memory to a Memory Stick Duo, or remove items from the P900 memory. Troubleshooting 171 To start the storage manager Select Applications >

Control Information in applications panel > Device > Storage manager. A list of all applications and their memory requirements is shown. See Deleting or copying general files on page 160 and Deleting information from applications on page 159. Use the applications to remove unused or old items from the P900 internal memory:

WAP history or bookmarks. Messages. Contacts. Call logs. Calendar tasks or appointments. Jotter notes. Applications stop responding Close the Flip and open it again. Turn off the P900 and turn it on again. Remove the battery, wait about 10 seconds, and System failure insert it again. Phone memory might be full. Delete some pictures or music, for example. If the problem continues, do a master reset. See Master reset on page 158. All data will be lost. In the case of a system failure, your P900 will flash an animated warning. To recover, please restart the P900 like this:

Press and hold the On/Off button for at least 10 seconds to turn the P900 off. Restart as normal: Press the On/Off button to turn on your P900. Miscellaneous Cannot save on Memory Stick Duo You might have a Memory Stick Duo with a lock switch. Move the switch in the other direction. The Memory Stick Duo might be full. Delete some files on it. Cannot change language except to the language I chose when I first started The first time you start the P900 you select a language. All other languages are then deleted, in order to free memory. You can find all languages on the PC suite for P900 CD. From the CD, you can install the language you want. 172 Troubleshooting Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read this information before using your mobile phone. Note Important: to avoid hearing impairment, answer call or lower volume before placing this product to your ear. Recommendations Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place. Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity. Do not expose your product to extreme high or low temperatures. Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco products. Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product. Do not paint your product. Do not use your product near medical equipment without requesting permission. Do not use your product when in, or around aircraft, or areas posted turn off two-way radio. Do not use your product in an area where a potentially explosive atmosphere exists. Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the area above your cars airbag. Do not attempt to disassemble your product. Only Sony Ericsson authorised personnel should perform any service. Antenna Only use an antenna that has been specifically designed by Sony Ericsson for your mobile phone. Use of unauthorised or modified antennas could damage your mobile phone and may violate regulations, causing loss of performance and SAR levels above the recommended limits (see below). Efficient use Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the top of the phone when in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times. Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is turned on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or radio frequency fields). Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety guidelines, developed by scientific organisations, e.g. ICNIRP (International Com-

mission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection), through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels of radio wave exposure for the general population. All Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to operate within these stringent levels. The levels include a safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, and to account for any variations in measurements. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio frequency energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR value is determined at the highest certified power level in laboratory conditions, but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone while operating can be well below this value. This is because the mobile phone is designed to use the minimum power required to reach the network. Therefore, the closer you are to a base station, the more likely it is that the actual SAR level will decrease. Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that there are variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among various mobile phones, all Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to meet radio frequency exposure guidelines. A separate leaflet with SAR information for this mobile phone model is included with the material that comes with this mobile phone. This information can also be found, together with more information on radio frequency exposure and SAR, on www.sonyericsson.com. Driving Please check if local laws and regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while driving or require drivers to use handsfree solutions. We recommend that you use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson handsfree solutions intended for use with your Guidelines for safe and efficient use 173 product. Please note that because of possible interference with other equipment, some vehicle manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles unless a handsfree kit with an external antenna supports the installation. Always give full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Personal Medical Devices Mobile phones may affect the operation of cardiac pacemakers and other implanted equipment. Please avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker, e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the mobile phone, place it at the ear oppo-

site the pacemaker. If a minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) is kept between the mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk of interference is limited. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, immediately turn off your mobile phone. Contact your cardiologist for more information. For other medical devices, please consult the manufacturer of the device. Children DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR COULD ACCIDENTALLY DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCESSO-

RIES. YOUR MOBILE PHONE AND ITS ACCESSORIES MAY CONTAIN SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BE DETACHED AND CREATE A CHOKING HAZARD. Disposing of the Product Your mobile phone should not be placed in municipal waste. Please check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Power Supply Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as marked on the product. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be subjected to damage or stress. To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the unit from any power source before attempting to clean it. The AC power adapter must not be used out-

doors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug. If the plug will not fit into the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Emergency Calls Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection under all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any mobile phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain net-

work services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local ser-

vice provider. Battery Use and Care We recommend that you fully charge the battery before you use your mobile phone for the first time. The battery can only be charged in temperatures between +5C

(+41F) and +45C (+113F). A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced capacity the first few times it is used. The talk and standby times depend on the actual transmission conditions when using the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is used near a base station, less power is required and talk and standby times are prolonged. Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire. Use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original batteries and chargers intended for use with your mobile phone. Other chargers may not charge sufficiently or may produce excessive heat. Using other batteries and chargers could be dangerous. Do not expose the battery to liquid. Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch another metal object. This could short-circuit and damage the battery. Do not disassemble or modify the battery. Do not expose the battery to extreme temperatures, and never above +60C (+140F). For maximum battery capacity, use the battery in room temperature. Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery. 174 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Keep out of the reach of children. Use the battery for the intended purpose only. Do not allow the battery to be put into the mouth. Battery electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed. Disposing of the battery Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre for information. The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Use a bat-

tery disposal facility if available. Limited warranty Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, S-221 88 Lund, Sweden, (Sony Eric-

sson), provides this Limited Warranty for your mobile phone and original acces-

sory delivered with your mobile phone (hereinafter referred to as "Product"). Should your Product need warranty service, please return it to the dealer from whom it was purchased, or contact your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre

(national rates may apply) or visit www.sonyericsson.com to obtain further infor-

mation. Our warranty Subject to the conditions of this Limited Warranty, Sony Ericsson warrants this Product to be free from defects in design, material and workmanship at the time of its original purchase by a consumer, and for a subsequent period of one (1) year. What we will do If, during the warranty period, this Product fails to operate under normal use and service, due to defects in design, materials or workmanship, Sony Ericsson author-

ised distributors or service partners, in the country/region* where you purchased the Product, will, at their option, either repair or replace the Product in accordance with the terms and conditions stipulated herein. Sony Ericsson and its service partners reserve the right to charge a handling fee if a returned Product is found not to be under warranty according to the conditions below. Please note that your personal settings/downloads might be lost when the Product is repaired or replaced. Conditions 1. The warranty is valid only if the original proof of purchase issued to the original purchaser by a dealer authorised by Sony Ericsson for this Product, specifying the date of purchase and serial number**, is presented with the Product to be repaired or replaced. Sony Ericsson reserves the right to refuse warranty service if this information has been removed or changed after the original purchase of the Product from the dealer. 2. If Sony Ericsson repairs or replaces the Product, the repaired or replaced Product shall be warranted for the remaining time of the original warranty period or for ninety (90) days from the date of repair, whichever is longer. Repair or replacement may involve the use of functionally equivalent reconditioned units. Replaced parts or components will become the property of Sony Ericsson. 3. This warranty does not cover any failure of the Product due to normal wear and tear, or due to misuse, including but not limited to use in other than the normal and customary manner, in accordance with the Sony Ericsson instructions for use and maintenance of the Product. Nor does this warranty cover any failure of the Product due to accident, software or hardware modification or adjustment, acts of God or damage resulting from liquid. 4. Since the cellular system on which the Product is to operate is provided by a carrier independent from Sony Ericsson, Sony Ericsson will not be responsible for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of that system. 5. This warranty does not cover Product failures caused by installations, modifications, or repair or opening of the Product performed by a non-Sony Ericsson authorised person. 6. The warranty does not cover Product failures which have been caused by use of accessories or other peripheral devices which are not Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original accessories intended for use with the Product. 7. Tampering with any of the seals on the Product will void the warranty. Guidelines for safe and efficient use 175 8. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, OTHER THAN THIS PRINTED LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ERICSSON OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS, TO THE FULL EXTENT THOSE DAMAGES CAN BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Some countries/states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or con-

sequential damages, or limitation of the duration of implied warranties, so the pre-

ceding limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. The warranty provided does not affect the consumer's statutory rights under appli-

cable legislation in force, nor the consumer's rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase contract.

* European Union (EU) If you have purchased your Product in an EU country you can have your Product serviced, under the conditions set out above, within the warranty period in any EU country where an identical Product is sold by an authorised Sony Ericsson distrib-

utor. To find out if your Product is sold in the EU country you are in, please call the local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre. Please observe that certain services may not be possible anywhere other than in the country of original purchase, for example due to the fact that your Product may have an interior or exterior which is different from equivalent models sold in other EU countries. It may not be possible to repair SIM-locked Products.

** In some countries/regions additional information is requested. If so, this is clearly shown on the valid proof of purchase. FCC Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Environmental information Halogenated flame retardants are not used in cabinets or the printed wiring board of the phone. Power consumption of charger during standby < 0.3W. For more environmental information, look at the Environmental Declaration for P900 at www.sonyericsson.com Declaration of Conformity We, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB of Nya Vattentornet S-221 88 Lund, Sweden declare under our sole responsibility that our product Sony Ericsson type FAB-1021011-BV and FAB-1021011-CN and in combination with our accessories, to which this declaration relates is in con-

formity with the appropriate standards 3GPP TS 51.010-1, EN 301489-7, EN 300328, EN 300826 and EN 60950, following the provisions of, Radio Equip-

ment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment directive 99/5/EC with require-

ments covering EMC directive 89/336/EEC, and Low Voltage directive 73/23/

EEC. Kista, October 2003 Place & date of issue 0682 Hiroshi Yoshioka, Head of Product Business Unit GSM/UMTS We fulfil the requirements of the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC). 176 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Terms and definitions AU Format for audio data files.AU files have the suffix .au bps Bits per second rate of data flow. Bearer Path over which data flows. Specifically in CSD and HSCSD, the type of phone link from the GSM network to the server PSTN or ISDN. Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology is a secure, fast radio connection technology. It is a computing and telecommunications industry specification that describes how mobile phones, computers, and personal digital assistants (PDAs) can easily interconnect with each other and with home and business phones and computers using a short-range wireless connection. BMP Microsoft Windows Bitmap. A graphics format defined by Microsoft supporting 1, 4, 8 or 24 bit colour depth. No compression, so files can be large. Bookmark A URL and header/title stored in the phone, enabling the user to go directly to a Web or WAP page. cHTML A version of HTML optimised for small devices. CLI Calling Line Identity. Shows the number of the person calling you in your mobile phone display. Your P900 will also display the name and photograph of the caller if they are in Contacts. You can then make an informed choice as to whether or not to take the call. Bear in mind that not all numbers can be displayed. To use this service, it must be supported by your network. COM Port Defines a serial/RS-232 port within the Windows environment. CS Circuit Switched. Connection from A to B which has a fixed bandwidth and is maintained over a period of time, for example a voice phone call. CSD Circuit Switched Data. CSD is a GSM service providing a CS data connection at a rate of 9.6 or 14.4kbps. Terms and definitions 177 CSS Cascading Style Sheet. A feature of browsers. DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency. A method of coding digits as a combination of two audible tones. DUN Dial-Up Networking. The dial-up networking capability in Windows. e-GSM Extended GSM. New frequencies specified by the European Radio Communications Committee (ERC) for GSM use when additional spectrum is needed (network-dependent). It allows operators to transmit and receive just outside GSM's core 900MHz frequency band. This extension gives increased network capability. EMS Enhanced Messaging Service. An extension of SMS enabling pictures, animations, sound and text formatting to be added to text messages. FCC Federal Communications Commission. US government agency which regulates radio communications. GIF Graphics Interchange Format. Format for storing images which also supports animated images. Highly compressed by limiting the colour palette to 16 or 256 colours. It is one of the two most common file formats for graphic images on the World Wide Web. The other is JPEG. GPRS General Packet Radio Services. A radio technology for GSM networks that adds packet-switching protocols, shorter setup time for ISP connections, and offers the possibility of charging by the amount of data sent rather than by connection time. GPRS promises to support flexible data transmission rates typically up to 20 or 30 kbps (with a theoretical maximum of 171.2 kbps), as well as continuous connection to the network. GSM Global System for Mobile Communications. GSM is the world's most widely-used digital mobile phone system, now operating in over 160 countries around the world. GSM 900 The GSM system family includes GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900. GSM 900 refers to GSM working on a frequency of 900 MHz. 178 Terms and definitions GSM 1800 Also known as DCS 1800 or PCN, this is a GSM digital network working on a frequency of 1800 MHz. It is used in Europe and Asia-Pacific. GSM 1900 Also known as PCS. Refers to a GSM system running in the 1900 MHz band. Used in the USA and Canada, for instance. HSCSD High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data (HSCSD) is circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates of up to 64 kbps. HTML Hypertext Markup Language is the set of markup symbols or codes inserted in a file intended for display on a World Wide Web browser page. The markup tells the Web browser how to display a Web page's words and images. HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol. The communications protocol used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary function is to establish a connection with a Web server and transmit HTML pages to the client browser. IMAP4 Internet Message Access Protocol (the latest version is IMAP4) is a standard client/server protocol for accessing e-mail from your local server. The e-mail is received and held for you by your IMAP server. You (or your client e-mail receiver) can view just the heading and the sender of the letter and then decide whether to download the mail. IrDA The Infrared Data Association is dedicated to developing standards for wireless, infrared transmission systems between devices. With IrDA ports, a device such as your P900 can exchange data with other devices without a cable connection. IrDA requires line-of-sight transmission. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. Communication protocol offered by phone companies that permits phone networks to carry data, voice, and other source traffic. Selecting ISDN for CSD/HSCSD connections provides quicker call setup. ISP Internet Service Provider. An organisation that provides access to the Internet. JFIF JPEG File Interchange Format. Terms and definitions 179 JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group, best known for the .JPG format for still image compression. MBM Multiple Bit Map. Symbian OS bitmap format. MeT Mobile Electronic Transactions. An initiative founded by Ericsson, Nokia and Motorola to establish a secure and consistent framework for mobile transactions. MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a protocol designed for recording and playing back music on digital synthesizers that is supported by many makes of personal computer sound cards. MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. A protocol defining how messages are sent on the Internet. For example, MIME is used to describe how attachments are encoded and what type of data they contain. MMS Multimedia Messaging Service. Logical extension of SMS and EMS. MMS defines a service enabling sound, images and video to be combined into multimedia messages. It supports photo quality pictures, and sounds in WAV, MIDI, AMR, or Melodies format. MP3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 is a standard technology and format for compression a sound sequence into a very small file (about one-

twelfth the size of the original file) while almost preserving the original level of sound quality when it is played. MPEG-4 The Moving Picture Experts Group, develops standards for digital video and digital audio compression. It operates under the auspices of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). MPEG-4 goes far beyond compression methods. Instead of treating the data as continuous streams, MPEG-4 deals with audio/video items that can be manipulated independently, allowing for interaction with the coded data and providing flexibility in editing. MPEG-4 supports a wide range of audio and video modes and transmission speeds. OS Operating System, such as Symbian OS, Linux, Microsoft Windows. 180 Terms and definitions OTA Over The Air. A technology for transmission and reception of application related configuration information in a wireless communications system. PC Personal Computer. PCS Personal Communications Services, often used to describe GSM 1900 networks. PDA Personal Digital Assistant. A handheld computer having functions such as address book, calendar, and so on. PDF Portable Document Format. A format created by Adobe for storing and distributing documents. Phone book A memory in the SIM card where phone numbers can be stored and accessed by name or position. PIM Personal Information Management. Generic term for applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and so on. PIN A PIN is a personal identification number. PINs are commonly assigned to bank customers for use with automatic cash dispensers. They are also used, sometimes with a security token, for individual access to computer networks or other secure systems. PNG Portable Network Graphics. Format for storing images on file with data compression but without lowering of quality (loss of information). POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 is a standard client/server protocol for receiving e-mail. The e-mail is received and held for you by your POP server. Periodically, the P900 Messaging application can check your mail-box on the server and download any mail. Protocol In information technology, a protocol is the special set of rules that end points in a telecommunication connection use when they communicate. Protocols exist at several levels in a telecommunication connection. QQVGA Quarter Quarter VGA, 160 x 120 pixels. Terms and definitions 181 QVGA Quarter VGA size, typically refers to a portrait oriented screen 240 pixels wide x 320 pixels high. RS232 A standard for serial transmission between computers and peripheral devices SC Service Centre (for SMS). Service Provider A company that provides services and subscriptions to mobile phone users. SGML A generic markup language for representing documents. SIM A SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a smart card, inserted into GSM phones, that contains your phone account information. SIM cards can also be programmed to display custom menus for personalized services, for instance to assist operators in providing mobile commerce applications. SMS Short Message Service. Allows messages of up to 160 characters to be sent and received via the network operator's message centre to a mobile phone. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to send e-mail from an e-mail client via an SMTP server. SWIM A SWIM card is a SIM card containing a WIM. SyncML SyncML is a universal protocol for data synchronization, developed by the SyncML Initiative Ltd. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the basic communication language or protocol of the Internet. It can also be used as a communications protocol in a private network

(either an intranet or an extranet). TLS Transport Layer Security. Used by Web browsers, for example. SMIL Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language. Used by MMS to describe how media items are to be played. URL Uniform Resource Locator. Points to a service or information on the Internet, for example: http://www.SonyEricsson.com 182 Terms and definitions USB Universal Serial Bus. A plug-and-play interface between a computer and add-on devices (such as audio players, joysticks, keyboards, phones, scanners, and printers). With USB, a new device can be added to your computer without having to add an adapter card or even having to turn the computer off. USSD Unstructured Supplementary Services Data. Narrow-band GSM data service. For example entering *79*1234# might return the stock price for stock 1234. vCal; vCalendar vCalendar defines a transport and platform-independent format for exchanging calendar and scheduling information for use in PIMs/PDAs and group schedulers. vCalendar is specified by IETF. vCard vCard automates the exchange of personal information typically found on a traditional business card, for use in applications such as Internet mail, voice mail, Web browsers, phone applications, call centres, video conferencing, PIMs /PDAs, pagers, fax, office equipment, and smart cards. vCard is specified by IETF. VGA Video Graphics Array. Graphics standard introduced by IBM, having a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels. VPN Virtual Private Network. A private network that is configured within a public network. A VPN appear as private national or international network to the customer, but physically shares a backbone trunk with other customers. VPNs enjoy the security of a private network via access control and encryption, while taking advantage of the economies of scale and built-in management facilities of large public networks. Today, there is tremendous interest in VPNs over the Internet, especially due to the constant threat of hacker attacks. WAP Wireless Application Protocol is a specification for a set of communication protocols to standardise the way that wireless devices, such as cellular phones and radio transceivers, can be used for Internet access, including e-mail, the World Wide Web and newsgroups. WAV A Wave file is an audio file format, created by Microsoft, that has become a standard PC audio file format for everything from system and game sounds to CD-quality audio. A Wave file is identified by a file name extension of WAV (.wav). WBXML Wireless Binary Extensible Markup Language. Terms and definitions 183 XML Extensible Markup Language. An initiative from the W3C defining an extremely simple dialect of SGML suitable for use on the WWW. WIM The Wireless Identity Module is a data module for electronic identity certificates. It can contain both trusted and client certificates, private keys and algorithms needed for WTLS handshaking, encryption, decryption, and signature generation. The WIM module can be placed on a SIM card, called a SWIM card. WML Wireless Markup Language. A markup language used for authoring services, fulfilling the same purpose as HyperText Markup Language (HTML) does on the World Wide Web

(WWW). In contrast to HTML, WML is designed to fit small handheld devices. WTLS Wireless Transport Layer Security. Part of WAP, WTLS provides privacy, data integrity and authentication on transport layer level between two applications. W3C The main standards body for the WWW. xHTML Extensible Hypertext Markup Language. A reformulation of HTML 4.01 in XML. Being XML, means that XHTML can be viewed, edited, and validated with standard XML tools. At the same time, it operates as well as or better than HTML 4 in existing HTML 4 conforming user agents. 184 Terms and definitions Technical data General Antenna Speech Coding P900 standard version, Latin character set 115 x 57 x 24 mm 150 grams with battery and Flip. Product Size Weight System and power class E-GSM 900 Class 4 GSM 1800 Class 1 GSM 1900 Class 1 Built in HR, FR, EFR supported where available, for high speech quality. Small plug-in card, 3V or 5V type Symbian OS v7.0 with UIQ v2.1 user interface and applications environment ARM 9 For settings, user data (for example images, contacts, messages) and third-party applications: up to 16 Mbyte Memory Stick Duo, up to 128 Mbyte supported. 32 Mbyte Memory stick Duo supplied, plus adapter. 15 to +55 C Processor Internal User storage SIM Card Operating System Operating temperature Additional storage Screen Screen type Screen size Pixel size Colour resolution Screen surface Illumination TFT Flip closed: 208 x 208 pixels, 40 x 40 mm Flip open: 208 x 320 pixels, 40 x 61 mm 0.192 x 0.192 mm, or 132 ppi (Pixels Per Inch) 16-bit (65k colours) Touch-sensitive Variable intensity back-light Third Party Application Support SDKs Load formats Security C++, PersonalJava PJAE 1.1.1a, J2ME MIDP 2.0

/ CLDC HI 1.0 with JSR 120 and JSR 82 (partly), AppForge Microsoft Visual Basic v6 C++ or Java applications in Symbian SIS format. MIDP installation (JAR/JAD) from Browser or connected PC. Support for signed applications. Bluetooth wireless technology Bluetooth compatibility statement Coverage area This product is manufactured to comply with the Bluetooth specification 1.1. Up to 10 metres (33 feet) Technical data 185 Infrared transceiver Integrated CommuniCorder Data transmission rate Max speed between phone and IrDA device (that is a PC or another phone) SIR: up to 115,200 bps GPRS Maximum Data Rates (kbps) CS-1 9.05 kbps 36.2 9.05 CS-2 13.4 kbps 53.6 13.4 CS-3 15.6 kbps 62.4 15.6 CS-4 21.4 kbps 85.6 21.4 4 + 1 Rx Tx Speed achieved depends on the Coding Scheme supported by the GSM Network. HSCSD Maximum Data Rates (kbps) 9.6 kbps per time slot 2 + 1 Rx 19.2 9.6 Tx Phone 14.4 kbps per time slot 28.8 14.4 Personal ring tones -

supported Formats Sound clips as personal ring tones and default ring tone:

MP3, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, RMF (Beatnik) and WAV. Picture Size Colour depth Storage format 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) 320 x 240 pixels (QVGA) 160 x 120 pixels (QQVGA) 176 x 144 pixels (QCIF) 24 bit (16 million colours) Still pictures: JPEG/JFIF, 3 quality (compression) levels, user-selectable. Video: MPEG4 video with AMR sound. Pictures (Image viewer) Formats Sharing via JPEG, BMP, GIF (including animated), PNG, WBMP Infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology, MMS message, e-mail, PC file transfer, Memory Stick Video player File Format

.MP4 (MPEG4), 3GP Music player File Format

.MP3, WAV, AU, AMR and G-MIDI level 1 with 24 voices polyphony, RMF, iMelody 186 Technical data Integrated browser Markup languages HTML 3.2 (excluding features not relevant to a Audio formats Video formats AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, WAV MP4 small screen device) WML 1.3 WBXML xHTML Basic xHTML Mobile Profile cHTML 2.0 Compiled WML scripts WCSS WBMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG WTLS Class 1, 2, 3 TLS/SSL WIM interface including SIM-WIM (SWIM) 15 - 120kbyte user-configurable; 30kbyte default. WAP version Scripting Style sheets Images Security WIM Cache SMS Bearer Concatenated GSM and GPRS Up to 255 messages MMS Image formats Technical data GIF (including animated), JPG, BMP, WBMP, PNG EMS Supported items Sounds, Melodies, Pictures, Animations E-Mail Incoming mail server support POP3, IMAP4 Outgoing mail server support SMTP Content coding Security MIME compliant SMTP authentication, SSL encrypted IMAP4 and SMTP Receiving and sending Attachments Document viewer Pre-installed viewers Microsoft Word Microsoft Excel Microsoft Powerpoint Adobe Acrobat (PDF) Supplied on CD-rom Support for additional file types can be installed from the Multimedia for P900 CD. Note The pre-installed viewer for Microsoft Word documents cannot be used to view files in Rich Text format (.RTF) A separate viewer must be installed to view these files. 187 Index A Accented letters

- handwriting 2, 34 Accepted callers 52 Accessories 23 Add to contacts 51 Alarm tones 137 Alarms 114 ALS

- settings 55

- support 48 Antenna 173 AoC - Call meter settings 54 Application shortcuts 135 Applications

- flip closed 15

- installing 123

- overview 24

- removing 125, 160 Area information 154 Attachments 89 B Background picture 135 Backing up data 133 Battery

- charging 12

- information 174

- inserting 11

- removing 11 Bluetooth wireless technolo-

gy 128, 144

- bluetooth share 130

- headphone 129

- pairing 128

- passcodes 130 Bookmarks 76 Browser view 73 Browsing the internet 72 C Cable 145 Calculator 111 Calendar 101

- creating entries 101

- managing entries 102

- preferences 103

- sending and receiving entries 103 Call costs 54 Call list 45 Call waiting 52 Calling cards 53 Calls

- answering 40, 43

- conference 44

- diverting 52

- emergency 39

- flip closed 38

- flip open 41

- incoming 43

- international 38

- making 38, 41

- options 41, 43

- preferences 50

- rejecting 40, 43

- restricting 53

- retrying automatically 42

- speed dialing 42

- two or more 44

- voice control 50 Camera

- recording video clips 56

- settings 59

- taking pictures 58 Care instructions 173 Cell information 154 Certificate manager 156 Chess 80 Conference calls 44 Connecting

- via Bluetooth wireless technology 128

- via infrared port 127

- via SyncStation 126 Connection type 162 Connectivity software 126 Contacts 94

- adding images 136

- creating and managing contacts 97

- to add a contact 96

- to delete a contact 96 Control panel 138 Corporate phone services 49

- set up 54 D Data backup 133 Data restore 134 Data storage 30 Date settings 112 188 Index Find 28 First time start-up 13 Flight mode 47 Flip

- virtual 17 Flip closed 15 Flip open 16 Folders 27 Folders in Messaging 83 Formatting disks 156 G Games 80 General functions 27 Getting help 30 GPRS 162, 167 H Handsfree 51 Handwriting recognition 33

- accented letters 2, 34

- extended characters 35

- letters 2, 34

- numbers 2, 34 I Icons 20 Image editor 62 Image status 59 Demo application 24 Device lock 35, 169 Dial-Up Networking Wizard 166 Disk formatting 156 Display 138 Disposing of the battery 175 Diverting calls 52 Documents

- viewing 116 Drawing pictures 108 Driving 173 DTMF 47

- turning on 41 E Efficient use 173 E-mail 82, 88, 151 Emergency calls 39 EMS 84 Entering text

- flip closed 31

- flip open 32

- handwriting 33 Extended characters

- handwriting 35 F File manager 118 189 Importing phone book en-

tries 13 Incoming call picture 50 Incoming calls 43 Increasing ring 141 Indicator light 169 Indicators 20 Infrared 127, 145 Inserting symbols 31 Installing applications 123 International calls 38 International settings 140 Internet 72

- accounts 146

- bookmarks 76

- browser view 73

- browsing 72

- signing documents 76

- user authentication re-

quest 76 Introduction to P900 8 IP security manager 156 J Jog Dial 18 Jotter 107

- creating and editing notes 107

- drawing pictures 108

- managing notes 108

- sending and receiving notes 108 K Key functions 111 Key lock 36 Keyboard 33 Keypad functions 19 L Languages 158 Letters

- handwriting 2, 34 Local synchronization 131 Locations 113 Lock problems 169 Locks 35

- device 35

- key lock 36

- SIM card 35 M Making a call 95 Master reset 158 Media buffer 67 Medical Devices 174 Memory Stick Duo 21 Index

- adapter 22

- formatting 156 Messaging 82

- accounts 84, 150

- attachments 89

- e-mail 88

- folders 83

- MMS 85

- multimedia messages 85

- SMS 84

- text messages 84 MMS 82, 153 Mobile music 68 Modem 165 Multimedia for P900 122 Multimedia messages 82, 85 Music player 68 N Navigation 16 Networks 145 Notes 107

- creating and editing 107

- managing 108

- sending and receiving 108 Numbers 190

- formats 113

- handwriting 2, 34 O Off 13 On 13 Online services 120 On-screen keyboard 33 Operational modes 14 Options menu 15 Owner card 100 P P900 Locks 35 P900 overview 10 P900 package 9 PC connectivity software 126 PC Suite for P900 121 PDF files

- viewing 117 Personalizing your P900 135 Phone book

- importing entries 13 Pictures 60

- drawing 108

- sending and receiving 61

- taking 58

- viewing 60 PIN 35 PIN2 35 Powerpoint presentations

- viewing 117 PUK 35 R Radio Frequency 173 Recording sounds 109 Remote synchronization 132 Removing applications 125 Restoring data 134 Restricting calls 53 Retry to call 42 Ring signals 136 Ring volume 141 S SAR 173 Screen areas 17 Screen saver 135 Secure tokens 159 Security information 157 Self timer - picture 58 Self timer - video 57 Send as 29 Sending notes 108 Service provider 162 Services 24 Settings 31 Setup Wizard 13 Shortcuts 160 Silent mode 46 SIM card 11 SIM card lock 35 SMS 82, 84, 153 Solitaire 80 Sony Ericsson Update Serv-

ice (SEUS) 127 Sony Image Station 63 Sound files

- loop 69

- managing 69

- playing 68 Sound notification 137 Sound recorder 109 Sound recordings 109

- sending and receiving 110

- using as ring signals 110 Sounds and alerts 140 Speakerphone 46 Speed dial

- making a call 42

- set-up 46 Index Virtual flip 17 Voice control 50 Voice mail 53 Volume

- changing 41 W Wallpaper 135 WAP accounts 155 Warranty 175 WIM management 160 Z Zooming 28 Spreadsheets

- viewing 116 Standby view 15 Start-up 13 Storage manager 159, 171 Storing data 30 Streaming 66 Symbols 31 Synchronization

- local 131

- remote 132 T T9 text input 31 Tasks 104 Technical data 185 Text input 31, 140 Text messages 84 Themes 135 Time 112

- alarms 114

- locations 113

- number formats 113

- settings 112

- workdays 113 Time & date settings 156 Tone based services 47 Touchscreen lock 37 Transfer items with Send As 29 Troubleshooting 169 TTY settings 54 TTY support 48 Turning on and off 13 U Uninstalling applications 125, 160 User greeting 142 V Video 56 Video clips

- downloading 67

- managing 65

- playing 64

- saving 66

- sending and receiving 66 Video status 57 Viewer 115 Viewing

- documents 116

- PDF files 117

- powerpoint presenta-

tions 117

- spreadsheets 116 191 Index